Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Landing Party Manu 00 Unit
Landing Party Manu 00 Unit
"\
LANDING PARTY
MANUAL
UNITED STATES NAVY
1950
LANDING PARTY
MANUAL
UNITED STATES NAVY
1950
WASHINGTON
1950
For sale by the Superintendent of Docurcer>ts, U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C.
LETTER OF PROMULGATION
The Landing Party Manual, United States Navy, 1950, contains instrucNaval landing parties and emergency ground defense force units and
It is effective
it is issued for the use and guidance of the U. S. Naval Service.
upon receipt and supersedes the publication Landing Force Manual, United
tions for
States
thereto.
Francis P. Mathews.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface.
Chapter
1.
2.
Introduction.
Drill.
3.
Ceremonies.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Shelter.
Field Sanitation, Personal Hygiene, and First Aid.
Marches, Security on the March, and Outposts.
Basic Combat Techniques.
12.
Combat Principles.
Special Operations.
Physical Drill.
13.
14.
Glossary.
10.
11.
ni
PREFACE
The Landing Party Manual
published in fourteen chapters to facilitate changes and to provide for issue of separate chapters to organizations not requiring the complete publication.
The Navy acknowledges the courtesy of the Army and Marine Corps for authorizing the
is
Rank
Entered by
Authority
Date entered
Change No.
...
!...._....
1
'
1,
1950
INTRODUCTION
Section
I.
II.
III.
Scope of Manual
Organization of Naval Landing Party
Organization of Units Within Naval Landing Party
Par.
Page
1-1
1-2
1-11
Section
SCOPE OF MANUAL
Par.
Page
1-1
drills
Scope of manual.
1-1
manual are
intended as a guide for the training and operations of landing parties organized by units
afloat and emergency ground defense force units
and instructions set forth
organized
Where
at
naval
in this
shore
establishments.
landing parties,
it is
applicable.
b.
(1)
tactics
The scope
by or are
avail-
In general,
Section II
Par.
1-2
1-3
14
1-5
16
1-7
18
1-9
1-10
General
Ship's landing party
Training
Use of marines
Ratings and ranks
1-2
GENERAL.a.
is
c.
CA,
specified in
Combatant
of
known
CV
One
CVL,CA,CL,CLC- One
BB, CVB,
rifle
CLK
One
company
company
platoon
One
one
less
one
less
one
Division flagships of
rifle
platoon.
followed.
1-4
ZATION.
specific task
may
commander
c.
Service
organization.
The
organization
will indicate
and
and machine
gun platoon.
DD
less
platoon.
rifle
rifle
platoon
company.
rifle
rifle
CLAA,
rifle
squad.
5
5
5
5
5
banded together
One
l-15c).
Each
1-3
CM
l-3b below),
division, force, and fleet shall maintain a permanently organized naval landing party conthe organization
4
4
4
fleet
a landing
party is required to take part in a parade or
ceremony, the organization of personnel in
d.
same
as the service
may
be
should not
normally required
ship
(1) Split
AND
EQUIPMENT
AMMUNI-
(2)
(3)
(4)
TION.
Since
a.
it is
during an emergency, the equipment and weapons prescribed are limited to light infantry
weapons and that equipment which can be
carried on the person.
b.
NAVORD
List of Small
Arms
rent
NAVORD
List of Small
Arms Ammuni-
and Stations.
Many
automatic
1-6
rifles in
BASIS
the
rifle
squads.
OF ORGANIZATION.The
of
similar
1-7
taken
from
PRIORITY OF PERSONNEL.a. At
personnel
department on a watch-and-watch
mony.
1-5
be
for:
basis.
(5)
(6)
in-three basis.
b.
The
size
of
naval
emergency
ground
tasks required.
1-8
TRAINING. Periodic
training
is
nec-
essary to keep the naval landing party organization in a state of readiness for any of its
probable tasks.
and
integrated
schedules.
An
1-9
USE OF MARINES.Marines
compose the
will
whenever the
number present is adequate. In a mixed force
the special training of Marine officers and men
entire landing party
will
1-10 RATING AND RANKS.Throughout this manual ratings and ranks of various
members of the units discussed are given as a
guide to show relative importance of the various
offices and as such are not mandatory.
Section III
Par.
b.
1-11
1-12
1-13
114
115
116
1-17
SQUAD.
12
officer
and 44
enlisted.
of:
platoon leader.
second class platoon chief
(jg)
officer,
or ensign
officer,
nonrated
The
c.
men
messengers.
petty
11
rifle
1-11
lieutenant
composed
is
(second in command).
petty
third class platoon guide.
Medical
(1)
litter
officer or hospital
corpsman and
bearers as required.
RIFLE
SQUAD
PO Squad Ldr.
1
FIRE TEAM
1
Fire
Team
FIRE
TEAM
Team
3 Members
Ldr.
3 Members
Fire
Figure
1.
FIRE
Ldr.
Fire
TEAM
Team
Ldr.
3 Members
Organization, the
rifle
squad.
RIFLE PLATOON
I
Officer
44 Enlisted
I
Plat.Hq.
I
Rifle
Squad
Rifle
Squad
Rifle
Squad
Officer
5 Enlisted
6 Total
13 Enlisted
13 Enlisted
13 Enlisted
l3Total
13 Total
13 Total
Figure
2.
Organization, the
rifle
platoon.
Bn.Hq.Co.
6i Total
Int.
8 Officers
27
664
Total
Rifle Co.
Section
Officer)
(I
Officers
195
Enlisted
201 Total
Officers
195
Enlisted
20! Total
CommPlatoon
Co.Hq.
Supply Section
(I
2 Officers
Officer)
_5 Enlisted
5 Total
5 Total
Rifle Co.
Officers
_5 Enlisted
Total
Enlisted
j95 Enlisted
201 Total
5| Enlisted
\9 Enlisted
Officers
Rifle Co.
10 Officers
Hq. Section
28
636
(I
Officer)
Enlisted
l_3
II
Total
13 Total
Enlisted
(3)
(4)
signalman
section.
one
as
of
the
platoon
messengers.
1-13 ORGANIZATION
of
is
lieutenant
petty
(jg)
or ensign
officer,
first
is
composed
of:
platoon leader.
platoon chief
nonrated
men
(1
ammunition man,
2 messengers).
Each
composed of a section
Each section
headquarters and two squads.
headquarters is composed of one petty officer
c.
section
is
When
missions,
rifle
is
composed
platoons, and
total of 6 officers
b.
The
of
1
company headquarters,
and 195
enlisted.
organization of the
initial
company
Company
headquarters
section
is
headquarters.
organized
composed
of
as
two
The
the
company
headquarters
officers
and eight
class
(second in command).
3
nation.
sections.
b.
strength
enlisted as follows:
1
lieutenant,
USN company
commander.
executive
chief petty
company CPO
sergeant)
infantry
petty
second
petty
pharmacist
mate.
petty
third
storekeeper.
nonrated man signalman.
nonrated man small-arms gunner's
mate.
2 nonrated menmessengers.
1 It. (jg)
or ensign
officer.
officer
officer,
1
1
1
officer,
(first
class
class
chief.
8
d.
company organized
independent
for
The organization
pany.
of a naval landing
to
(2)
consisting
Artificers.
is
may
be
for
as a
composed of
rifle
its
Suitable modifications in
of
anticipated mission.
include in
platoon.
rifle
Band
personnel
ceremonies.
RIFLE COMPANY
6 Officers
195 Enlisted
201 Total
Co.Hq.
Rifle Platoon
2 Officers
8 Enlisted
Rifle
Officer
10 Total
44
Officer
Enlisted
45
Total
44 Enlisted
45 Total
Figure
4.
Platoon
Organization, the
Rifle
1
Platoon
Officer
44 Enlisted
45 Total
rifle
MG
Platoon
Officer
55 Enlisted
56 Total
company.
MACHINE-GUN PLATOON
I
55
Platoon Hq.
I
Officer
Enlisted
Section Hq.
Section Hq.
Section Hq.
Officer
4 Enlisted
5 Total
Enlisted
1 Total
Squad
Squad
8 Enlisted
8 Total
8 Enlisted
8 Total
Figure
5.
Enlisted
1 Total
Squad
8 Enlisted
8 Total
J[
I
Enlisted
Total
Squad
8 Enlisted
8 Total
Squad
8 Enlisted
8 Total
The
battalion headquarters
to the battalion
functions,
commander
fur-
command and
ecution of his
company
administrative
will
The
enable the battalion to be self-contained.
headquarters company is broken down into
subdivisions. The composition of each subdivision as shown below should be followed as a
ouide.
In some cases two or more functions
may be
filled
by one
Provides
for the
1 It.
(See
of:
messengers
panies.
1
company commander.
or ensign company executive
It.
(jg)
who
chem-
ical officer.
(3)
The
Communication platoon.
communi-
comprises
Platoon headquarters
1 It.
(jg)
petty
is
composed
of:
battalion communica-
or ensign-
battalion
complement
of the
staff.
second
in
com-
mand.
general, a
com-
third class
communication
in charge.
man yeoman
nonrated
striker.
petty
third class
officer,
made up
radioman
in
charge.
Supply
section.
This
section,
on the battalion
working
staff, is
assistant to
third class
officer,
the
ammunition
and ordnance.
3 nonrated men-
by supply
officer.
Commanded by the
(5) Intelligence section.battalion intelligence officer, carried in the complement
the battalion
of
staff,
composed
as
yeoman
in
follows
1
petty
officer,
second class
charge.
class
officer,
platoon
officer,
rifle
as follows:
officer.
be assigned from
made up
yeoman
cation
petty
Additional
staff as required.
may
It is
lieutenant
officer
commander and
(4)
This
organized as follows:
(2)
it.
par. l-15e.)
composed
and delivered by
of the
It comprises
battalion as a whole.
received, recorded,
as follows
officer.
Headquarters section.
(1)
telligence clerk).
2 nonrated
Medical
observers.
The
medical section is
(6)
incorporated in the Headquarters section and is
composed of 1 medical officer and 11 enlisted.
Corpsmen may be prorated to the rifle companies, a portion retained to form the battahon
section.
aid station.
d. Responsibility for
headquarters company.-
training
(1)
the
battalion
The
responsibility for
and section
is
whom
10
Company
(3)
order
training
The battalion
e.
will
staff.
close-
include
drill.
commander
is
as
oUows
1
lieutenant
mand;
commander
in
com-
operations
supply
lieutenant medical
or ensign adjutant.
or ensign- communication
or ensign-intelligence
chief petty officer battalion chief petty
1 liexitenant
1
second
lieutenant
officer.
officer.
1 It. (jg)
officer.
1 It (jg)
officer.
1 It. (jg)
1
petty
steward.
chief
officer'
chief
commissary
yeoman.
second class yeoman.
petty
third
2 petty
yeoman.
third class gunner's mate.
petty
nonrated man yeoman striker.
1
petty
officer,
officer,
class-
officers,
commander.
Battalion adjutant.
In addition
he supervises:
Postal service.
Reports
prisoners of
officer.'
Responsible
and
for the
evaluation
Operations
officer.
Responsible, in genthose functions which relate to
organization, training, and operations. He
arranges for coordination and employment in
(4)
for
eral,
He
per-
1.
Training.
2.
and
3.
Prepares
for,
and supervises:
tions.
2. Instructions, tactical plans, and operation
orders received from higher or adjacent units.
(c)
timely delivery to the troops. Prepares estiof the situation and plans for combat
mates
when required. Assists the organization commander in the preparation and issuance of oral
operation orders.
supply officer is
matters relating
His duties include the supervision
to supply.
of activities concerning:
(a) Procurement, storage, and distribution of
(5)
all
all supplies,
disposition.
Construction
(c)
of
facilities
relating
to
(e)
of
(6)
clude
classification,
His
employment of translators
and interpreters and procurement and distribution of maps.
He also keeps the commander
(d)
Intelligence
collection,
(d)
(a)
his organization's
(a)
officer.
(a)
toon,
Communication
officer.
claims.
His
duties
in-
Command
and
of the
communications pla-
and functioning.
11
Reg.Hq.Co.
NavLandPar
NavLandPar
Battalion
Battalion
Battalion
Enlisted
28 Officers
636 Enlisted
Total
664 Total
14 Officers
85
99
NavLandPar
Hq. Section
Int.
2 Officers
_8 Enlisted
(I
Supply Plat.
Plat.
Officer)
(2 Officers)
_8 Enlisted
20 Total
_[5
8 Total
Enlisted
15 Total
28
28
Officers
636 Enlisted
664 Total
Med.
Comm.Plat.
Co. Hq.
Officers
636 Enlisted
664 Total
Officers
Officer)
(I
[5 Enlisted
16 Enlisted
17 Total
16 Total
Plat.
(2 Officers)
23 Enlisted
23 Total
center.
(7)
officer.
and
Supply
The regiment
of
USN.
(2) The executive
is
commanded by
a cap-
tain,
(a)
(6)
prin
Medical
The
The
(3)
mental
of
the
regi-
paymaster.
chaplain.
dental
warrant
supplies.
staff are of
a commander.
members
(c)
officer is
individual
(5)
The
officer.
officer, assistant to
supply
officer.
servers.
headquarters.
1-16
b.
The
formation,
functions,
pany
are, in general,
7952875C
re-
mem-
headquarters com-
(6)
(7)
The
(8)
section,
designated
three
as
The supply
section,
designated
as
Company
headquarters
in
the
regi-
12
1-17
a.
b.
c.
TABLES OF ORGANIZATION.
company naval landing party.
Headquarters company naval landing party
Naval landing party battalion.
Rifle
RIFLE
battalion.
Ha
c
o
o
o>
</>
(/>
k_
<v
k-
Machine-gun platoon
to
w.
0)
05
o
3
O
a>
Se<o
o
o
o
oo
0_
CO
Q>
c
3
JZ
CT
Xcr
<T
IS ll
o o o
II
a\
a>
(A
ocO
SlO
oOCT
O
3
o
o
o
(0
a.
cr
0)
Executive officer
(l)c
Platoon commander.
(I)C
(Dc
Total Commissioned.
Ic
Infantry chief
(l)c
Platoon chief,
(l)c
I
(l)c
rifle
Pharmacist's mate
Pistol,
(I)
.C
(DP
officer.
cr
o
3
Lieutenant
Commanding
cB
a>
-
jC
(0
Section
k_
CT
"O
Rifle platoon
CT
^o
XO
ow
it. oro
^
S 10 I
. .
Co.
Hq.
c
o
o
a>
w>
Machine-gun platoon
i_
o>
O"
CT
o x>
o
a>
o
3
CT
-o
0)
oB
k.
a>
c
3
c/>
o>
I
JZ
0)"O
CTJ c
ss-
CO
c
o
o
a
0)
0-
CO
JC
to
ro
o
^
|2
Platoon guide,
leader,
c
o
o
rifle
O W) 5
o OXJ
3 53 e CT
to
a>
Q-cr glO
CO
"O
.0
is
a:
16
(I)
0)c
(Dc
rifle
Storekeeper.
XJ
Squad
CT
OO X)
O
o .2 0>
cr
CT
<T
So
o5
k.
a>
Rifle platoon
C5g
Section
k_
CO
13
(Dc
36
3
(3)
(Dc
Signalman, visual
(Dc
Small-arms mechanic
(l)c
(Dc
Gunner, machine
(Dp
(Dp
(5)c
14
44
Rifleman
30
136
195
(3)
Rifleman messenger
(2)
(2)c
(3)
Rifleman automatic
(3)b
(3)
Total Enlisted.
17
55
44
Total Navy.
10
17
56
45 201
13
44
65
12
Individual
weapons
c-Carbine, .30
caliber.
14
3
9
27
95
14
o
o
a>
co
o
o
CO
to
a>
a>
w.
o
O"
-o
Communications
platoon
o
c
a>
o
o
a.
a.
o>
O CD
a>
X
Commander
Battalion commander
Lt. commander
CO
CD
(O
oi
"53
00c
o c o
o^
u
a> o
CD
a o a>
CO CO Jg
CO
k_
Q>
Q_
co
CD
Oa
or
Q>
h-
O
cr
o
>
a>
a.
JZ
>s
C
o
a.
E
E
o
o
(Dp
Operations officer
(Dp
Company commander
(Dc
Supply officer
(Dc
*Medical officer
(I)
or ensign....
Adjutant
Communication
Lieutenant......
(jg)
k_
(Dp
Executive officer
Lieutenant
Q-
CO
2
(Dc
(l)c
officer...
(Dc
Intelligence officer
(Dc
officer.
Total Commissioned.
Chief
yeoman
Ic
mate
*Chief pharmacist's mate
Chief steward's
Ic
I
Ic
Infantry chief
Yeoman,
first
Radioman,
first
Storekeeper,
(Dc
class
"Pharmacist's mate,
first class.
(Dc
(2)
class
first
(Dc
(Dc
class
Boatswains mate
(Dc
"Pharmacist's mate
(2)
Yeoman
(Dc
15
(O
c
g
o
a>
to
co
i_
a>
i
Communications
platoon
o
o
a>
CO
a>
o
c
c
o
o
Q.
a.
T3
a>
05
Q>
k_
c
oo
CO
O a>
o
a>
to
_>
o-
to
a>
a>
a*
o>
*,
CO
"O Q.
o
to
or
in
a>
O
3
or
o
a>
XL
>*
C
o
a.
E
o
c
o
a.
o
o
Pharmacist's mate
(2)
Carpenter
(I)
Yeoman
Message center
(2)
(I)
Supply
(I)
Radio
(l)c
Small arms
Seaman,
(I)
first
class
Clerk
Code
(I)
clerk
(l)c
Draftsman
(I)
Intelligence clerk
(I)
Supply
(I)
Radio general
(l)c
Bugler
(2)c
Seaman, first
Messenger
or second class..
Radio operator
(4}c
Scout
(2)
*Hospital apprentice
(4)
Other duty
(2)c
(4)
Total Enlisted
51
27
Total Navy.
Individual
II
61
weapons
c Carbine,
p Pistol,
All
20
(4)
.30 caliber
.45 caliber
pistols,
27
19
15
15
.45
16
company
rifle
Total
companies
battalion
15
19
10
18
28
Commander
Lt. commander
Lieutenant
Lieutenant
(jg)
or ensign.
Total Commissioned.
Chief
yeoman
Chief boatswain's
mate
mate
Chief steward's mate
Chief pharmacist's
Yeoman
Radioman
Gunner's mote
Pharmacists mate
3
3
3
5
9
3
10
Storekeeper
Petty officer, second class.
Yeoman
Boatswain's mate
Pharmacist's mate
45
Boatswain's mate
Radioman
Carpenter
Storekeeper
Pharmacist's mate
Gunner's mate
Seaman, first
or second class ;
Total
Individual
45
28
516
544
61
603
664
27
195
222
42
57
weapons
Yeoman
.30
cal.
Rifle,. 30 cal
Browning Auto.
M-l
15
81
81
285
304
DRILL
17
Chapteb
DRILL
Page
Par.
Section
I.
General
Individual
III. Individual
IV. Drill, the
V. Drill, the
VI. Drill, the
II.
Squad
Platoon
Company
VII. Formations of the Battalion
VIII. Formations of the Regiment
2-1
21
2-8
2-10
2-19
2-37
2-56
2-69
2-78
26
36
63
70
19
79
85
90
Section
GENERAL
Par.
Page
2-1
21
Drill instructors
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
22
23
23
24
24
25
Grouping
Commands
General rules for close-order
Detail
drill
drill
Mass commands
GENERAL.a.
2-1
poses of
drills
Purpose. The
pur-
are to:
Give junior
practice in
(4)
of a unit,
Scope.
b.
ter
is
The
drill
of organizations
shown
The diagrams
line
(7) Distance.
Definitions.
(1)
Alinement.
straight
of individuals or vehicles,
him
units.
The color and color guard are
not considered in measuring distance between
subdivisions of a unit with which they are
posted.
The distance between ranks of dismounted men is 40 inches, in both line and
column.
between
(8)
Double time.
of a
still
An individual,
squad, section,
larger unit.
(10) File.
column
of individuals or ve-
ment
(4)
is
in line or in
regulated.
measured, with
is
hicles
is
Distance
(3)
orders.
ele-
(3)
(11) Flank.
The right or
left of
command
or left of the
line.
22
(14)
command
An
(or
upon
individual
whom
the
its
march.
(15) Head.-
The
element of a
leading
column.
Interval.
(16)
Space
laterally
between
ele-
is
4 inches.
(17)
Left.
The
extremity or element of
left
a body of troops.
intervals.
(20) Pace.
the
full
(21)
in this
matic
(22)
indi-
carbine, or auto-
Quick time.
A of individuals or vehicles
Right. The right extremity or element
Rank.
line
of a
body
of troops.
(25) Step.-
DRILL
INSTRUCTORS.a,
The
It is the distance
is
The
an important
Avill
will
tor
and petty
officers are:
A detailed and
(1)
thorough knowledge of
all
drills.
it.
The
ment properly
until
ficiency is attained.
rifle.
rifle,
2-2.
The good
e.
mind
drill
instructor
refreshes
his
He
The
g.
so that
precision
it
may
command and
LETTERS.
briefly
He
it.
requires
men
Generally,
c.
It is the
are indicated in
entire unit.
h.
23
troops,
the
the platoon
is
commands and
The
instructor exacts
precision
i.
by degrees the
desired
duration.
GROUPING.a.
In order to facilitate
individual instruction, men are divided into
small groups. Each of these groups is formed
as a squad.
(See pars. 2-19 and 2-20.)
As
b.
tors.
men who
are
given
firm,
but
men
to insure
quiet
that they
and considerate
of
COMMANDS.a.
The
command,
such
If at
2.
MARCH,
f.
The cadence
as
or
of
desired
movement,
manual
to be executed.
such as
which causes the
execution,
ARMS,
commands should be
ad-
The
interval or
is
For the squad or platoon, the best interthat which allows the planting of one foot
2.
for
example
1.
MARCH.
command
nation.
of
is
to be executed.
When appropriate, the
preparatory command includes the unit desig-
The command
are
1.
interval
(2)
commands
for movements
column right,
not prefaced by the command
a halt, the
MARCH, HALT,
own unit
when all
movement
of their
column
preparatory
movement
simultaneously.
val
commands.
(1)
men
(1)
handling.
2-4
FORWARD.
2-3
face
d.
e.
or
about.
and uniformity.
Drills
drill
command
prepared
command
for
the
of
for
to be
execution.
themselves or with
individuals representing the subordinate commanders is the best exercise in achieving this.
24
GENERAL RULES
ORDER DRILL.a. The
FOR
2-5
CLOSE-
explanation
of
movement
description
to
execution
of
flank, it
word
is
the movement
necessary only
(2)
command
of the
For
e.
drill
conforms.
resumed.
c. Unless otherwise announced, the guide of
an element of a company in column or line is
is
right.
(1)
To march with
commands
TER), are
file is
is
GUIDE RIGHT
given.
The
(LEFT), (CEN-
leading
man
in each
The guide
march.
(2)
The announcement
of the guide,
when
The
/.
units are
shown
may
line,
guidons,
officer,
the text.
movement
ing units, or in
or facing
when
align-
to another,
officers
(3) In column, the guide of the leading platoon is charged with the step and direction;
the guides in the rear preserve the space, step,
left, 2. MARCH, the guide will, on the preparatory command, take position in front of
the left file so that he will be at the head of
the column.
(6) When a platoon in column is given the
and
distance.
(4)
When
commands:
commands:
left,
2.
1.
1.
MARCH,
the guide
will,
on the pre-
and petty
bearing and
(2)
formation,
When
petty
necessary.
into motions
column
bers," the
(1)
file
of the
of twos.
may
be
executed
They
movements
d.
officers
maintain a military
precision.
In
initial
(4)
officers
move with
the
and executed
may
command
prompt execution
be divided
in detail.
When
of execution determines
of the first motion.
The
the
etc.
To
movement
commands
BY THE NUMBERS;
25
Instructor:
(2)
move-
1.
2.
COMMAND.
all
Mass:
timidity,
diffidence,
upon
and
awkwardness
a. Each individual is required to give commands as if he alone were giving them to the
The volume of the combined
entire unit.
performing
the
man
to exert himself in
(1)
(2)
(3)
drill,
CADENCE DRILL
to indi-
he announces the movement to be exeand the personnel of the unit give the
commands and execute them in unison. Examples are:
drill,
cuted,
(1)
1.
FORWARD,
2.
MARCH.
1.
2.
COMMAND.
Mass:
announces:
FORWARD MARCH,
COMMAND.
Instructor:
command
The
1.
2.
Mass:
b.
fined to simple
c.
HALT.
d.
in
precision.
COMMAND.
2.
Mass commands in drill are usually conmovements with short preparatory commands and commands of execution
which are executed simultaneously by all
elements of the unit. Movements which re-
1.
2.
Mass:
1. PLATOON,
and
RIGHT.
FACE.
Instructor:
(3)
his
1.
2.
e.
1.
2.
MARCH.
When
1.
2.
COMMAND.
ground
Instructor:
Mass:
1. PLATOON,
2.
ATTENTION.
in
a boisterous
Section
II
Par.
Page
2-8
2-9
26
31
neck
is
Position of attention.
line and as near each
Knees
heels
(8)
(7)
(See
Figurk 1. Position
(4)
erect
and
equally.
26
hands out;
fingers held
and audibly.
fig. 1.)
of attention.
b.
Rests.
halt.
All
rests
The commands
AT EASE;
(1)
naturally.
angle of 45.
(3)
chin
(6)
POSITIONS. a.
2-8
ARMS
At
the
REST.
command FALL OUT, men
and
1.
parade,
2.
leave
(2)
right foot
mobility,
(4)
1.
AT EASE,
kept in place.
is
the right
required.
At the command
parade,
Silence,
2.
of execution
REST, move
REST,
of
Figure
2.
left of
body
rests equally
on both
feet.
to
the rear,
thumb and
left
command is
tion only.
(5)
OUT,
and immobility.
are:
1.
7952S7 50-
commands
(LEFT),
are:
3.
Facings.
d.
The
opposite
is
and 4.)
All facings are executed from
(See
figs.
Right,
(left)
right, (left;)
This
FACE, which
SQUAD, (platoon, company, etc.) 2. ATTENTION. At the command ATTENTION, take the position of
commands
Tbe
1.
left.
RIGHT,
2.
con-
fig. 2.)
or
right
Parade rest.
thumb without
eyes,
ready,
4. FRONT.
At the command RIGHT, each
man turns his head and eyes smartly to the
right.
Tbe men on the extreme right file keep
their bead and eyes to the front.
At the
command FRONT, tbe head and eyes are
At the same
Eyes
c.
1.
At the command
(3)
foot
Silence
is
27
ONE
in this
is
face.
2.
movement,
and the
toe;
face to the right,
turning on the right heel, assisted by a slight
pressure on the ball of the left foot. Hold the
right
heel
left
leg
straight
without
stiffness.
(TWO)
28
Figure 3. Eyes
(1)
Right
face.
-t
Figure 4. Eyes
right.
(2)
One.
Figure 5. Right
(3)
face.
left.
Two.
(1)
Left face.
(2)
One.
Figure 6. Left
29
(3)
face.
Two.
30
The
commands
saluted.
are:
1.
(TWO) Return
to its
Men
in
to
swing wide.
until
assurance in execution.
(See
hand smartly
slightly
thumb and
to
the right of
fingers extended
(1)
About
face.
hand smartly
Saluting
distance
which recognition
is
easy.
is
in
that
one motion
(See
side.
fig. 8.)
distance
Usually
the right
eye,
(2)
at
does not
rendered
six paces
it
when
ARMS
fig. 7.)
Hand salute.
(1) The commands are: 1. hand, 2. SALUTE.
At the command SALUTE, raise the right
e.
and
(2)
the
ARMS
One.
Figure 7. About
(3)
face.
Two.
Figure 8. Hand
command
the
hand
salute
eral.
is
(1)
When
executed
from
halt,
with the
left foot.
while
forward,
forward,
2.
MARCH.
shift the
At
the
command
and
the body.
c. Double time.
To march in double time,
being at a halt or in march in quick time, the
commands are: 1. double time, 2. MARCH.
If
at a halt, at the
command double
When
(1)
(2)
(3)
salute.
all
31
At
command MARCH,
the
with the step and cadence of double time, allowing the arms to take a natural swinging motion
across the front of the body.
Be sure to keep
the forearms horizontal.
(2)
mand:
If
1.
marching
double time,
2.
MARCH,
com-
given as
off in
more
double
time.
30-
arms
the
command MARCH,
movement.
At
march with
about 6 inches
(3)
time,
and
sides.
32
The
commands
1.
squad
at the
time.
strikes
Halt.
d.
(platoon, company),
are:
HALT.
2.
time.-
Being
(1)
mark
the
at
command
ground
strikes the
on
heels are
When
line,
raising
alternately
raised,
at
MARCH,
first
and plant
raise
the
the
command
foot,
left
any
correct
errors in alinement.
The
(4)
vertical
halt
steps
is
in
Forward march,
place
of
horizontal
halt,
steps.
may
be
Half
step,
2.
step.
The
commands
are:
is
(2)
at the command
in march,
take steps of 15 inches in quick time
g.
step,
The
half
commands
Right
2.
step.
are:
1.
forward,
The commands
MARCH.
MARCH,
The back
rear.
To face
The
2.
are:
At the command
MARCH.
1.
right
MARCH,
to
the right
(left)
in marching.
movements
interval,
as
and extend.
instruction
facing
in
to
the
riglit
1.
(left)
in
by the right
To
(2)
in
marching
in march, at the
command
(left)
and step
marching
off
To face
mands
(1)
the
half
Being
(1)
MARCH,
step
1.
MARCH.
of such
march,
in
The
time.
j.
1.
MARCH.
2.
The
straight.
Mark
step.
MARCH.
2.
strikes
When
e.
Left
h.
step,
quick time.
The
at the
time,
straight.
together.
are:
to the rear
1.
in marching.
to the rear,
2.
The com-
MARCH.
command MARCH,
left foot.
(2)
(See
Being
in
fig. 9.)
march
command MARCH,
strikes the ground,
(1)
March.
(2)
One.
Figure 9. To the
commands
flank,
1.
MARCH.
2.
MARCH,
and step
off in
the
(See
(left) foot.
m. To change
1.
CHANGE
(1)
mand
STEP,
Being
in
new
fig.
2.
The
commands
are:
MARCH.
march
MARCH
marching
10.)
step.
(3)
rear,
and step
off
with the
left foot.
ing the right foot; then plant the toe of the left
foot near the heel of the right
and step
off
with
are:
1.
tain silence or to
o.
com-
Two.
march.
(2)
Being in march,
by the right (left)
At the command
the flank.
are:
33
To march
at ease,
march
at ease.
2.
MARCH, men
in
cadence at attention.
1.
MARCH.
are
At the command
not required to march in
tain silence.
34
'&:
(1)
March.
'
(2)
One.
(3)
Figure
Two.
10.
35
Section III
Par.
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
General
Manual
Loadings and
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
firings,
of arms, the
of
of
of
of
of
the
rifle
automatic
rifle
36
36
44
46
46
49
the
cable,
inspection,
is
made
2.
commands:
before dismissal.
If
cartridges are
(1)
Weapons
(2)
in either the
At
all
may
the
command at trail
2.
MARCH.
MARCH,
When
(3)
and closing
be
at trail, forward,
The
and
is
position of trail
(4)
the
rifle
ARMS,
is
given.
mand REST
or
UNSLING ARMS,
except in
when executing
port and
equipment
may
men
and
e.)
In
carrying such
and 2-14.)
The bayonet is fixed only when so ordered.
Individual
spring.
trail
command with
tory
as: 1.
2.
2-14.)
c.
Movements
(2)
executed at the
51
56
58
ARMS
man
in
ranks,
the
ment.
a.
e.
(1)
Before
starting
36
rifles,
2-11
In
all
positions
of
the
left
hand at the
thumb
clasps the
rifle;
the sling
is
37
marches
(See fig.
included in the grasp of the hand.
In describing the manual of arms, the
11.)
al attention.
of
e.
arms
tion
/.
Figure
6.
In
all
11.
is
rifle
diagonally
Figure
g.
Trail
12.
arms.
Being
command is: 1.
command ARMS,
at
trail,
2.
order arms,
the
ARMS. At
the
and
incline the
arm
slightly bent.
h.
Order arms.
(See
fig. 13.)
Being
at
trail
arms,
the
BY THE NUMBERS.
It
is
order.
Being
at
sling, 2.
ARMS.
the
This movement is not executed in cadence and may be
supplied to any rifle, automatic rifle, light
i.
Sling arms.
command
is:
1.
order arms,
38
::
:
Figure
13.
Position of
trail
arms.
machine gun,
SLINGS.
just, 4.
adjustment of the
precise
executed.
k.
Port
arms.
made
before
manual are
to be
sling will
movements
of the
Being
command is: 1.
command ARMS,
port,
at
2.
This
be
is
at
toward
the
body,
the
rifle in
to the rear
hand
and
vertical; grasp
it
with the
(TWO) Grasp
left
and
the
the
the
wrist
and the
same time, grasp the
the balance with the left hand, palm
rifle
the
At
rifle in a vertical
plane parallel to the front.
(See fig. 15-2.)
I.
Present arms. Being at order arms, the
command is: 1. present, 2. ARMS. At the
arms,
order
shoulder.
ARMS. At
15-1.)
(TWO) Carry the right hand to the
small of the stock, grasping it, palm down,
holding the right forearm horizontal; left elbow
of sling arms.
straight.
(See
fig.
stacking swivel.
(TWO)
rifle
to the right so
is
3 inches
39
Mm
Second position
First position
Figure 15.Execution
of port
arms.
Second Position
First position
40
follower,
and
trigger,
the
command
the
ARMS. At
carry the
as
time, grasp
it
shoulder,
command ARMS,
the
2.
and
raise
rifle
hand
right
Right
1.
is:
shown
in figure 19-1
at the
same
(TWO) Regrasp
it
two fingers,
on the stock. (See
(THREE) Without changing the
fig. 19-2.)
grasp of the right hand, place the rifle on the
right shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an
angle of about 45 from the horizontal, trigger
guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow
against the side, forearm horizontal, the rifle in
thumb and
fingers closed
tended and
first
joined,, to
the
command
command
fig.
arms.
(THREE) With
hand
thumb on
the operat-
to the side.
Port arms.
g.
19-3.)
hand smartly
n. Inspection
the
(See
end
and elbow down.
(See
the left
19-4.)
fig.
the
rifle
same
diagonally across
until
(FOUR)
emptied
the
is:
1.
against
operating
the
rod
handle with
the
extended and joined, forqing the operating rod handle slightly to the rear, and, at
the same time, depress the follower with the
right thumb as the bolt rides forward over the
fingers
Order arms.
r.
left
its
rifle
the right
grasp
at the
hand
to
o.
grasping the
(TWO) Change
balance.
at the
arms.
hand retaining
left
2.
ARMS. At
ment
arms from right shoulder arms.
(TWO)
s.
the
command
ARMS. At
right
hand
2-1 lp.
is:
the
right shoulder, 2.
command ARMS, change the
1.
paragraph
Execute the last two
(See
fig.
19-2.)
41
First position
Second position
Figure
19.
Third position
Fourth position
42
movements prescribed
right shoulder
in
t.
command
the
is:
Being
(See
figs.
at port arms,
left shoulder,
1.
2.
ARMS.
At the command ARMS, release the grip
hand on the rifle, and with the right
(1)
of the left
hand
thumb and
forearm horizontal,
the
rifle in
front.
first
fingers closed
left
side,
(TWO) Drop
the right
hand smartly
to
At the command
and continue
(See
may
be ordered when
figs.
ARMS,
u. Port arms.
Being
Figure
20.
hand
at the
same
mand ARMS,
left
shoulder arms.
(See
fig.
21.)
Squad
x.
attention.
of
parade
Being
rest.
at
parade
43
rest,
the
(1)
\~.
arms, the
At the
hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
horizontal, palm of the hand dowm, thumb and
extended and joined, first joint of the
end of the receiver;
(See fig. 22).
look toward the person saluted.
3.
cut away the left hand smartly to the
side turn the head and eyes to the front.
(2) Being at order or trail arms, the command
fingers
TWO
;
is:
rifle,
1.
2.
SALUTE.
At the command
SALUTE,
right side,
palm
fingers
of the
barrel
at a point
(See
fig.
23.)
3.
TWO
cut
away
the left
hand
Figure
23.
44
z.
Fix bayonets.
(1)
Being
order arms,
at
If the
move
(See
order.
fig.
back of the hand toward the body; and, glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the
blade passing between the left arm and the
Regrasp the rifle with the right hand
and resume the order.
(6) If the bayonet scabbard is on the haversack, remove the bayonet from the rifle as
described above and return it to the scabbard
in the most convenient manner.
(c) These movements are not executed in
body.
cadence.
2-12
24.)
FIRING
For ceremonial
of units larger
To
load.
firings.
The
(1)
being
unit
in
any
commands
of the body.
The
hand
rifle is
left
and steadiness
and
raised or lowered
hand
at
the balance,
is
(See
fig.
25.)
The
If the
cadence.
Unfix bayonets.
(2)
the
At
Being
at
order arms,
BAYONETS.
handle
the
is
rifle;
engages the
down
clip latch.
The thumb
is
it
swung
the
(a)
belt,
leased.
certain of complete
the right
stock.
hand
is
closing
of
are:
1.
LOAD,
execute
except that
simulated.
the
handling
cartridges
of
is
fol-
handle and
push forward on the operating rod handle with
the heel of the hand to be certain that the bolt
Carry the right hand to
is completely closed.
the small of the stock.
Being in any formation, the
c. To iinload.
lower, release the operating rod
command
is:
UNLOAD,
right
UNLOAD. At
take position of
the
LOAD.
command
Hook the
handle,
by
Place the
left
and release
thumb. Catch the
receiver
Remove
lower.
and
the
about
the
Depress the
lower; then
45
thumb from
to the order.
the
fol-
the follower
fol-
Bring
d. To fire by volley.
(1) Being in firing formation with rifles loaded, the commands are:
1. ready, 2. AIM, 3. squad, 4. FIRE.
For
ceremonial purposes blank ammunition is used,
and only the front rank executes the commands.
At the command ready, take the position of
if
command AIM,
is
as far forward as
ing.
The
left
trigger finger.
FIRE,
rifle is
is
(See
fig.
26.)
At the command
reloaded.
is
46
Figure
To continue the
AIM, 2. squad,
(2)
are:
firing,
3.
1.
mand
is
the
FIRE.
26.
Ceremonial
commands
Each com-
firing ceases.
2-13
MATIC
when otherwise
habitually
is
General rules.Except
slung
carried
over
the
rifle
right
(See
fig.
sling,
hand
in front of the
ARMS,
and resume the position of attention, the automatic rifle being kept slung.
/. When a unit is formed or dismissed, men
armed with the automatic rifle execute inspection arms at the commands: 1. inspection,
2.
ARMS.
Men armed
2.
27.)
tion arms:
ARMS is
given.
For marches and field exercises, the automatic rifle may be carried slung over either
shoulder.
substitute
b.
c.
rifle
d.
rifle
When
may
be unslung.
e.
of the
man-
the
sling.
(2)
Inspection arms.
Being at
command ARMS,
sling arms, at
the magazine
hand; at the same time, press
the magazine release with the right hand.
Withdraw the magazine with the left hand and
place it in the belt.
Pull back the operating
handle with the left hand.
the
h.
with the
left
grasp
2-14
BINE.
rifles for
automatic
rifles.
Carrying position.
(1)
Except as
magazine normally
(See
fig.
28-1.)
The
be inserted in the
receiver for ceremonies and guard duty only.
When troops are at ease, the carbine is kept
will
any desired
may be
position.
When
troops
In coming to the
is
47
and about
angle of 45.
upward and
(See
fig.
to the left at
With the
29-2.)
an
left
c.
arms.
Being
at
sling
arms,
with the
left
same time
left
with the
27.
Position of automatic
rifle
time,
with the
ing the grasp of the right
The parade
rest
is
sling.
exercises,
left
body and
fig.
hand, inserting
it
between the
Assume
30-1.)
With the
(2)
sling.
(See
operating slide
all
the
press
manner
prescribed by the unit leader. Depending on
whether the unit is to move on foot or by truck,
carbine
the
will
be
serving a weapon, he
carried
may
in
the
following methods:
(a) Slung over either right or left shoulder,
with muzzle up.
(6) Slung across the back, muzzle down, with
sling over the right or left shoulder.
(See
fig.
down on
right
Being at
sling arms, to
come
with the
left
d.
To resume
right
(see fig.
and
at the same time withdrawing the right arm from
between the piece and the sling. Grasp the small
29-1), lifting the piece from the shoulder
sling arms.-
command
shoulder),
ARMS.
command,
chamber.
Hav-
ing found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes to the front.
(See fig. 30-2.) Inspection arms with the carbine is not executed as part of the manual of
arms with the rifle.
28-2.)
(c)
slide in its
2.
Being
is:
1.
at inspec-
order (right
At the preparatory
by pulling
forward; pull the trigger and replace the magazine. At the command of execution, sling the
carbine over the right shoulder and resume the
position of attention.
48
ff
!.:.
Carbine slung
Figure
j*
28.
down
m^..
Second position
First position
Figure
29.
Third position
49
Second position
First position
e.
Port arms.
of inspection
the comslide
as
magazine.
At the
complete the movement.
2-15 MANUAL OF
the
General.
differ in
command ARMS,
THE PISTOL. a.
the
unbutton the
outward.
reverse
it,
stock,
holding the stock, the forefinger extended outside the trigger guard, raise the fore-
fingers
arm
so the barrel
(See
c.
fig.
is
hand
as high
and
as,
an
6 inches
31-1.)
Withdraw magazine.
-The
command
is:
lowering
pistol.
(2)
and
men armed
with the
pistol remain at the position of attention during
the manual of arms, but render the hand salute
at the command present, ARMS.
b.
2.
Raise
pistol.
PISTOL.
At
enlisted
The command
the
hand,
right
the
turn
barrel
magazine catch
with the right thumb and with the left hand
(See
belt
fig.
31-2.)
Place
the
is:
command
1.
raise,
PISTOL,
d.
Open chamber.
CHAMBER.
BER, resume
The command
the
position
of
OPEN
CHAM-
is:
raise
pistol.
50
full
thumb engages
(See
31-3.)
its
its
e.
CHAMBER.
CHAMBER,
The command
CLOSE
is:
command CLOSE
right thumb press down
At
the
with the
the slide stop and let the slide go forward.
Squeeze the trigger, being sure that the muzzle
is still
elevated.
magazine.
j. Insert
The
command
is:
IN-
Load.
g.
Press
The command
command LOAD,
if
it
is:
fully
home.
LOAD.
At
the
is
not
a loaded magazine
downward
to
its
full
extent.
open
fig.
left
hand
32-2.)
or at the
command
1.
(See
return,
2.
PISTOL,
the muzzle
is
still
SWORD
the rear.
The
(3)
enlisted
SERT MAGAZINE. At the command INSERT MAGAZINE, without lowering the right
elevated.
Insert an
empty
commands
to troops
In general, on
(5)
officers
To
(c)
by
address or
a superior officer.
(b)
unit
is
or
when
is
played.
the National
Anthem (To
the
Color)
(left) when
(c) In executing eyes right
marching past a reviewing officer or stand,
except that officers in the interior of a mass formation do not execute present sword.
(8) The position of the sword at parade rest
assumed by officers whenever the unit
is
(See fig. 33.)
executes parade rest.
marching
with
In
the sword at the carry,
(9)
swung
about
the arms are
6 inches to the front
of
and 3 inches to the rear
the body.
marching
in
double
time, the sword
(10) In
is
The sword
ease.
it,
at ease, or
when
2APH
Pust
of the pistol.
of the pistol.
f
PI
51
52
(12)
command be
If the
command
of execu-
command
and retain
tion
is
given.
is
it.
(c)
Enlisted
the sword
company
concerned.
b. To draw sword.
draw, 2. SWORD.
The
commands
or unit
are:
1.
At the command draw, grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the upper band, turn
the guard to the front, seize the grip with the
right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of
the scabbard, pressing the scabbard against
(See fig. 34-1.)
the thigh with the left hand.
draw the
(2) At the command SWORD,
sword smartly, raising the arm to its full extent, at an angle of about 45, the sword in a
straight line with the arm, edge down; drop the
hand by the
(See
side (See
fig.
fig.
edge to the
35-2.)
ORDER, 2. SWORD.
(1) Being at the carry or at present sword,
at the command SWORD, drop the point of the
sword to the front on the ground, edge down,
thumb on the back of the grip, the arm hanging
naturally
(1)
left
clining
left.
knot
by the
side.
(See
36.)
fig.
from present
sword while marching, the sword is first turned
to the position of order, but with the point of
the sword about 3 inches from the ground.
(2)
In
executing
the
carry
34-2).
(3)
grip, the
thumb
end of the
sword.
2.
fig.
This
present,
ARMS,
(1)
or
2.
1.
is
34-3.)
To present sword.
c.
1.
hilt.
(See
-The
SWORD,
eyes,
2.
commands
or
are:
present,
1.
RIGHT.
(or
eyes),
command
SWORD
(See
(or
fig.
35-1.)
ARMS
or
At the
RIGHT),
of the sword.
Parade
rest.
<S
53
54
e.
Parade
rest.
Being
2.
REST. At
left foot 12
the
inches
body
rests
left
on tbe opening
it
of the scabbard,
fig.
37.)
Look
edge of
to the sides.
(2) Enlisted
men's
sword.
The
return
officers'
sword.
Present sword.
is
sword
Second position
of the
left;
to the left,
First position
down and
is
it.
55
56
2-17
The guidon
is
company
It is carried at ceremonies
when
prescribed
identification flag.
and
at other times
by the commander.
In gar-
Figure
38.
Figure
39.
is
man
is
designated
brought to
other
movements
of the
manual,
it is
brought to
and when troops are marchguidon is at the carry. (See fig. 38.)
When marching at route step or at ease, it may
be held in either hand. When at the order,
step, or alinements,
ing, the
Order guidon.
Figure
40.
Manual
of the
guidon,
First
57
'
::
of the
::
Present guidon.
guidon.
downward,
present
carry at the
command
in quick time.
c.
Carry guidon.
it is
brought to the
marching
of execution for
The
staff of the
guidon
is
staff resting in
guidon.
(1)
present,
shown
in figure 38.
guidon.
as in the carry.
(See
fig.
39.)
2.
arm nearly
horizontal.
(2)
(See
fig.
is
41.)
hand
movement
salute
of the
(or at
company commander's
movement of
the second
guidon at the
commander's
last
movement
salute.
of the
company
58
guidon.
is
allowed,
if
staff, until
the guidon
k.
Double time.
is
by dismounted organizations
and the "regi-
in
When
color.
each battalion
mental
standard."
The
of an organization,
manding
(4)
officer.
are furled
own
When
colors.
He
color
gives the
necessary
rendering
color
is
color in
guard
in
the
when they
carries
independently in
color.
(2)
participating
line,
executes
column
(left)
(3)
of
men
the
senior
color
with the
or
if
is
man
placed as right
is
(4)
(8)
colors,
the senior
in
(funeral escort) in a
c.
on
At
by the
position.
(See
fig.
42.)
which the
color
com-
with the following ceremony: The color company is formed, its commander facing the front.
The color guard, conducted by the senior color
bearer, approaches from the front and halts at
mander.
his
the colors
and
company and
salutes,
brings
it
his
The
nonrated
bearer directly to
its post.
It takes post
on the
guard takes
its
formation.
When
When
ceeds from
front of
commanding
office,
officer.
the
The
pany
by
on the ground
line
shoe.
of the guard.
colors.
colors, the
is
company
similar manner.
color guard
smaller than a
(left) face.
At the command
The
59
Figure
42.
60
At the
d. Position of the color at the carry.
carry, the heel of the pike rests in the socket of
the sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the
height of the shoulder; the pike is inclined
slightly to the front.
(See
fig.
43.)
rifle,
is
kept
The order
(2)
is
ing the
arm
to the front.
When
who
by
straighten-
the regimental
execute present
arms.
(See
fig.
44.)
h.
all
The
military cere-
who
bearer,
RIGHT
and
1.
commands:
ready,
2.
1.
eyes,
FRONT
at
2.
the
saluting
When
him
at the
at the
In
standard,
carry
2.
(1)
ATTENTION.
beyond him.
When
(3)
vertical.
is
2.
SALUTE.
made
at
the
STANDARD.
i.
color renders
no
salute.
The nationa*
Figure
43.
61
62
Q
X
of the color.
i
,
Section IV
THE SQUAD
DRILL,
Par.
Page
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
63
63
65
65
To count off
To aline the squad
2-23
2-24
65
66
2-25
66
2-26
2-27
2-28
66
66
66
2-29
2-30
67
67
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
67
General
To form
the squad
To
To
march
in
To stack arms
To take arms
To form column of twos from single file-.
To form single file from column of twos. __
_'_
Column of twos
GENERAL. a. A
squad
^
67
68
68
68
68
a
group
r
It consists of a
men
is
organized as a team.
leader and other personnel authorized by ap_.
_,
, ,
propriate Tables of Organization and Equip-
of
ment.
When
replaced
by
-,
the second in
is
commander
commander
staff
guide
.^-s^
section leader
or chief of
L2SJ
section
squad leader
or pettv officer.
company
commander
"J
^^
P><H
or lieutnant
executive officer
or second in
platoon
commander
class
third
p^J
[^der""
r.fleman
command
CHIEF
r=$i
^^
petty
I
platoon chief
>
PETTV officer.
F^fl
fa-^^s
colors
officer
J.
y^
,>
guidon
BEARER
second glass
Figure
is
When
[]X]
battalion
#-
absent, he
command.
PLAtooN
AN0 staff
2-19
Regimental
45.
2-20
the second in
command
FALL IN
senior
leader as
shown
The squad
practicable.
as
single
rank or
his
single
file
as
shown
in figure 46.
in
line
for
minor
in figure 46.
On
falling in,
extends
left,
i eft
the
is
^^
self in line
As soon as proper
obtained, each
his side
man on
his
without
To form
at close interval,
the command FALL IN, the
are:
1.
2.
commands
IN. At
FALL
men
fall in
as indi-
63
"
64
13
12
II
10
D S D D D S
RIFLE SQUAD
IN
LINE
>
E3
E2
l0
n
'2
l3
El
Figure
IS.
At
cated in a above, except that close interval is obtained by placing the left hand on the hip as
shown
in figure 48.
of the
2-21
PREVIOUS INSTRUCTIONS
PLICABLE.
AP-
of
arms as prescribed
executing the
all
movements simultaneously.
men
65
In.
close interval.
Fall in.
2-22
commands
3.
port,
squad
is
DISMISSED
2-23
is
command
used.
1.
the
right.
The
right
flank
man
calls
out,
Each man
etc.,
same
66
and eyes smartly
number.
b.
This
command may be
given whenever
men know
their
2-24
commands
If in
themselves
are:
1.
to the right.
The
instruc-
the front.
b.
If in
column, the
command
is:
COVER.
men.
2-25 BEING IN LINE AT NORMAL INTERVAL, TO OBTAIN CLOSE INTERVAL.
Figure
49.
right-flank
man
marching
as prescribed in para-
2-26 BEING IN LINE AT CLOSE INTERVAL, TO EXTEND TO NORMAL INTERVAL. The commands are: 1. extend, 2.
MARCH. At the command MARCH, all man
except the right-flank man face to the left in
The movements
paragraphs 2-Sd
off
(1)
and 2-9b.
All
men
step
simultaneously.
2-28
a.
of
new men,
the squad
original front.
tion,
He
Right oblique.
foot
command HALT,
and
movement, the
stand
To resume
fast.
commands
are:
resume,
is
resume, 2 MARCH.
"oblique"
g. The word
rhyme with
2-29
MARCH.
2.
step or
/. If at half
1.
1.
the
"strike."
movement
graph 2-9j(2).
b. This movement
movement
distance
to
as prescribed in para-
1.
and moved
forward,
MARCH.
2-30
DIRECTION.
The commands
RIGHT (LEFT)
(HALF RIGHT)
are:
1.
column
(HALF LEFT),
2.
MARCH.
commands
to the left
command
are:
(right), 2.
MARCH,
shoulder height.
1.
take in-
take interval
MARCH.
At the
man
stands
All,
To
assemble,
the
commands
are:
1.
All other
fast.
men
commands
is
required.
is
palm
b.
pronounced to
is
67
are: 1. stack, 2.
ARMS.
Numbers
rifle
swivel.
rifle
He
(the center
rear, 2 feet in
rifle),
advance
own
68
stacking swivel and engages
the
it
with that of
The man
c.
regrasps his
raises
and disengages
he receives
left rifle.
to
rifle
his rifle,
FROM SINGLE
MARCH,
fig.
50-1.)
With the
hand
Rotating the
rifle
two
by
the other
(See
fig.
50-3.)
in line
column at a
Stack arms:
man on
as
commands
are:
left (right),
1.
2.
MARCH.
the leading
man
being in
halt, to
At the command
man
in the
column
the
of
twos at a
commands
the right
are:
1.
(left), 2.
mand MARCH,
halt, to
form
single
file,
man
the leading
of the right
2-36
COLUMN
group, not at
of
the
drill,
OF
may
TWOS.A
fol-
smaU
be marched in column
mmmm
(1)
Each man,
2-34
rifle.
his
rifle
rifle.
(21
(3)
rifle rests in
69
rifles.
Section
DRILL,
Guide in marching
Supplementary commands
THE PLATOON
Page
Par.
march (form) at
close interval
in
2-37
70
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
71
2-45
72
2-46
2-47
2-48
72
72
72
7
71
71
72
72
72
march, to
2-49
72
72
72
73
To form
2-53
73
stack arms
of
of a platoon headquarters
ARMS LENGTH
4
INTERVAL.
DISTANCE
sec-
leader.
d. The platoon in line closes and extends as
prescribed for the squad in paragraphs 2-25
and 2-26.
INCHES
51.
73
74
sistants.
40 INCHES
Figure
70
5-54
2-55
HEADQUARTERS
CLOSE
Page
and
tions or squads.
PLATOON
NORMAL INTERVAL.
file
6 PACES
NOTE
reform
To form
2-50
2-51
2-52
To
Par.
To form column
The platoon
e.
assembles
as
in
line
prescribed
the
squad
in
paragraph
2-31.
As used
herein, the
term "section"
is
71
The platoon
OF INDIVIDUALS.a.
when
in line.
(See
fig.
c.
51.)
man
is
rank when
In column, he takes post in front of the
right flank man.
He is responsible for maintaining the proper direction and cadence of
of the right flank
s s s
of the front
in line.
march
of the platoon.
s s s
2-40
command
FALL
s s s
ing
!"
I
!
,
PLATOON
HEADQU/!
EADQUARTERS
NOTE*.
NORMAL INTERVAI
CLOSE
INTERVAL
DISTANCE
ARMS LENGTH
c. The platoon is normally formed and dismissed by the platoon petty officer.
4 INCHES
40 INCHES
2-41
The commands
3.
port, 4.
are:
ARMS,
1.
5.
inspection,
2.
DISMISSED.
ARMS,
If
not
72
squads.
(See
fig.
52.)
right
commands
the
(left),
are:
1.
right,
forward, 4. MARCH.
This marches the platoon in column of two or
more files to the right (left)
2-43 GUIDE IN MARCHING.Except
(left),
2.
FACE,
3.
when
2-44
SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS.
Whenever commands
in
squads.
2-45
MARCH.
column at the command
MARCH, the squad (s) away from the guide
obliques toward the guide until the interval
between men is 4 inches, and takes up the half
a.
Being
in
march
in
step
close
by executing
(See
fig.
53.)
INTERVAL, TO
extend, 2. MARCH.
a. Being march in column, at the command
MARCH, the squad (s) away from the guide
obliques away from the guide until the interval
between files is one arms length, and takes up
Being at a halt
by executing
in column,
squads extend
column right
flank
man
(left), 2.
MARCH.
of the leading
is
man
right
MARCH,
At the command
movement.
The
of the leading
2.
MARCH,
3.
are:
1.
PLATOON,
4,
HALT,
5. left, 6. FACE.
Column right is
executed as prescribed in paragraph 2-47. The
command HALT, is given after the change of
direction is completed.
2-49
MARCH,
TO
are: 1.
MARCH.
At
by the right
the
command
MARCH,
is
in
in rear of the
graph 2-32.
2-51 BEING
IN LINE, TO
OPEN
RANKS. The commands are: 1. open ranks,
At the
2. MARCH, 3. ready, 4. FRONT.
1.
ready,
FRONT.
2.
OPEN RANKS, TO
BEING AT
2-52
2.
MARCH.
are:
MARCH,
halts.
TO
TENTS.a.
line
in
FORM
2-53
file.
FOR
SHELTER
instruction
are:
position
rank.
on the
left of
the
left
man
/.
To
of the rear
assemble,
assemble
to the
commands
the
the
to
right,
2.
are:
1.
MARCH,
3.
right,
AND SINGLE
platoon
single
squads
is
1.
all
rank face
of
commands
form for shelter tents to the left
(RIGHT), 2. MARCH, 3. TAKE INTERVAL TO
THE LEFT (RIGHT), 4. MARCH, 5. COUNT
OFF.
(1) At the command form for shelter
tents to the left, the second in command
moves to a position on the right of the right
man of the front rank. The messengers take
rank
first
left in
of
MARCH,
At the command
(2)
1.
At the command
73
FILE
may
file
drill
so that,
when
It is practiced in
necessary, the
movement
may
halt.
a.
Being in column of
of twos, the
threes, to
commands are
(left), 2.
command MARCH,
march forward; the
form column
column of twos
MARCH. At the
the
left
right
are maintained.
(See
fig.
55-1.)
2.
MARCH.
At the command
MARCH,
The
the
rear squad
74
forms single
file
from the
moving
right, as indicated in
figure 55-2,
into
its
of the platoon.
above
(1) Being in column of four or more
form column of twos, the commands
COLUMN OF TWOS FROM THE RIGHT
2.
MARCH.
files,
to
are:
1.
(LEFT),
MARCH.
TO FORM FOR PHYSICAL DRILL.
(right), 2.
2-55
'
;:
795287 50
75
76
March
Two
Figure
54.
Movement completed
Figure 54. Column
right,
march Continued
77
78
.3.
COLUMN
s >-
i:_z*:
nzz-irzrus^^
TWOS
OF
FROM
COLUMN
FIGURE
55-1
REFORM
Figure
55.
kV
COLUMN
OF
THREES
M
M
OF THREES
Section VI
DRILL,
Page
Par.
General
Rules for company
To form
drill
company
line to march
the
To
To
company
company
dismiss the
aline the
company mass
Being in column, to form extended mass
formation
Being in mass formation, to change direction
of a
2-56
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-63
79
79
80
80
81
81
264
82
2-65
82
2-66
2-67
2-68
83
84
84
82
82
consists
or
more
platoons.
b. For close-order drill and ceremonies, company headquarters personnel present may be
manent squad
special
headquarters
For marches or
organization.
purposes,
members
of
command group
the
company
are formed as
the
shown
and
60.
for the
2-57
a.
The
the
is
line as
a. A company
company headquarters and two
GENERAL.
2-56
THE COMPANY
shown
and
60.
When
execute a
as a
movement
company
are
to
of
first
repeat the
of execution at the
proper time to cause their platoons to execute
the movement on the same ground as the first
In giving commands or cautions,
platoon.
platoon leaders may prefix the number of the
platoon, as 1. first platoon, 2. HALT, or
The foregoing
second platoon, forward.
applies,
when
necessary,
to
movements
exe-
disposed with
or as
execution.
rear
(3)
left of
field,
the
company
the guidon
is
shown
in figure 57.
79
80
d.
2-58
The
minor changes
in position.
commander,
com-
pany
is
FALL
under the
officers.
all pres-
men
or "Sir,
command
faces about
and moves by the most direct route to the position shown in figure 56.
Upon completion of
company
salutes,
so armed.
If the platoons
e.
if
command:
cers
inspection,
1.
right shoulder,
ARMS,
4.
ARMS,
call
called answers,
2.
and
the
3.
roll.
"Here,"
and report
/.
places himself
company
and
officers
command:
REPORT.
tion.
c.
The
it is
The
absent."
completed.
2-59 BEING
The
the company
officer receiving
the report
is
IN LINE, TO MARCH TO
THE RIGHT (LEFT).The company is faced
and marched as prescribed
officer,
shown
for
The company
and guidon
in figure 57.
*J
12
PACES
PACES
PACES
us i
nia^x
h:
a:
ma
11x3
M
RIFLE
PLATOON
Figure 56. Rifle company
RIFLE
PLATOON
in line.
ia:
RIFLE
Platoon
HDD
COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS
81
are:
RIFLE
PLATOON
space is limited.
2-61 TO DISMISS
RIFLE
PLATOON
THE COMPANY.
a.
The commands
2.
are:
1.
3
PACES
o
El
RIFLE
PLATOON
4.
ARMS,
b.
5.
DISMISSED.
missal
the
command
The platoon
salute;
the
company
commander
commanders
acknowledges the salute and falls out. The
platoon commanders execute about face and
This is executed
chief petty officer, 2.
COMPANY as in a above, the
as prescribed for
DISMISS THE
platoon petty
1.
officer
The
may
cause platoons
officers by
them the command DISMISS YOUR
PLATOONS. The platoon petty officers sa-
to be dismissed
giving
57.
salute
and
falls out.
acknowledges the
officers
82
then execute about face and dismiss their platoons as prescribed in paragraph 2-42.
2-62 TO ALINE THE COMPANY.a.
DRESS
1.
RIGHT,
2.
DRESS,
3.
READY,
is
company commander
At
the
rank
are
mands
left
1.
2.
MARCH,
moves
When
to position alongside
given,
already on
is
mass in order to
more impressive appearance. The
company in this formation drills in the same
to increase the size of the
present a
dress eight
given by the
company mass
paces
MARCH. At the command
the movement is executed as de-
are:
(right),
6 PACES
2.
verified
HALT,
IN COLUMN, TO FORM
EXTENDED MASS FORMATION. The com-
is
2.
platoon,
1.
4.
the
commands
platoon leader.
2-65 BEING
:-J
o
SI
iUUHUU
UUa
ih
company commander
CABLE.
The
company
marches,
executes
INTERVAL, TO
when
58.)
The company being in march, the commands are the same as given in a above. The
movement is executed as described in a above,
b.
MARCH,
is
RIFLE
RIFLE
RIFLE
GUN
PLATOON, PLATOONl PLATOON
"1
PLATOON
MACHINE,
command
halted by the
Figure
58.
83
&
3 TO 6
PACES
6 PACES
& i*
&
f
6
12
PACES
PACES
_J
KJ
"E
24 PACES
g)
"E
uy
y
Figure
59.
u u
manner
as for
mands
3.
are:
1.
forward.
man
2.
MARCH. The
MARCH,
right
flank
Each
suc-
EJ
"
direction.
b. In turning to the left on a moving pivot,
each rank guides left until the command: 3. for-
in
column
closed).
ranks
84
ward,
4.
MARCH,
is
right
been completed.
in direction has
commands
are:
1.
THREES, OR MORE),
3.
MASS, TO
a halt,
column of files
of its leader.
2.
MARCH.
MiRCH.
3.
the
(twos,
forward,
FORM
TOONS
(threes)
IN LINE.Being in column
(fours), the commands are:
pany MASS
left,
tion
is
4.
24
PACES RIGHT,
FACE.
(See
fig.
2.
60.)
of twos
1.
com-
MARCH,
3.
This forma-
Section VII
Par.
General
Commands and
orders
Staff
Formations
To form
To form
in
column
in line
with companies
in line
with companies
in
2-74
87
forma-
2-75
2-76
2-77
85
85
86
86
85
GENERAL.a. The
88
89
89
formations
de-
them
Using
may
as
guide,
corre-
be given
ment
AT EASE
ordered.
is
In
until another
ceremonies,
g.
After a battalion
make no movement
position unless so
is
directed by
the battalion
presented bo
commander
who prethe commands:
commander.
h.
When
a unit
is
sents
1.
it
present,
2.
ARMS. When
guidon or
The
movement.
battalion drills
by command when
in
mass formation. Such drill is limited to movements for ceremonies where the units of the
battalion execute the manual, facings, and
marchings as one body at the command of the
battalion commander.
These movements are
executed by the battalion in a manner similar
to that prescribed for the company.
The assembly
mass formation
commander.
is
directed by
Each company commander moves his company
to its place in the most convenient manner.
d.
of units in
the
battalion
(left) of
the battalion
is
its
c.
the
to
move-
after
ceremony has started, units remain at attention until ordered to stand at ease by the next
higher commander.
in line (for
ceremonies)
To form
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-73
all elements of
he faces to the
The members
of his staff
(if
His
sword at
all
times except
when
the battalion
is
at rest or at ease.
left,
85
86
When
b.
12
staff as in
PACES
and
_i
When
c.
it is
staff officer
commander.
follows the
its
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
battalion
COMPANY
as
when
the
faced about,
commander, having
battalion
12
PACES
placing
d.
RIFLE
COMPANY
it
When
the
battalion
commander
faces
to the right
(left)
inclusive.
b. The band is posted by the adjutant as
indicated in figures 62 and 63.
c. Attached units take position as directed
by the
battalion
to
RIFLE
COMPANY
The
cates
designation "center
the right
center
or
company"
the
actual
indi-
center
of
The
battalion
commander
surpervises the
RIFLE
COMPANY
distances.
With
his staff
(less
the adjutant)
2-73
battalion
Figure
61.
Battalion in
column.
TO FORM IN COLUMN.a.
may form
companies in
fine
in
column from
by executing
The
line
right
of
face.
column
87
The adjutant
in
which
form with two flags, one on
each flank. He takes post on the right of and
facing down the line, and draws sword, if so
armed.
(See
tion of the
a.
the battalion
them
fig.
61.)
When
b.
is
to
the band
is
SOUND ATTENTION.
rS
:5
24 PACES
12
Pi
RIFLE
RIFLE CO.
LJ
CO.
PACES
}
I
RIFLE
CO.
PACES
*-6-* BN
HQ CO
PACES
<
12
PACES
PACES
Figure
18
62.
PACES
6 PACES
RIFLE CO
<-6->
RIFLE CO
RIFLE
PACES
PACES
CO *-6 ->
PACES
BN
HQ
CO
BAND
PACES
NOTE:
Figure
63.
At
BAND
88
d.
*x
18
on the
PACES
'
iT
e.
p.
When
all
commands: 1. guides, 2. POSTS. At the command POSTS, the guides move to their normal
1
6 PACES
positions in ranks.
BN
RIFLE
HO
CO
RIFLE CO.
CO.
/.
and
reports:
"Sir,
the
battalion
is
formed."
g.
The
salute
NOTE
INTERVAL.
3 PACES
Figure
right shoulder
64.
tively.
battalion
SOUND
ADJUTANT'S CALL.
Companies are marched from the left
column of threes (or fours) so as to
positions parallel to and in rear of
at
arrive
successively
from right to left. The
line
the
c.
of
movement
is
note
is
As each company
it is halted and
faced to the left. The company commander
then commands: GUIDES ON LINE. At this
command, the guide of each platoon moves (at
company by
the adjutant.
the
trail)
by the
to his position
flags
returns
post, sir."
the
The
The
2-75
PANIES IN
CEREMONIES.)a. The
same
procedure
is
the
flank in
command
commander
(See
rear, respec-
battalion
on the
line indicated
The
adju-
commander
orders:
TOON ON THE
LINE.
At
command,
moves out at
double time to the line indicated by the flags,
halts, comes to order arms, and faces the adthis
jutant.
The guide
company.
(2)
the guides
in
been
As soon
as the
initiated, the
MARCH,
the
command
of execution
The
designated interval.
(2) At the command:
move
the guides
(See
fig.
to
1.
their
guides,
2.
POSTS,
normal positions.
march being
2-77
The
commander commands: DISAt this command, each company commander salutes the
a.
battalion
battalion
salutes.
his
63.)
the line of
re-
maining platoons successively move into position on the left of the leading platoon at the
89
misses
it
Com-
Section VIII
Par.
Formation...
To form the regiment
2-78
2-79
2-80
2-81
Staff
To
2-78
FORMATIONS.For
90
90
90
90
the formations
and
68.
When practicable,
the
commanders before
starting the
move-
ment.
b.
formation,
prescribes the
which
it will face,
is
the
special
and attached
units,
and
trains.
c.
The
regimental
directly to the
concerned or communicated
through his staff.
d. Before the regiment is formed,
mental commander may cause the
which are to be taken by the larger
to be indicated by markers.
officers
e.
90
Battalions
(or
special
units)
to
them
the regipositions
elements
are
given
REST
/.
is followed
except that battalion adjutants take post on
the line on which the regiment is to form at
Adjutant's Call.
Battalion adjutants face
down
by the most
g.
ment
move
to their posts
direct routes.
The regimental adjutant acts for the regiin a manner similar to that prescribed
When
h.
2-81
To
12
PACES
91
PACES
i_
BAND
BAND
t"
36 PACES
36 PACES
L
REGTL HQ CO
REGTL HQ
CO,
36 PACES
56 PACI
BATTALION
BATTALION
36 PACES
36 PACES
1_
4.
BATTALION
BATTALION
36 PACES
36 PACES
L
BATTALION
BATTALION
Figure
65.
795287 50
Figure
66.
92
BANl
12
PACES
REGTL
12
HQ
CO-
PACES
BN HQ CO.
~1
I
PAC
6 PACES
a
z
<
OD
CO
1
NO
111
RIFLE CO.
PAC
PACES
RIFLE CO.
o
_l
4#
o
o o
X o
UJ
K
PAC
PACES
1
a
(0
UJ
W
LU
1
1^
o
<
12
o
2
z
o
-
<
CD
D_
^~
<m
o
<
Q.
BN HQ
CO.
to
CES
fi
+ C0
*8
RIFLE CO.
1-
<n
in
<s
S3
CO.
-3\Z PACES
.0.
*"
RIFLE
o
ti
M
05
4\>
6 PACES
1.
RIFLE CO.
Si
<0
Zj
<
<
m
6 PACES
1 LU
<\IO
fc
J*
RIFLE CO.
_i
12
PACES
CD
BN HQ CO.
6 PACES
RIFLE CO.
o
_i
4f
PACES
<
RIFLE CO.
6 PACES
RIFLE CO.
CD
CEREMONIES
93
Chapter
CEREMONIES
Par.
Section
I.
II.
III.
IV.
b.
Battalion or Regimental
Battalion Ceremonial
c.
Regimental Ceremonial
d.
Street
Honors
Funerals
IX. Inspections
a.
Company
b.
Battalion
c.
Regimental
X. Guard Mounting
Color
Page
3-1
97
3-6
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-26
3-31
3-32
3-35
3-36
3-38
98
104
105
105
105
107
107
109
111
112
114
123
123
124
125
126
95
Section
Arrangements of units
in formation
Staff salutes
Place of formation
Modification of formation
3-1
Page
3-1
97
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
97
97
97
97
MATION. a. When
ment composed
of
Navy
(line),
or of the
Marine Corps, according to rani?, shall command the detachment (Navy Regulations).
b.
The commanding
officer of
make
c.
Companies
and
in
battalions,
battalions
in
formed as
prescribed in regulations governing the forma(See ch. 2.)
tions of battalions and regiments.
d.
special
units
are
command.
STAFF SALUTES.When
passing in
the salute
At other
3-3
with
PLACE
OF
their
commanders.
commander
salutes.
FORMATION.a.
At
on
received,
3-4
TIONS.
corrections.
regiments,
3-2
review,
MODIFICATION OF FORMA-
Formations
3-5
MENT. For
training, it
is
desirable in cere-
combat operations
ashore.
97
Section
II
REVIEWS
Page
Par.
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
Elements of a review
Commanding
officer of troops
Preparations
Troop formations
Forming for the review
Reviewing party
Ceremony for a review
98
98
98
98
98
99
101
March
in review.
The
senior officer
present
in
the
ceremony
is
mander reviewing
some other officer
When
troops.
his
as
own
troops designates
commanding
the review
is
officer
given for a
of
visit-
ing high
local
PREPARATIONS.The
3-8
visitor.
line
on which
(See
fig.
of
1.)
3-9
a.
tions
COMMANDING OFFICER OF
3-7
TROOPS.
expecially
When
(1)
all
right.
and
The
alined,
normally
the
adjutant.
The
commanding
officer of
midway between
If
executes present
arms
at the
command
of
commanders
bring
their
of
battalions
units
to
and
present
units
special
arms,
starting
The commanding
officer of
troops returns
who
presented the
command
of troops
directs
and
change position so
99
command
SOUND RETREAT
The commanding
officer
of
troops re-
3-11
the
LINE
OF
TROOPS
LINE
OF
MARCH
P
20 PACES
P/
REVIEWING
FLAT MARKERS
FLAGS
Figure
1.
OFFICER
100
Troops
Band
Troops
Band
Li
zi
'
Reviewing Officer
Reviewing Officer
Units
of
in
line.
To pass
line
of march.
march.
Figure
2.
Local
Civilian
Commandei
Reviewing
Officer
* *
*r**
Orderly
Orderly
Flag of
Local
Commander
Flag of
Reviewing
Officer
Figure 3. Reviewing
party.
101
The
moves
salute
U.
shown
When an
organization
an inspecting or other
is
in figure 3.
to be reviewed before
officer junior in
rank
to
on the
c.
left of
An
officer
from the
them
If
a civilian is to
commander and,
him.
3-12
a.
CEREMONY FOR
ing officer
manding
moves
the
his
their
of
made
to
A REVIEW.
As the reviewthe
position,
Troops come
commands
is
officer of
attention.
to
to
necessary,
if
to
com-
command
attention
respective
at
battalion
commanders.
(2)
the
When
commanding
officer
of
is
in position,
troops
PRESENT ARMS,
faces his
which
is
S.
may
be
Navy
gun
officials.
occasions.
(5)
When
entitles
him
the honor,
each regimental
command.
The reviewing
and
all
note of the
music and retain the salute until the music is
completed.
b. Inspection.
(1) The reviewing officer and
his party move forward to the commanding
officer of troops.
The two exchange salutes.
Staffs do not salute.
The commanding officer
of troops then conducts the reviewing party
around the formation, beginning with the unit
on the right of the line and passing in front of
the line and then back around the rear of the
formation. While passing around the troops,
the reviewing officer may direct that his staff,
flag, and orderlies remain at the post of the
reviewing officer, or that only his personal staff
and flag accompany him. The commanding
officer of troops and the local commander
accompany the reviewing officer while passing
around the troops and march on that side of
the reviewing officer which is away from the
troops.
The staffs of the commanding officer
military spectators salute at the
first
and
commander
(if
present),
following its
own commander
in
column of
files.
In passing around the troops, the staffs maintain the formation in which they commence
their march.
If the inspection is to be made in
motor cars, the reviewing party enters cars
which drive up to the post of the reviewing
officer after completion of the honors.
One
seat in each car on the side away from the troops
during the inspection is left vacant. The cars
move to the post of the commanding officer of
troops.
The commanding
officer
of
troops
and
flags
102
(3)
The band
the formation
(4) If
company
is
or massed unit
brought to attention
is
front line
(4)
commanding
commands
talion
main
(6)
man
each
of
individually, re-
completed.
first
passing around
the
commander
the
line,
The reviewing
after
of
The commanding
(6)
staff
made
in
motor
If the in-
officer.
commander
of
(7)
dismounts,
troops
and resumes
If decorations are to
(7)
ceremony
be presented, that
manding
officer
of
3-13)
officer
troops
is
carried
with
their
staffs
ing party
of
officer
VIEW.
if
When
mander
the
band has
halted,
command
to
the com-
moves
column
after
arrives
officer,
is
of troops,
troops
salutes.
is
of the
to his post.
officer of
head
his staff
specting party
officer
troops.
change of direction.
(5)
band
of
On
officer
him with
officer
command from
At each
change of direction the commander of each
mass formation (company or battalion) in turn
commands: 1. left turn, 2. MARCH, 3. forward, 4. MARCH. The third and fourth
the
at full step
reviewing
Troops
The band
(each
reviewing
left
officer.
band
when
if
it
It executes a
left
so
as
to
place
of the
It then ceases
until the regiment has passed.
playing and follows in rear of its regiment.
The band of the following regiment commences
to play as soon as the preceding band has
commanding
officer
of
troops
as
another
alternative.
(8) Each company commander (or the senior
company commander if the battalion is in mass
formation) without turning his body commands:
1.
eyes,
2.
RIGHT,
3.
ready,
4.
FRONT.
He
FRONT
He
officer.
first posi-
He
resumes carry
FRONT. In each company or mass formation
the men on the right do not execute eyes right.
(9) When passing in review, at the com-
mand,
(a)
1.
eyes,
The
2.
officer
RIGHT,
who
command and
gives the
sword
(or
hand
salute
Orderlies
if armed with pistol or carbine).
execute
hand
salute.
Guidon
bearers
execute
present guidon. They all terminate the salute
(or come to carry sword or guidon) with the
103
when
salutes
when
six
posted.
(a)
ing
in
commanding
In battalion mass formation at the command, 1. eyes, 2. RIGHT, company commanders and officers in the front rank of the
staff
their staffs.
carbine).
(d)
FRONT.
command
the
without changing
bis position, salutes the reviewing officer with
officer of troops,
commander.
(b)
When
passes.
When
stand
passing
salutes of subordinate
to the carry.
(e)
(f)
The band
If the
leader
reviewing
officer is
entitled to a
commanders down
officer
to in-
Those who
do not salute.
Section III
PRESENTATION OF DECORATIONS
Page
Par.
3-13
Presentation of decorations
3-13
TIONS.
will
The
commanding
officer
of troops,
OF
DECORA-
practicable,
of:
tion.
(2)
(3)
HALT.
colors.
foreign decoration.
mands, orders, or
persons to be
COLORS, CENTER. 2.
signals:
1.
AND ALL
At the command MARCH, persons
to be decorated and all colors move by the most
direct route and take post as follows
(1) The persons to be decorated in single
rank in the center of the command and 10
paces in front of the line of company commanders according to the rank of the decoraDECORATED
MARCH.
tion
the
review
Whenever
a.
be held on occasions
(1)
MARCH,
persons to be decorated, and the colors advance, the band playing. In all ranks, the
guide is center. The detachment is halted by
PRESENTATION
104
on the
right.
their
within
each
decoration
group.
five
The
left face.
When
the staff
has effected the necessary clearance, the commanding officer of troops commands: 1. for-
ward,
104
2.
MARCH.
At the command
orated
are
(colors)
to be dec-
The reviewing
present."
officer
mand be
The commanding
presented.
officer
center of his
right
of
The persons
command
to order arms.
to be decorated salute
and
ter-
commanding
officer of troops.
accompanied if necessary by his staff or designated members thereof, advances to the colors
and to the line of persons to be decorated and
fastens the appropriate streamer to the staff of
the color, and pins the decoration awarded on
the left breast of each person.
d. He then resumes his post.
The persons
decorated, at the
or enlisted man,
interval
on the
command
left of
the local
commander
or
and the colors are returned to their posts by the most direct route.
When the colors have returned to their posts
as otherwise directed,
commanding
march the command in
review.
of
troops to
Section IV
PARADES
par.
3-14
3-15
.
3-16
3-17
Street parades..
page
105
105
.
107
107
OR REGIMENTAL
3-14 BATTALION
PARADE. a. The battalion or regimental
executed in the same manner as a
review, except that the appearance and movement of the troops in formation are the primary
For this reason, the troops
considerations.
parade
is
usuaUy form without heavy weapons or transportation, and all companies form as, and execute
the
movements prescribed
for,
foot
troops.
viewing
c.
officer.
The presentation
of decorations or escort
may
officer.
d.
is
inspection of troops
omitted.
e. The ceremonial parades described in paragraphs 3-15 and 3-16 are for use at the option
of local commanders in lieu of the ceremony
described above.
BATTALION
3-15
RADE.
CEREMONIAL PA-
The parade
officer
a.
At
(See
fig. 1.)
adjutant's
in line with
,,
attention
,i
<
t
by oi the band, and the sounding
of Retreat (if an evening parade).
At the command, SOUND OFF, the band,
e
^ e marching
and
Sound Qjr
of three chordS)
march
forward, playing a
march
mi d way between
moves
in quick time.
It
across the
the adju-
countermarches
At evening parade,
sounded by the
field
Retreat
is
then
music.
y q) jf it is not an evening parade, immediately after the last note of the Sound Off
at the conclusion of the march by the band,
the adjutant commands: 1. battalion, 2.
ATTENTION, 3. present, 4. ARMS. The
adjutant then faces about, salutes the battalion
commander and reports, "Sir, the parade is
formed." The battalion commander directs
the adjutant, "Take your post, Sir," and draws
sword. The adjutant passes by the battalion
commander's right and takes post one and
one-half paces to the rear and one pace to the
right of the battalion
commander.
If the
105
106
salutes the battalion
The
mands:
battalion
order,
1.
movements
desire.
of the
Officers,
2.
center, halt,
ARMS,
of
petty officers in
command
of
right,
talion
men
mander;
all other
platoon leaders.
line of
The
left
of carry guidon,
salute.
The
adjutant faces the battalion commander, salutes, and reports, "Sir, all present or accounted
for," or "Sir (number) officers or men absent."
The
battalion
TO ORDERS. He
then
on the
line
i.
the
to
on a
closed
with the
(3)
close
officers close
sword
so
and
4
paces in advance of the line of guidon bearers;
guidon bearers close on their own line, each
taking post in rear of his own company com-
band
the
commander
manual
officers or
MARCH,
At the command
plays, officers
(number)
(3)
commands:
MARCH.
MARCH,
1.
After
officers,
giving
2.
center,
the
3.
command
commander.
j. (1) At the command officers, all company officers execute carry sword (if so armed),
and all guidon bearers execute carry guidon.
(2) At the command, center, when companies are in line, all company commanders,
commanding platoons, and guidon
officers
When companies
all
commanding platoons
face to
the center.
to the center.
step
Officers
Officers second
in
com-
platoon leaders.
company commanders
sword.
At
tlie
step
off,
The
senior officer
cers,
2.
HALT,
posts,
2.
MARCH.
commands:
1.
offi-
in
At the command
posts,
officers
and
off in
At the command
MARCH,
officers step
During the
marches
3-17
in
107
review as in a battalion parade.
STREET PARADES.,
Street
(1)
movement, and
ceremony
concluded.
is
n.
companies
ground.
are
marched
dismissed.
3-16
RADE.
REGIMENTAL CEREMONIAL
The regiment
a.
The assignment
(b)
is
PA-
ordinarily formed
formation.
and assignment
right or
head
Honors
Instructions
(g)
(h) Instructions
b.
(5)
returned
The order
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
officers
to
795287
their
50
and
posts
guidon
and
bearers
the
are
regiment
the
regarding uniform.
its
dismissal,
at
the
some
United
United
United
United
United
States
States
Coast
Guard
Army.
States Marines.
States Naval Forces.
Guard detachments.
National Guard organizations which have
States Coast
Naval Reserve.
The
of
as follows:
(4)
dismissal
(5)
line
the
(2)
company
on a
for
bearers.
parade.
Academy.
close
to be paid
the march.
emy.
of the front
officers
column.
(d) The time for each division to complete
its formation and stand ready to march.
(e) The time and place from which the head
of the parade will move, the line of march, and
manders.
rests,
of the subdivisions in
is
divisions,
of
organizations
of
and
marshals of divisions.
(/)
commands.
(2) In moving across the front of the regiment, the band passes midway between the
adjutant and the line of battalion commanders.
(3) The battalions execute present arms,
order arms, parade rest, come to attention
and such other movements of the manual of
manders, other
and
and names
brigade commanders and
108
not applicable,
The
(b)
it
may
be fixed
method
is
commanders
of
by
the parade.
When
(c)
The alphabetical order in the English
language of the names of the national concerned.
c.
(1) The grand marshal marches at the
head of the parade; his staff, chief of staff on
the right, marches 1% paces to his rear in one
or more ranks.
The grand marshal is usually
preceded by mounted police and a platoon of
dismounted police who clear the way. The
marshal of the first division marches 24 paces
in. rear of the staff of the grand marshal.
(13)
diction
the
of
United States,
they
will
be
Odd-numbered
(2)
divisions
are ordinarily
formation.
When
is
in
honor
(16)
all
Except as provided in
among
precedence
others.
be fixed by(a)
point.
priate.
(15)
The
of
commanders
column or column
sling
In long parades
rifles
may
be carried at
fixed.
Section
3-18
COLOR.
ESCORT
a.
OF
THE
Par.
Page
3-18
109
NATIONAL
may
for
parade or
re-
its
post
its
place.
During the
The
escort then
When
The
color bearer.
on the
officer
escort
Color.
The platoon
petty officer salute at the
the
is
officer,
left of
the
then brought to
music sounds To
commander and
command of
the
the com-
pany commander.
(7) At the last note of the music, the company commander brings the company to order
arms. The platoon commander and the petty
officer terminate their salute and return to their
posts in the company.
The company is formed
in column, the band taking post in front of the
column. The color bearer places himself in
the center of the space in rear of the leading
The
platoon.
escort then
marches in quick
The march
band
playing.
is
of the regiment,
When
front.
parallel to its
band
The
The
color
mands:
bearer
commander
regimental
having
halted,
the
faces about
PRESENT ARMS.
officer of
right
be executed:
(1)
1. present, 2. ARMS.
The other
commanders, continuing simultaneously toward both flanks, and the escort
commander, bring their units to present arms.
commands:
battalion
To
and
the
Color.
The regimental
faces to the
salutes
being played.
(9) The regimental commander then faces
about and brings the regiment to order arms
is
109
HO
to his post
at tbe
command
the right
commander it faces
preceded
and,
by the band, marches
of its
and rear
(11)
around the
left of
left
(12)
the
line.
to
the
c.
then returns to
flank
It
its
post
to
of the regiment.
the
on the
line.
same
principles as
for a regiment.
Section VI
ESCORT OF HONOR
Escort of honor.
Par.
Passe
3-19
111
upon
will,
superior discipline.
from which
b.
The
escort
is
formed
himtoward
which it is to march. Upon the appearance of
the personage, the escort is brought to attenWhen the personage has taken position
tion.
from which to receive honors, the escort is
brought to present arms, and the honors due his
rank are rendered. Upon completion of the
honors, the escort is brought to order arms.
place where the personage
self,
the
is
to present
of the escort
to receive
When
considerable
distance
is
at a
where
to the escort.
is
The
posted
sentries
An
officer is
personage.
Ill
Section VII
HONORS
Prescribed honors
Honors
Honors
officials
anthem
to the national
Additional honors
3-20
Afloat:
Par.
Page
3-20
3-21
322
3-23
3-24
3-25
112
112
112
113
113
113
PRESCRIBED HONORS.
For tables
of prescribed honors to
Navy
be
Regulations.
prescribed in
Navy
if
The personal
flag or national
is
foreign
or
national
ensign
(if
foreign
TO
VISIT-
in ren-
Navy
side.
ING OFFICIALS.
Afloat:
3-22
112
DEPARTURE. Prescribed
honors
Gun
salutes,
if
specified,
commence
just
3-23
The
V, ch.
3.)
of
the
The
national color:
113
following
During morning or
g. Occupants of vehicles.
evening colors and the playing of the National
Anthem, or when passing or being passed by
an uncased national color, all vehicles in motion
will be brought to a halt.
Persons riding in a
passenger car or on a motorcycle will dismount
and salute.
However the drivers of these
vehicles need not dismount.
Occupants of
other types of military vehicles remain seated
at attention in the vehicle, the individual in
ing the
is
Ashore:
are observed,
may
On
the
quarterdeck.
(See
Navy Regula-
tions.)
e. Individuals.
When passing or being
passed by an uncased national color, honors are
from
carried
by
not saluted
Troops in formation.
When
colors.
passing,
or
3-24
hand
salute.
ANTHEM. a.
played,
all
of respect prescribed
Section VIII
FUNERALS
P
officer in
115
116
hand.
117
117
"^
/?
114
mony
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
The procession
At the grave
3-26
oC
3-26
General
Duties of the
GENERAL. a. When
not
contrary
influenced
of the family
of the deceased.
b.
of
the
Navy Regula-
of the
may commence
at any
(3)
color, the
be displayed thereon.
h.
The
casket
is
and out
The
first,
is
ex-
carried
head
first,
designated location.
cautionary
d.
where necessary.
one of the following pro-
In
e.
general,
cedures governs:
(1)
The
commands
low voice.
commander.
At the funeral
escort
chapel prior to the services and, upon completion of services, conducts them to the grave.
(3) The escort receives the remains at the
mander
command
will also
I.
Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse or caisson from accompanying
them
grave.
grave.
remains:
114
be
carried.
to the
j.
command
k.
The
in a
As
(4)
j.
is
again
is
(See
115
par. 2-12d.)
when
When
n.
Participation
p.
by
fraternal
or
patriotic
organizations.
(1)
At the request
of the
immediate family
caisson
If the
is
(4)
When
no hearse or caisson
is
used, suit-
Arms
will
if
practicable,
an
officer
Prior to
will
be
bugler.
He
(3)
the ashes.
(2) For all phases of the funeral where the
cremated remains are carried by hand, one
enlisted man will be detailed to cany the
men
will also
be detailed
Four
as flag bearers.
is
enlisted
"When
carried
on the
right.
will
funeral
director,
chapel.
(3)
(if
riding), pallbearers
mem-
(See
fig. 4.)
116
is
and when
fer starts
When
d.
The
escort.
be formed
escort will
commander
the
present,
1.
command:
ARMS. Arms
2.
are brought to
it
The
a.
mo-
casket
will render
scribed in chapter
5,
is
At
the
command ARMS, by
the grave.
ceased.
them
cate
to the unit
commanders upon
their
/.
is
When
the
widow
or
unaccompanied, the
mother
of the deceased
officer in
charge will
when
will,
com-
pletion of the
in every
g.
will
es-
and
way
After
commitment
commitment
i.
When
situations arise
be guided by his
Final
own judgment.
decisions
regarding
any
matters
through him.
At
is
officer in
arbitrarily endeavor to
at
the
When remains
(1)
chapel
before
services.
is
RECEIVING
Whenever
THE
it
As the casket
(a)
is
of
hand
(6)
first
(See
When
close
hand
interval,
salute,
follow
the
When
(2)
the
fig. 4).
columns
of twos, in
h>
mortuor
Family'
is
and
face
REMAINS.
figs. 4, 5,
motion
salute.
are
The
funeral director
7.)
received
in this position.
'pallbearers.
building (see
3-28
The
j.
march
d.
will
ceased.
h.
The bearer will take position immediately in front of the hearse or caisson and
possible.
Navy
Organizations
in
lin-^
Eigure
4.
Eicert
<
Band-
They follow
(a)
each other,
face
halt,
is
They remain
hand
their place in
files
gates
When
the
remains
of the cemetery
(see
are
fig.
received
5).
at
The
the
pall-
mander.
(5)
(6)
(2)
(3)
(4)
officers
(7)
and
The
of the
in slow
time to
solemn music.
d.
When
is
at a con-
may
approaches
the burial ground, when it is brought to
The band does not play while the
attention.
at ease in quick time until
it
band
The
field
musics
may
in playing.
3-30
the ar-
fig. 7):
(1)
line
line
escort.
(2)
position indicated
by the
officer in
charge of the
if
(9)
march
the pallbearers.
left of
bearers,
or caisson.
c.
as prescribed in
The body
(8)
(10) Enlisted
(b)
column
or caisson, junior in front on the left, the leading member of each column opposite the front
wheels of the hearse or caisson. If pallbearers
are riding, the
117
(3)
(4)
ceased.
If
it
clergy.
The bearer of
Between the
hearse.
clergy
(general
flag officers).
casket.
The
and between
1.18
ENTERING CHAPEL
CHAPEL
LEAVING
-!
Family
Family
04@u
.
I.
II
Bearers
Pali
follow
4*
casket
Bearers
Pall
behind casket to
enler the chapel
chapel.
into
Bearers
precede casket
out of chapel -
Pall
/~\l
Pall
\U
salute while
escort renders
honors. Hold
salute until the
Reverse position
outside entrance
as indicated.
Bearers
band ceases
playing, 1hen
take position on
either side of
the caisson
Honorary
Bearers
J
Jr
Pall
Sr.
,S
Chaplain
>
v
y
'
Sr
Jr
Jr
o o
Body
.XXXV
Bearers'"
Chaplain
Hearse
Caisson
o o
Sr
O
|
Sailors
Escort
Commander
Marines
Band
Sailors
Colors
Escort
[
J
Colors
Figure
5.
Entering chapel.
Leaving chapel.
Commander
Marint
Band
119
L,
CEMETERY GATES-
BAND
ESCORT-
+U
ESCORT COMMANDER-
-n
>CL_
CLERGY
PERSONAL FLAG-
HEARSE-
(i)
CAISSON-
PALLBEARERSFAMILY'S CAR-
(2)
OTHER OFFICERSFOREIGN
OFFICERS-
DISTINGUISHED PERSONS-
a
a
DELEGATIONS
SOCIETIES
CITIZENS
(I)
IN
POSITION
(2)IN
Figure
6.
INTO POSITION
or caisson).
120
c
*a
ESCORT COMMANDER-
BAND
ESCORT-
CLERGY-
PALLBEARERS(WHEN
>i
RIDING)-
PERSONAL FLAG
SffiD
D
HEARSE OR CAISSON
BODY BEARERS
FAMILY"
ENLISTED MEN"
OFFICERS FROM SHIP
OF DECEASED
OTHER OFFICERS-
FOREIGN OFFICERS-
DISTINGUISHED
x
o
rr
<
PERSONS
DELEGATIONS-
o
UJ
SOCIETIES-
a:
CITIZENS'
(I.)
SENIOR PALLBEARER
Figure
(2)
7.
JUNIOR PALLBEARER
121
bearer.
Follows the clergy,
flag
(4) The
preceding the casket, and takes position at the
head of the grave where he will remain during
the services.
(5)
lute.
Other unit
their heads.
Earth from
grove
grave
Foot of
in
8.
color so that
The family of
caisson or hearse.
and
Other units.
the
In
deceased.
Near
all
Family-
Pollbeorers-
between the
pall-
CD 0<2>
a
Body bearers and
Personal
flog
The band.
ors followed
play
(2)
when
The
at present
casket-
->ca
it
-a
Cle rgy-
C-ir
and upon
Dand
I
E-""
1
I
the casket
is
Presents arms,
arms
is
Other unit
to
escort.
Earth
from grove-
and remains
placed over
Foot
of
grove
Other
the grave.
(3)
The
and the
clergy.
casket.
Precedes
low-
by
signal
is
the
When
the casket
Hv Q.ru
b.
if
(7)
Execute
a similar
-Other Unit
(6)
units.
other
Figure
and
Pallbearers
(2)
parade rest
9.
unft
122
Road
(3)
and
Other units.
to present
escort.
Band
leader.
(5)
Personal
Body
flag-
bearers
I
Earth
Other unU
-tS3
from
D
D
grave
Family
Figure
to attention
and
10.
clergy.
command PRESENT
sounds
TAPS
immediately following
it will
Conducts
the
commitment
services.
Upon completion
of
the
commitment
services
escort
TAPS.
salutes,
of
(7)
ARMS
Bugler
e.
salutes.
-Other uolt
The
l_l
Pallbearers
(4)
the
(6)
Foot of graveClergy
ered
if
Body
Fold the
it
over
and
(4)
bearers.
march away
(5)
as
may
Other units.
color,
turn
be directed.
Section IX
INSPECTIONS
Page
Par.
3-31
General
Company
inspection
commander
Battalion inspection
Regimental inspection
Inspection of quarters or
camp
3-32
123
123
3-33
124
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
124
124
125
125
3-31
inspect each
it
march
company
platoon,
the
is
Battalion, regimental,
own
officers
area, or
have
Under
COMPANY INSPECTION.a.
mation.
The
column
company forms
For-
in line or in
2.
is
(See
figs.
(4)
the
mation,
b. Procedure.
(1) The company commander
commands: PREPARE FOR INSPECTION.
At this command, platoon commanders cause
ranks to be opened. They then place them-
advance
company.
company
commander
takes
the
left
it
hands
it
directed.
The
(5)
2.)
As soon as inspected,
pany
rifle
If transportation
commander
rifle,
its
special conditions,
it
arms.
handling,
Men armed
rifle,
spected.
(8)
Upon
(1)
1.
platoon,
its
REST
after ranks
(9)
the platoon
124
OF
INSPECTION
3-33
PERSONAL
a.
platoons
with
in
line.
in
column
of platoons
ment.
his left
hand thrusts
it
rifle
At
the
MENT,
passes
mander
to
have packs
assembled.
e. The platoon
rolled
ROLL PACKS.
equipment,
his
rolls
pack,
and,
leaving
his
EQUIPMENT.
slung,
belts
fastened,
and
command
or
commander,
post
after packs
pleted), directs:
gun
The equipment
is
<
was taken.
The rear of
this
equipment
officer
AT EASE,
When
inspecting
officer
approaches,
the
officer.
of a
platoon, its
of the
3-35
tion in ranks.
d.
are
g. Packs
weapons taken.
battalion
portation.
b.
The
platoons
battalion
in
line,
being
the
in
battalion
column
of
commander
<
125
pares
staff.
c.
approaches the
mand, come
com-
staff,
sword.
bearer
to
When
commands:
TENTION.
The
1.
color guard,
color
guard
AT-
2.
may be
dis-
The
at the
their companies.
He may
require officers of
the
battalion
commander
for
inspection
officer,
as
pre-
Upon
the
the battalion
and
salutes.
the battalion
officer inspects
The inspecting
commander who
then
3-36
REGIMENTAL INSPECTION.
Upon
to attention
and
salutes.
Battalion inspection
then follows.
3-37. INSPECTION OF QUARTERS OR
CAMP. a. (1) In quarters the men stand
near then respective bunks uncovered and without equipment or arms; in camp they stand in
front of their tents covered but without equipment or arms.
1
(2)
If inspection of individual
equipment or
Battalion.
4.
by checking equipment.
g. When a company has been inspected, the
battalion commander may direct that it be
mander accompanied by the company commander, is preceded by the chief petty officer
who calls the men to attention as the inspecting
h.
may
When
direct that
stack arms,
fall
commander
time to be inspected.
i.
an
officer
other
mander is accompanied by the battalion commander and the commander of the company
being inspected.
Section
GUARD MOUNTING
Par.
Guard mounting
3-38
126
GUARD MOUNTING.a.
3-38
See chapter
5, interior
guard duty.
Page
120
'
>
127
<
Chapter
Par.
Section
I.
II.
HI.
IV.
V.
VI.
Individual
Individual Clothing and Uniforms
Marine Corps Pack, M1941
Wearing of Equipment
Display of Equipment
Display of Clothing on the Bunk_
4-1
4-4
4-9
4-20
4-24
4-26
>
129
131
143
145
155
159
167
<
Section
INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT
Page
Par.
Equipment, general
Equipment, medical personnel
Equipment, special operations
4-1
4-2
131
4-3
131
EQUIPMENT, GENERAL.a.
4-1
131
Indi-
As outlined
chapter
in
1,
these
Limited
field
(2)
(3)
The commander
prescribes
fulfill
through
equipment are
appropriate
basic individual
carried.
In the event that the enemy does not comLand Warfare," it may be
necessary to arm the medical personnel, for
b.
these missions.
of
the
pistol,
c.
landing party
equipment needed
to
combat equipment
listed for
them
in table
articles of basic,
illustrated in
10.
gency.
b.
missions include:
(1)
articles of
4-2
NEL.
operation.
These
figures
1.
automatic,
cal. 45.
Corps, U. S. Navy.
4-3 EQUIPMENT,
to
be issued medical
Handbook
of the Hospital
SPECIAL OPERA-
conform
to
131
132
10
11
12
13
14
03
03
&
o
o
+^
3
CE
Blanket
Can, meat, w/cover and knife, fork, and
spoon
Canteen, w/canteen cup and cover- ___
Helmet, steel, Ml, w/liner.
_
.
Pack, Marine Corps, M1941, complete
knapsack,
(haversack,
belt, suspend1
first
aid
...
Tag, identification
Tent, shelter half, w/guy
and
e
O
o
c
3
bo
03
03
13
o
03
<
eo
C
s
3
ti
3
3
3
<
173
&
.3
'3
'>
<D
8&
.2
3"
3.2
be
'3
03
03
a
S
.1
CO
20
19
21
22
23
.3
-E
r-o
a d^
a
3
V
OJ
u
ifi
Is
3.2
(-
03
i2
bjj
03
03
>>
3
c
03
"3
<D
i|
s
"3
18
"3
0J
CD a>
I
Sag
'3
m S'S
13
2,2 a O
a*g
!3
!3
03
03
03
S2
0,
P.
>3
3
3
M
3
03
P.
s
3
"3
Eh
Eh
E-
03
sfi
COMBAT EQUIPMENT
BASIC INDIVIDUAL
5
W
02
ers)
33
ox
3
3
bjQ
17
.2-3
2s3
_o
02
Poncho
s
'5
02
s
03
c
o
16
33
w H
15
5 tent pins
45
56
201
45
45
45
56
56
56
201
201
201
45
45
45
201
201
201
402
1
1
90
56
56
56
112
45
56
201
31
31
14
54
96
101
31
56
line, tentpole
._
Ml
and scabbard.
...
1
~
Knife, w/sheath
.
_ .
Belt, pistol w/magazine pockets
2
pockets f/carbine, 1 pocket f/pistol
Belt, cartridge, cal. 30
.
_.
Belt, magazine, M1937, f/BAR
Book, field message,
694
...
NMC
QM
typew/case
..
cal.
.30,
31
"T
....
13
44
11
15
11
59
2
5
56
10
12
15
201
675
1
1
13
12
69
54
47
65
81
22
18
45
225
luminous
12
1
1
14
1
31
95
Browning,
rest, and
cal. 45,
kit,
Watch,
Pliers w/case _ .
Rifle, U. S., cal. .30, Ml, w/combination tool and oil and thong case__ .
automatic,
Rifle,
Magazines, BAR
Pistol, automatic,
1
1
..
9
1
45
56
27
201
24
11
32
1
1
dial.
Whistle
1
1
1
1
MP
28
28
50
6
50
Brassard,
or SP 1
Chest, spare parts, f/gun, machine,
Browning, M1919A4
Gun, machine, cal. .30, Browning,
cal. .30,
M1919A4
Nightstick, police 7 ..
Rod, cleaning, machine gun_.
cal. .30,
..
Browning,
M1919A4
NMC
Figure
1.
133
134
rifle
squad
leader.
135
fire
team
leader.
136
Figure
4.
137
138
rifleman.
>
>
>
'Figure
795287 50
10
7.
Supplementary individual and organic combat equipment, light machine gun squad leader.
139
140
Figure
8.
Supplementary
individual and organic combat equipment, gunner and assistant gunner, light machine gun squad.
carries gun,
gunner
carries tripod.)
(Assistant gunner
Figure
9.
Supplementary individual and organic combat equipment, ammunition carrier, light machine gun squad.
141
142
Figure
10.
in table 1.)
Section II
Par.
Page
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
143
143
v
j
operations, police and guard duty, or
parades and ceremonies on foreign shores,
j
143
143
4-8
each individual
144
Uniforms and
-
worn by
clothing
j-
-n j
demembers of the naval landing party will
,
.,
mission
assigned
and
the
nature
the
upon
pend
6
l
y
of the contemplated operation.. The uniform
to be worn is prescribed by the commander of
,
is,
ERAL.a.
operations
4-4
r-
field
.,
Table
is
shown
in
appropriate.
Combat uniform
WARM-WEATHER OPERATIONS
XT. S.
Officers
Working, khaki
Navy
Chief petty
Working, khaki
U.
Enlisted
officers
S.
Marine Corps
Officers
._
Enlisted
Utility
Same.
Winter
Same. 1
COLD-WEATHER OPERATIONS
blue,
Service dress,
or B.
Service dress,
or
Overcoat L
blue,
Overcoat
4-6
Overcoat
J.
a.
w/liner, leggings,
Where
Undress, blue,
Peacoat
'
and
field
may
or
B_
is
engaged
service.
Field
or service jacket, service trousers.
Overcoat. 1
'.
DUTY.
orB.
1
Selected items of special winter clothing
in lieu of clothing prescribed above.
B.
all
combat uniforms.
police
shown
in table 3
the
4-7 UNIFORM, PARADES AND CEREMONIES. a. Where the landing party is en-
turbances
which
may
involve
fighting,
143
144
Table
3.
WARM-WEATHER DUTY
U.
Navy
Officers
S.
warrant
U.
officers
Enlisted
Undress, white,
S.
Marine Corps
Officers
Enlisted
Summer service
Same.
Undress, blue
Same.
COLD-WEATHER DUTY
Service, dress, blue,
Service,
dress,
blue,
Dress, blue,
or
A or B
necessary
Dress, blue,
orB.
orB.
operations
may
weather or special
be issued,
additional
Section III
4-9
Par.
Page
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
145
148
148
149
150
150
152
152
153
154
154
TION. a. The
bat equipment to
both
and
officer
The haversack
(figs.
11
and
strap
is
tightly rolled
The knapsack
c.
is
laces.
following
in the
14) is designed
(5)
when
(6)
minimum
knapsack:
One
One
(1)
enlisted
Two
Two
Two
Two
shoes, pair.
trousers.
shirts or jumpers.
socks, pair.
undershirts.
drawers.
the blanket
blanket
roll
around the
INTRENCHING TOOL
ATTACHMENT
top blanket
When
Towel.
(4)
(13)
(3)
to
(11)
One undershirt.
One drawers.
com-
personnel.
b.
(10)
(2)
13).
(fig.
(9)
BAYONET
ATTACHMENT
SUSPENDER
STRAP KEEPER
FLAP STRAP
BUCKLE
loop.
(2)
Intrenching tool,
to intrenching tool
COUPLING
to act as a
(4)
BAYONET
LOOP
cover.
INTRENCHING
TOOL STRAP
PACK STRAP
LOOP
(5) Knife,
haversack.
(6)
Fork, haversack.
(7)
Spoon, haversack.
(8)
One
socks, pair.
BELT SUPPORTING
STRAP
Figure
11.
The haversack.
145
146
COUPLING
STRAP
Snaps
k
=S-~Pack Strops-
Sliding
'
FLAP
End
Buckles
t
\
Vj
COUPLING
5TRAP BUCKLE
STRAP LDDP
Figure
12.
Beit
Supports
The knapsack.
Figure
V"**v
m
-*
'''
; k'X::---,m
-/;>:
s$m0^
Figure
14.
A
7
Hooks
PACK STRAP
LOOPS
'
/Front
BLANKET ROLL
...
Suspender
~^x Rings
1
13.
147
d.
(1)
rifle.
web.
BAR.
pack
long
roll.
e.
(1)
Short blanket
(a)
Components:
roll.
2.
One
One
3.
4.
One
One
1.
5.
To
(b)
blanket.
line,
each
half.
assemble:
Lay out
shelter half.
guy
Figure
16.
line as
3.
4.
Secure with
(c)
tie-ties.
Uses:
1.
2.
Component
Component
Figure
15.
of field
of
marching pack.
baggage pack.
Figure
17.
Blanket
roll,
short,
method
of rolling.
148
Figure
(2)
(a)
Long
blanket
roll.
18.
Blanket
roll,
method
long,
(b)
1.
Components:
To assemble:
Lay out shelter
blankets
may
be car-
3.
4.
Secure with
2.
One
3.
(c)
4.
One
One
4-10
5.
Fold blanket
in half
pole, pins,
ried).
line,
half.
2.
1.
of rolling.
Uses:
tie- ties.
Component
by
its
own suspender
rolls,
long, rolled.
short
and
straps.
When
prescribed,
may
149
Rear veiw.
Side veiw.
Figure
20.
d. Pass the free ends of the haversack suspender straps up and through the third slot
buckle and down and
from the top of the
through the fourth slot from the top and adjust
to conform to the wearer.
4-12 THE MARCHING PACK, ASSEMBLY. a. The marching pack (fig. 21) consists
of
the haversack,
equipment
equipment
ment
as
section
as a
as
suspender,
belt,
Normally,
and
this
shown
I,
belt
prescribed.
in
table
of this chapter.
paragraph 4-1,
This pack is used
1,
field
To assemble
free
haversack.
belt suspenders
150
Side
Rear view.
Front view.
view.
i. Put
on belt and fasten belt suspender
hooks into eyelets along top edge of belt. Each
man should determine which eyelets he should
use to make the pack comfortable. Short
waisted men will usually fasten the front hooks
Long
away from
the armpit.
c.
roll
as
de-
(6).
Secure
blanket
roll
to
haversack
with
4-14
BLY.
of the
may
other transport
j.
Hook
blanket
roll.
It
To assemble
in the
buckle.
first
c. Pass
end of belt suspender pack strap
through knapsack pack strap loops as described
for the haversack in paragraph 4-1 Id.
Rear view.
151
Side view.
Rear view.
Side view.
152
d.
e.
suspender
buckles.
/. Adjust length of pack straps and haversack suspender straps. For this pack, the
straps will have to be lengthened almost to
their limit.
g.
belt as described in
h.
weight
is
unimportant.
To assemble
roll to
haversack by
blanket
roll straps.
4-16
BLY.
a.
25 and 26)
and belt sus-
(figs.
paragraph 4-12A.
in
d.
To assemble
belt suspender
band.
c. Couple the pack strap snaps into the top
eyelets of the belt in rear so that knapsack will
be supported by the reinforcing band riding on
top of the belt
(fig.
25).
Hour view.
Side view.
153
>
4-17
a.
of the
or to be
Figure
25.
Knapsack pack.
moved
Figure
20.
Knapsack
pack
Figure
28.
154
web
To assemble
4-19
CARRIED,
It
is
Section IV
WEARING OF EQUIPMENT
Par.
Pag
Figures 20 through 28
Introduction
4-20
155
The helmet
The pack
4-21
155
4-22
4-23
155
155
and methods
Individual equipment
4-20
INTRODUCTION.a. Combat
equipment
is
worn or carried
in
a specified
b.
An
prescribed
by the commander
of the landing-
b.
manner, affords
maximum
in the prescribed
protection to
the
The
liner
figure 29.
(1)
level
4-22
THE PACK.a.
11
will
is lower than
the shoulders, the suspender straps rnUst be
shortened in order to adjust the pack in a higher
If
If the
is
too high
When
pack
transport
party.
worn pack
position.
or incorrectly
c.
ill-fitting
weight.
For
of wearing
ders.
manner
of assembly.
is
carried, the blanket roll
should be fitted to the neck so that it does not
ride so high that it will dislodge the helmet
from the wearer's head.
(4) The blanket #oll should be as tightly
rolled as possible and its ends evenly alined on
both sides of the pack. Blanket roll straps
should be neatly and tightly secured with no
loose ends showing.
(5) The pack should be packed so that mess
gear and like items do not dig into the back.
This can be accomplished by placing the poncho
and clothing on the side nearest the wearer's
back.
4-23
INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT.Indi-
vidual equipment
is
worn
as prescribed below:
Bayonet and scabbard. (1) On the carScabbard hooked to eyetridge or pistol belt.
a.
lets of
On
onet loop.
155
156
When
carried, the
lets at
Case, dispatch,
c.
over the
left shoulder.
Cutters, wire,
d.
and
carrier.
Attached to the
Carried in haversack.
g.
May be worn on
carrying
the
shoulder.
Holster
h.
Front view.
passed
strap
and
over
the
by
right
pistol.
Intrenching tool
carrier.
Hooked
to the eyelets
hooked
on the belt at the left hip.
m. Mask, gas, service, light weight and carrier
(see fig. 30).
(See
(1) Slung at back carry.
(2)
to eyelets
Side view.
Figure
29 The
helmet.
31.)
left
157
to the small
of
the
carrier.
desired
(If
the
SHOULDER STRAP
(o)
cartridge
fifth
hooked
pocket to the
(2)
RING
belt
to
eyelets
(1)
On
the
under the
left of buckle.
hooked to eyelets on
On the pistol belt hooked to eyelets on
On
the
BAR
belt
Rod,
cleaning,
machine
gun.
haversack.
Figure
30.
its carrier.
Hold
(2) Slung at side carry (see fig. 32).
shoulder strap of carrier in the palm of the left
hand, flap of carrier facing away from the
With both hands, grasp top of shoulder
forming a large loop and swing over the
passing the left elbow through the loop.
body.
strap
head,
Place
the
moved
(The
so that
waistline.)
Then
body
gas,
back carry.
-In
the
158
Front view.
Side view.
Mk
Section
DISPLAY OF EQUIPMENT
Examination
Examination
of
of
equipment in ranks
equipment on the bunk__
Par.
Page
4-24
159
164
4r-25
EXAMINATION OF EQUIPMENT
IN RANKS. (See figs. 33, 34, and 35.)a.
4-24
an opportunity
to
serviceable; to see
his possession
if
worn by the
individual.
of
d.
When equipment
tion, the
is
commander causes
MENT,
the blanket
roll,
knapsack
(if
worn), haversack,
free
and
35,
The manner
of
of folding the
The suspend-
Inspection
shown
his
The
flap(s) are
(See
fig. 33.)
haversack.
On
toilet articles,
On
on top
of the
body
of the
laces.
160
Figure
33 Field
for
by the inspecting
officer).
Figure
34 Field
161
officer).
162
for carbine,
front.
(i) Canteen cup to left of first-aid pouch,
canteen to right of first-aid pouch (concave
curves to the right).
(6)
name
visible.
name
(c)
across
folded
is
name.
top of the knapsack
visible
under to
level of stenciled
On
(7)
(if
displayed),
and name
visible
(tops are
Trousers,
folded back so
(6)
First-aid packet
(h)
visible.
(a)
name
163
single
name
fold
to
is visible.
sleeves under,
name
down.
Canteen cover,
(b)
(10)
the
On
(12)
(c)
(d)
is visible.
flaps
following articles
name
(a)
visible.
(e)
of
weave which
stenciled name.
(8)
name
across top
Rations,
if
is
carried,
The
on the blanket
right.
(6)
Shelter-tent pins,
in the
manner
(d)
(c)
figures
33,
34,
depends on type
(13)
Guy
and
tied,
Meat
long axis of
left.
the blanket.
35.
Other equipment
(14) All
rope, rolled
and
Exact
placement
carried.
is placed as shown
and 35 or as described below.
in
illus-
the
trated.
(c)
man assumes
The
33, 34,
164
reasons outlined in subparagraph
ment
(a)
Book,
map and
(b)
a.
The place-
field
M1916
(hip);
on
shown
out as follows:
dispatch case.
in the position
regulation manner.
and
accessories,
BAR;
combination tool
The kit will be dis-
for the
The haversack
a.
from the
same
relative position as
shown
for pocket,
inspected on the
it is
bunk
fig.
36.)Equipment
same reasons
for the
furnishes a
personnel
inspection
The
c.
straps
inspection.
When
The
d.
it is
desired to so inspect
and
flap
up and
closed,
and
blanket
roll
shelter half
and
size of the
the knapsack.
The
e.
belt
is
belt
/.
The
manner
(1)
right.
(2)
Shelter-tent
(3)
pins,
overlapping,
heads to the
three
right,
axis of roll
left to right.
(4)
the
left,
Meat
left.
(6)
suspenders
belt
are
approximately the
(5)
issued.
up
man
is
left
b.
flap
bunk, 3 inches
side and 2 inches from the bottom
top to the bottom of the bunk, in a corresponding position to the haversack, on the right
side of the bunk.
35).
(g)
placed
of the bunk.
(fig.
is
(7)
First-aid
to the
of the
Figure
36
165
166
(8) First-aid
packet
is
On
left of
the first-aid
first-aid
pouch (con-
spoon.
bunk
following articles:
(2)
Bayonet scabbard,
of scabbard
on
The
line
flaps,
when extended,
are
on a
line
Section VI
DISPLAY OF CLOTHING
Par.
Bunk
4-26
167
4-26
Clothing
ON THE BUNK
bunk
(a)
is
man
amount
it is
Scarfs, field.
Gloves, leather, woolen and cotton, fingers pointed toward the pillow,
properly
(b)
is
fig.
legging
37):
(c)
On
the
left side of
The
the bunk:
on
Trousers, utility
bunk
Drawers.
(a)
from right
its
to left:
(if
issued).
Socks.
sweatband turned
name
(c)
outfit
(1)
the
marking
Trousers, dress.
placed.
(6)
and
laces,
side,
palm
down.
Undershirts.
condition and
When
On
of clothing each
its
Shirts.
of the pillow
as follows
in center of lining
on
right side.
in
subparagraph
Belt, cloth.
Cap,
utility
(if
issued)
on
its
name.
The cap covers and helmet,
(5)
fiber
(when
Belt, trouser,
back, visor
listed,
One
woven.
167
168
Figure 37.-Display
of clothing
This figure
the quantity.
be displayed, not
169
MANUAL
TOILET ARTICLES
IN
WHISK BROOM
DITTY BAG
HANDKERCHIEFS
SHOE POLISH
HATS
KIT
WHITE
TOWEL
BLUE
HAT
TOWEL
JKmJ
a: C\
DC
a
a
n^LOW
CASEl]
WATCH CAP
UJ
UNDRESS JUMPER
GYM SHOES
WHITE JUMPER
UNDRESS JUMPER
DRESS JUMPER
BLUE TROUSERS
IQ.
WHITE JUMPER
D
|
WHITE TROUSERS
ft
GLOVES
WHITE TROUSERS
BLUE TROUSERS
BLUE & WHITE*
BELTS
DRESS SHOES
Figure 38.-Display
of clothing
This figure
3Q
170
Figure 39.-Display
of clothing
and
Box,
clothing,
barracks
(if
issued),
is
ranged.
filled
top
removed
171
rail of
the footpiece.
(9)
b.
(7)
c.
If it is desired to display
the bunk.
(8)
38.
(if
issued),
is
properly
it
will
in figure 39.
Haversack.
Tent pole.
Tent pegs.
Al Poncho.
Knapsack.
Bl
Shelter half.
Gas mask.
O Guy line.
P Helmet.
Q Helmet liner.
Cartridge belt.
E Bayonet.
F Bayonet scabbard.
G Canteen cover.
Canteen cup.
Canteen.
First-aid packet.
First-aid pouch.
Knife
Fork.
Spoon.
Meat can cover.
tool.
Entrenching
Entrenching
Meat
tool carrier.
Rifle.
Suspenders.
Oil
795287 50
TJ
12
can.
and thong
case
and combination
tool
'
f^
l>
173
<
9)
Chapter
III.
General Information
Duties of Personnel
Orders
IV.
Formations
Section
I.
II.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
5-1
5-9
5-21
5-24
5-29
5-32
5-39
5-42
Guard Mounting
Relieving the Old Guard
Guard Aboard Ship
The Colors
Guard
5^3
175
177
179
185
188
190
201
203
205
208
<
'
Section
GENERAL INFORMATION
Par.
Page
General
5-1
177
Definitions
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
177
177
Classification
Composition
Length of tour
Data for guard details
Notice of guard details
Detail of officers
5-1
GENERAL. a. Commanding
ships
of
officers of
177
177
177
177
178
officers
watchman system
employed.
Interior guards are used to preserve order,
commands
of guard
b.
is
facilities exist,
may
be placed
The
The main
6.
guard.
Prisoner guards.
will
5-5
men
by
specific orders.
duty
c.
A relief is required to be in garrison (on
board ship) fit for duty, 4 hours before its next
watch.
5-6 DATA FOR GUARD DETAILS. a.
,
The commanding
officer will
new guard in
time for commanders to make details
from their organizations. This information
should include orders relative to guard mounting whether formal or informal, prescribe the
uniform to be worn, and other pertinent details
not covered in existing orders.
b. If formal guard mounting is to be held, the
adjutant, sergeant major, and band to attend
will be designated by the commanding officer.
sufficient
5-2
DEFINITIONS.a. For
definitions of
Terms such
as Sergeant of the
Guard and
of
the
ele-
ments
of
an
of
5-7
Guard
a.
177
178
5-8
DETAILS OF OFFICERS.a. At
duty
an
officer of the
tions.)
He
is
commanding
(See
each
officer
command for
Navy Regula-
sentative of the
commanding
officer,
for the
guarding prisoners.
For duties
of the officer of
An officer will be
detailed as
Guard
commander
of
Section
II
DUTIES OF PERSONNEL
General
Commanding
officer
Officer of the
day
Commander
of the
guard
Color guards
Watchmen and
5-9
special guards
GENERAL. The
duties of certain
members
Par.
Page
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
179
179
179
180
181
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
responsibilities
guard are
duties not
of the
and
of a
Accordingly,
innature.
cluded herein should be prescribed in special
orders issued by the commanding officer. Whenever practicable, these orders should be reduced
to writing and made available to those conspecial
cerned.
5-10
commanding
officer
officer of
5-11
officer of
commanding
and
ceases when he has been relieved by the same
authority.
In case of emergency during the
interval between guard mounting and reporting
to the commanding officer, the officer of the day
instructions
of
the
officer
guards.
commanding
He
will
inspect
them
He
made by
ment
h.
of the guard.
When
is
included in the
release at
duty.
b.
the
179
180
it
to
be correct."
j.
officers of
the day
after guard
Verify
(1)
the
prison guard
and
is
inspect
together.
(2)
officer or his
The
and
retires
the
relieved, the
is
new
officer of
5-12.
a.
he salutes and
retires.
The commander
of the guard
is
responsible
manding
(2)
Transmit
and informations
them.
(5)
officers
and
sentries
may have
See that
directed
(7)
The commander
(3)
at once.
of the guard.
(1)
and performance
b.
by the
See that
(16)
as
the day.
proper time.
(8) See that proper calls are sounded at the
hours prescribed by the commanding officer.
of the
will
service in
made
commander
commanding
remove
officer.
He may
permit them to
and gloves
colors.
details to
flag at
be
made
for raising
possible
Detain at the guardhouse all suspiciouslooking persons or parties and report the circumstances to the officer of the day who will
decide what action is to be taken.
(22)
Be
(23)
reliefs,
number
relief
new
goes on
of prisoners
at the guardhouse.
(25)
to the guardhouse
be searched for unauthorized
(See par. 5-44a (2)
in his possession.
for confinement to
articles
(d).)
(26)
strictly executed.
administered in ac-
The
no
and
officer of
He
known
receives
commanding
officers of
as the
officer, officer
the guard.
If there
commander
of the
guard.
b.
(1)
petty
rated
officers,
Be
will
and
be thoroughly
duties.
it is
cared for
will report
commander
articles
any discrepancies
of the guard.
He
to
Prepare duplicate
(3)
petty
rated
officers,
men
buglers
commander
by himself.
of the
lists of
(field
One
list is
given to the
superior authority.
(6) Turn over his duties to the next ranking
petty officer before absenting himself from the
guardhouse.
(7) Take the place of the corporal of the guard
whose
relief is
officer to
(10)
what-
and obeys
He
properly.
the
181
of
officer of the
day:
(a)
comes to
his notice.
(6)
(c)
The approach
of
by the guard.
an armed party.
(11)
When
is
included in
182
the day, the
commander
of the guard,
and the
5-14
IX of this chapter.
CORPORAL OF THE GUARD.a.
petty
officer of
provisions of section
guard
be
will
officially
as
receives
manding
corporal
officer,
of
officer of
guard.
the
The corporal
If members
b.
(1)
to reliefs
of the
of the
reliefs,
guard will:
guard are not assigned
assign the
members
post.
He
known
the
call
Make
list
members
of the
of his relief,
show the
number of the relief, the post to which each
man is assigned, and his name and organization.
The list will be made in duplicate; one
copy given to the sergeant of the guard and the
other retained by himself
(3) Instruct the members of his relief regarding their orders and duties.
(4) Post and relieve sentries of his relief.
(5) Become thoroughly acquainted with all
orders of every sentry of his relief, and see that
each understands, carries out, and correctly
himself.
This
list
will
Call his
to fall in
own
relief
and cause
its
members
c.
post
(1)
is
on
will:
Examine persons or
(8)
to be there,
parties detained
doubt
If there is
by
of their authority
the guard.
Arrest
(9)
all
suspicious
mander
to the
com-
(10)
(11)
lenge
he
may
all
observe.
or parties in the
He
will
same manner
post.
BUGLERS
THE GUARD.a!
5-15
may
will
(FIELD MUSICS) OF
As many buglers of the
be detailed as the commanding officer
direct.
the
entrance
of
the
on
him by
man
guard
out.
"
(7) If
the
a sentry.
(2)
the
of
who should
mander
including
sergeant
ceases.
the
informing
After
(5)
post.
5-16
NONRATED
GUARD.a.
MEN
OF
THE
as-
signed to reliefs
to
posts.
5-22.
c.
sufficient extra
nonrated
men
to provide at least
d.
member not
each
or relief
is
dismissed,
Members
of the
GUARDHOUSE SENTRIES.a.
5-17
When
the brig
is
No.
at the guardhouse
is
on the
alert at the
will
(8)
lenge,
He
will allow
The
main
orders that
of all prisoners.
(2) He will allow no prisoner to cross his post
from the guardhouse except when passed by an
officer or
(3)
He will allow no
whom
he receives orders.
will promptly report to the corporal
of the guard any suspicious noise made by the
(4)
He
Whenever
guard
(so
many)
He
will
call,
"Corporal of the
prisoners."
After receiving an answer to his chalthe sentry calls the corporal of the
He
his post.
(9)
In case of
fire
5-18
of the
ORDERLIES. o. When
so
guard
directed
by the commanding officer, the officer who inspects the guard at guard mounting will select
from the members of the new guard an orderly
for the commanding officer and such other orderlies and color guards as may be required.
For these positions, the men are chosen who are
most correct in the performance of duty, in military bearing, neatness of person and uniform,
and whose arms and equipment are in the best
condition.
b.
When
directed
by the commander
of the
guard to
"Sir,
fall
Seaman
(Private)
reports as
orderly."
c. The torn' of duty of an orderly ends when
he is properly relieved by the orderly selected
from the guard relieving his own, or as other-
5-19
commanding
officer.
prisoners.
(5)
183
be
WATCHMEN AND
GUARDS.a. Watchmen.Petty
Officers
and
by the commanding
184
Special guards.
erally
independ-
<*
Section
III
Par.
5-21
5-22
5-23
Classes
General orders
Regulations relating to general orders
CLASSES.
5-21
Orders
185
185
185
No.
a.
GENERAL ORDERS.All
5-22
sentries
To
take
report
all
am
violations of orders I
instructed to enforce.
(4)
To
repeat
To
quit
all calls
my
dis-
post only
when properly
relieved.
(7)
and petty
To
talk to
officers of the
guard only.
line of
fire
or
disorder.
To
(10)
call
To
salute
all officers,
and
all colors
any
and
5-23
REGULATIONS RELATING TO
GENERAL ORDERS.All
quired
to
or other
He
arrested.
(4) The number, limits, and extent of his
post will constitute part of the special orders
familiarize
The
is
manner
No. 3
c.
To report
instructed to enforce.
sentries
themselves
are
with
re-
the
A sentry
and
call
will report a
He
necessary
No. 4
To repeat
(3)
will arrest or
To
by telephone
noted.
am
duty.
(8)
ing.
officers
all
(2)
of a sentry.
To
and
sons and
this post
of their duties.
are required to
To take charge of
distant
call,
"Cor-
No. 5
relieved.
To
(1)
If
quit
my
relief
185
186
new
except afloat,
sentry will not abandon his post but will communicate with the corporal of the guard or his
relief by telephone or other means and comply
with the instructions received.
To receive, obey, and pass on to the
f. No. 6
who relieves me, all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and
petty officers of the guard only.
(1) During his
sentry
commanding
is
call,
the danger
any
No. 9
To
in
for instructions.
j.
No. 10
To salute
protective covering.
by members
of
(2)
explicit
weapon only on an
whom
he
Unless
be inspected.
To
g. No. 7
it
to
duty.
(1)
talk to
When
(2)
Navy
the guard.
pistol,
when
he
will
challenging.
Sentries shall
of
and
guard in
Whenever
officer, officer of
before calling.
the day,
of the
(1)
tions:
No
salute
is
recognized.
will
Anthem or To
States
Navy
by members
United
enough
arms;
recognized,
if
salute.
No. 11
k.
to
When
halted.
is
will
"Advance
say,
If a
(e)
when
to
allow no
(1) During
pass without proper authority.
if a sentry sees any person
party, and
sharply,
"HALT! Who
is
will challenge
there?"
The sentry
may
circumstances require.
After challenging, the sentry places himself in
the most advantageous position from which to
pass or arrest the person or party. In selecting
this position, the sentry may require the challenged person or one of a party to advance
but he
halt
if
mounted or in a vehicle, the sentry will proceed as when the person or party challenged is
foot.
If
right to pass.
If
he
is
not
satisfied,
he
will
of the
means.
When
50-
-13
"Advance
friend (officer of
(d)
sentry
challenge
on
the
to
challenging hours,
ing,
be recognized and
to
To
one
187
If
(2)
same
required
halt
to
and
remain
halted
until
advanced.
(a)
in accordance
rules.
(6)
and
is
in
that
may
(c)
The
approaching
his
post;
commanding
officer,
the guard,
officers,
sentry
commanding
The
officer
may
limit
it
party
whom
he considers suspicious.
Section IV
FORMATIONS
General
When turned out
To form the guard
To turn out prisoners
To post reliefs
Par.
Page
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
188
188
188
188
188
5-24
the
Members
b.
of the guard,
or reliefs,
upon
5-25
may
be prescribed periodically, at
which all members of the guard, except those
on post or specifically excused, will be present.
inspection
b.
the
compliment
of the
The
5-26
spection.(l)
When
directed to
is
relief
>T
i
" i
N " ^
x.
corporal;
relief;
relief
>
corporal; No. 1;
2; etc.
(4) If
commander
is
also the
The S uard
when
If the
3)
desires to
ms P ect
>
5 ~27
Prisoners,
is
command
in
the case of an
of the guard,
officer.
of
officer
the guard.
is
If
is
is
the
same
as in
not commander of
in rear of the right
right guide.
commander.
At night, the roll may be called by reliefs
and numbers instead of names. Thus, the first
corporal acting as platoon
(3)
188
"
>
>
>
mW
guaid.
c.
The
same supervision
5-28
TO POST
RELIEFS.
a.
cells,
General
if
When
special instructions.
it
may
the relief
is
large,
relief,
sentries in ranks.
call
the
The
roll,
is
commander
of
ready to be posted, or
porting.
The
The
corporal moves his relief to their posts by
marching or by vehicle. When movement is
by truck, the relief will embark in the inverse
the posting of each sentry of a
new
relief.
nated time.
(3)
posts."
proceed directly to
by
direct order,
one
prearranged time.
The
sentry
corporal writes
number
down
names
the
of
time
and date they were posted, or directed to thenposts, and the time they report back to the
guardhouse upon being relieved.
(4)
(2)
The
189
If
the
relief
was
posted
with
arms
relief.
The same
rule
applies
to
the
prisoner guard.
b.
Sentries
mounted
on
horses,
bicycles,
in
accordance
with
the
principles
by
Section
GUARD MOUNTING
Page
Par.
5-29
5-30
5-31
General rules
Formal guard mounting
Informal guard mounting
190
90
290
1
5-29
as the
prescribes
the
5-30
command of the
going on guard fall
in by detail on their parade ground as prescribed
for the squad with the petty officers on the right
a.
men
flank.
The
inspects
it,
replaces those
who do not
present a
retires.
no petty
officer
with the
is
At
reported
guard at a
parade
assembled and
previously
designated
The guard
ground.
place
off
detail is
the
The band
of its front
rank
is
formed,
takes
is
its
it is
faced to the
guard
is
to be
signals to the
sounded.
the
190
marches, at the
a position
in
first
front
of
alined,
2.
its
FRONT,
major,
commander commands:
salutes,
"The guard
absent."
and reports
is
1.
ready,
to the sergeant
correct, or so
many men
191
<
12-
SERGEANT
MAJOR
ADJUTANT
Figure
1.
The petty officer in charge of the guard moves to position to dress the guard on the sergeant major.
the front
rani?:
until
by the right
flank past the rear of the guard, then by the right
flank to a point one pace beyond the left flank
man of the rear rank, then by the right flank,
and halts on line with the rear rank and, if
armed with the rifle, executes order arms. (See
the sergeant major, then marches
(1)
When
between platoons, and from this position commands: 1. SECOND PLATOON, 2. LEFT STEP, 3.
MARCH, 4. Platoon, 5. HALT. The command
HALT is given at the proper time to insure an
interval of 5 paces between platoons. (See fig. 3).
He then passes completely around the guard and
takes his post 3 paces in front and 2 paces to
the right of the front rank and facing the point
rest.
Upon
every necessary turn.
(See fig. 4.)
taking his post, he commands: 1. open ranks,
2. MARCH, and proceeds as in (2) below.
(2) The sergeant major alines the guard,
whether consisting of one or two platoons, in
a manner similar to that employed by a platoon
commander
the
fig. 2.)
b.
of
sergeant major
in alining a platoon.
After giving
parallel to
the front rank until opposite the center, executes by the right flank, and halts 6 paces in
front
of
"Sir, the
the
guard
are absent."
and
adjutant,
is
salutes
and
correct," or "Sir, so
The adjutant
(if
reports,
many men
"Take your
so armed).
The
moves by
beyond the
When
front.
LANDING PARTY MANUAL
192
>
|*
<,
Figure
2.
The petty officer in charge of the guard moves to position in rear rank.
nn^m
<
12-
5 -*
18
Figure
3.
<y
(See
fig. 5.)
(See
fig.
If there
be
move with
the
6.)
first
draw swords.
is
OFFICERS,
2.
At
command
3.
MARCH.
193
command
They
"Commander
follows:
of
the guard,"
mander
second
platoon,"
"guide of
rank
first
first
platoon,"
platoon,"
platoon," or
platoons,
if
"right
"right
"commander
guard"
of
(if
"right
file
rear
second rank
front
is
of
platoon,"
first
file
file
the guard
"com-
"commander
rank
first
the guard,"
"jun-
present), "guide,"
"right
file
cers
"right
file
front rank."
At the command
MARCH,
the officer or
offi-
guard
(if
present)
is
second rank,"
guard has been
file
If the
assigned as
"commander
of first platoon."
&&MMmsm
3S
t
I
_i
H
Figure
4.
The sergeant major passes around the guard and takes position preparatory to giving the command to open ranks.
194
B
n
IXI9KI3KI3KIXIXIX
Figure
5.-
After
moving forward
front
major takes
his post
on the
The
left flank.
officer of tl.e
in front of the
The petty
officers will
execute
guard
(if
man
the inspection.
(5)
fall
man who
quarters any
creditable appearance.
men
at the guardhouse.
plays.
commander
If there is
no
of the
guard
the
officer of
(1)
The
inspection ended,
the adjutant
and facing
petty officer
commanding the guard takes post as prescribed
for an officer after he has been so designated by
ficers of
and proceeds
main at
flank
the adjutant.
returns sword,
guard.
The commander
of the
to
inspect
guard
may
the
di-
The
new
officer of
The
new
officer of the
and
day.
pace
The
of-
The commander
of
the
If
195
T
V V V &&.
I
12
Figure
6.
The oiBcer of the guard moves from the rear of the guard and takes post 12 paces front and center of the guard.
^tfXISIl3|
3
i
ADJUTANT
Figure 7. Officer
(or officers
if
present)
and petty
officers
move
front
and
center on
command
of the adjutant.
196
I
Figure
8.
At the adjutants command "MARCH," the officers and petty officers of the guard move by the most direct route to their posts
about,
When
(See
fig. 9.)
off of
moves
for-
(See
fig.
10.)
2.
ATTENTION,
(5)
The ranks
sent,
RIGHT,
3.
The adjutant
officer of
the guard.
hand and
man
(10)
is
faces
and on
line
The new
FACE.
to the left of
rear
leaders.
the order.
command
"March
2.
MARCH.
close ranks,
to
(8) At the command FACE, the guard executes the movement and the band turns to the
riglit and places itself so that the rear rank of
the band is approximately 24 paces in front of
4.
3.
The adjutant then commands: 1. preARMS, faces toward the new officer of
jutant,
IN REVIEW,
2.
formed."
(9)
and
directed to
of the left
file
or
files.
(See
fig.
1.
11.)
right
shoulder,
(11)
197
V
VWI
SS
!
COMMANDER OF
THE GUARD
36
ADJUTANT
36
I
OLD OFFICER OF THE DAY
Figure 9. Formation
of the
of inspection.
198
SSI
I
f
I
L^
COUNTER
MARCH BY BAND
i
Figure 10. Movement
of the
band.
199
18>
I
"1
J_
Figure
11.
200
of the guard salute together,
drum major
commanders
of
front of
officer of
in front of the
guard
The
(14)
officers of
The
salute.
new
new bugler
(field
music) relieves
(field
INFORMAL
5-31
GUARD
MOUNT-
officer of
paragraph
5-30a
above.
and faces
to the front.
The
The
faces about
officer
and com-
2. MARCH. He then
proceeds to the right flank of the guard, verifies
the alinement, commands: 1. ready, 2. FRONT,
3. PREPARE FOR INSPECTION, takes post
three paces in front of the right guide facing to
the front, and remains at carry sword.
(2) The officer of the day then inspects the
guard and selects the necessary orderlies and
Any men who do not present
color guards.
creditable
appearance
are caused to fall out,
a
quarters,
return to
and are replaced. This
fact is reported by the officer of the day to the
adjutant after guard mounting.
(3) When the inspection is completed, the
officer of the day resumes his position and directs the commander of the guard to march
the guard to its post. Ranks are closed and
the guard marched without music in the most
practicable manner.
(4) The new bugler (field music) of the guard
forms abreast of the left flank man of the front
rank at the formation of the guard detail and
reports to the new officer of the day with the
old bugler (field music) after guard mount for
instructions.
instruction.
ING.
in
(12)
to the
He
and
(1)
its
prescribed
as
(5)
When
a petty
officer
commands the
commands
verifies the
alinement.
(6)
Section VI
Par.
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
of
by guard
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
5-32
GUARDHOUSE. a.
the
The commander
order,
2.
guard commands: 1.
as soon as the new guard has
of the old
ARMS,
The bugler
line established
(field
of the
new guard
by the
halts
on the
it
three paces
the
The bugler
and dresses
his
guard to
music) of the
guard halts three paces to the right of the
guard on the line of its front rank.
5-33 PRESENTING OLD AND
left.
GUARDS. a.
the
guard is commanded by a petty ofhe takes post and executes the facings as
prescribed for an officer and renders the proper
commander
(field
new
new
NEW
After the
If the
b.
ficer,
salute.
5-35
a.
new guard
is
dressed,
and
by the
to
the order
mander
of the
to be fixed
officer.
if
by the commanding
The commander
its
ARMS,
three paces
facing
when
especially directed
officer.
b.
orders
to
proper petty
three
officer,
into
reliefs.
5-36
RELIEF BY THE
NEW GUARD.
201
202
DISMISSING
5-37
considerable time
is
manding
officer
may
OLD
GUARD.If
If
per-
new
and new guard are in formation, each commander of the guard brings his own guard to
SALUTES BY GUARD.a.
new
5-38
of the
petty officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them.
The latter
attention,
mands:
3.
if
1.
OLD OR
ARMS.
Section VII
Par.
Page
5-39
5-40
203
203
5-41
204
general
may
interior
guard
The
afloat.
officer of
day
guard of the day functions
The
under, and
is
ship's
e.
The commanding
officer of
he deems necessary
and approves
practi-
signed post.
MARINE DETACHMENT
5-40
are
as-
Navy Department,
for
duty with
ship
may
direct.
b.
There
the guard.
directly
is
The guard
under the
commander
How-
marine detachment
is responsible for the efficient supervision and
performance of guard duty by all personnel of
the marine guard detachments.
The detachment marine officers visit sentries frequently to
insure that each sentry thoroughly understands
ever, the
his orders
efficient
c.
deck for
is
cable, the
direct.
ship,
of the
i.
5-39
on board
and
of the
duties.
is
used to render
S.
Honors are
Navy Regu-
lations.
d.
The
"full
complement
guard"
is
When
when
necessary,
when such
/.
The
officer of
the deck,
Sentries at the
close
h.
aboard in boats.
Challenging by sentries at gangways, or
795287 50
14
day renders
evening colors.
/. For further general information regarding
marine guard detachments serving aboard ships
of war, see U. S. Navy Regulations.
203
204
5-41
General
The senior commander of troop organizaembarked on the ship is designated byhigher authority as "commanding officer of
(1)
tions
The commanding
of
his
officer
of
troops
as the
approve or
commanding
direct.
is
men
b.
an
troops."
(2)
(3) All orders to troop organizations embarked aboard ship are, insofar as practicable,
given through the commanding officer of troops.
(See U. S. Navy Regulations.)
his
may
The commanding
officer of
manding
officer of troops.
He may
the
commanding
also detail
when
an
necessary.
officer
Section VIII
THE COLORS
and lowering
Raisins;
5-42
FLAG.
of the flag.
Par.
Page
5-42
205
General.
The commander
(1)
of
For
weather conditions.
flags see Figure 12.
(2)
The
flag
will
lowered at sunset.
Ch. 3.)
(3)
different
t}r pes
of
displayed
immediately
that no portion of
it is first
it
is
Lowering
the flag.
same
STORM
carrying the
flag,
in the center.
It is
as for raising
Q
FLAG
WINDY
WEATHER ETC.
POST
FLAG FLOWN ON
WEEK-DAYS
yardarm.
officer
When
GARRISON
NORMAL
HOLIDAYS - ETC.
Figure
12.
-Comparative
size of different
type
flags.
205
206
*****
*****
* * *****
* * ** **
* * * * ****
********
********
**.* *
****
********
********
********
Em^i
bIBS
********
********
mi|H
******** ..I
IIIIIQI
._
, -^
flag.
91
The
detail
is
to the flagstaff,
is
hoisted
the
commander
of the guard.
d.
207
is
is
The
fig. 13.)
in
The
and white
new
and white
It
the
procedure used
as follows: (See
new
stripes.
is
stripes.
It
is
folded
and the
blue
field is
Section
IX
Par.
General
Receiving prisoners
Keeping prisoner count
Release of prisoners
General rules for the guidance of
and
ship's
Visiting privileges
Mail privileges
Messing
Daily sick call
Reports and records
Prisoner guards
Sentinels on prisoner guard
GENERAL.a.
5-43
208
208
210
210
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
559
210
210
211
officers
company
Discipline
Working
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
Brigs
are
for
Naval
Regulations.
The
Naval Places
of
Brigs,
S.
Navy
for
and ashore.
Brigs as referred
by general
to such prisoners.
one,
of
officer, if
there be
employment and
prisoners; the commander
then safekeeping and the
management
the guard
of
for
enforcement of discipline.
c.
ment and
until
promulgated,
208
is
day
of confine-
unit
into
will
to the brig.
(6)
Make
court martial.
b.
of its facilities
for
have
who
Manual
conditions permit,
be construed as being
tions of the
PRISONERS.
Where
who
211
212
212
212
212
212
212
Manual
held in
officer
of confinement should
adminis-
and U.
is
211
211
211
Manual
ment by authority
officer of
all
209
Day
naval station
barracks,
19
From
To:
Via:
Rank
Subject:
Organization
1.
by
arrest
Time
Office
Dat3
Office
2.
It
is
requested that he be examined for confinement by the Medical Officer of the Day, Post Sick Quarters
After examination,
it is
man
Delivered by
USMC(R)
Officer of the
[First
day
endorsement]
19
fit
for confinement.
He
is
if
he
is
He
is
free
and in my opinion he is
and has no disease that will endanger the health
this date at
from
lice
confined.
intoxicating liquor within a period of twenty-four (24) hours prior to the time of examination.
.(MC)
USN
[Second endorsement]
19.
in the
Post Prison at
Time
Date
USMC (R)
Overseer of the watch
14.
210
Every item shall be entered on a personalproperty receipt form and the diposition
of each item shown.
This form shall be
signed by the prisoner and the signature
witnessed by the officer securing the property.
No
possession
other
or
personal property except such family photographs and censored letters as the commanding
officer may approve.
Prisoner's money and
valuables shall be turned over for safekeeping
to the supply officer, or other officer designated,
in accordance with
and
article 1204,
U.
S.
Manual
Navy
for
Regulations
Naval Places of
Confinement.
(e) Direct that the prisoner be immediately
bathed under supervision, dressed in uniform
designated to be worn by prisoner, issued the
essential comfort items and assigned to temporary quarters.
(/) Keep the prisoners status up to date, by a
prompt report of such changes in his status as
may occur during his confinement.
5-45
The
count.
of counts
5-46
RELEASE OF PRISONERS.a.
The
permanent
to the
will
commanding
be
officer.
and
Return
under
escort.
5 47
erning publicity.
b.
Officers
and
Profane, indecent,
abusive, or insulting language toward a prisoner
is prohibited.
c.
Officers
and
No
by any prisoner
sonnel except as
may
regular maintenance
work
of the activity.
channels.
/. The greatest caution and conservative
judgment shall control the use of firearms.
Onty upon the direct order of the commanding
officer to meet the needs of a serious disturbance
shall firearms be worn or carried within the
compound of any naval place of confinement.
5-48
DISCIPLINE.It
is
necessary that
Such practices
with arms folded across the chest are unbecoming to the ideals of the service.
money,
(1)
Each entry
rate, service
in chronological order,
Controls of
type are not approved as punitive or disciplinary measures or as part of the regular
policy of any naval place of confinement.
Stringent enforcement of the accepted rides
governing good order and discipline will normally suffice for the control of prisoners.
this
ITED.
a.
be permitted.
b.
Shaved heads,
c.
No
manding
officer
when necessary
prevent
to
Such
punishment purposes is
means
of restraint for
every naval place of confinement. The tractable prisoners shall be separated from the
troublemakers; persons awaiting trial shall be
kept apart from prisoners under sentence;
homosexuals shall be quartered in single cells
and assigned
to
whatever work
will
afford
recommended
for transfer to
whether
who
man-
any private
5-53 VISITING
PRIVILEGES.a. Persons in confinement for detention or serving
sentences other than by general court martial
shall be allowed visits from authorized persons
may
officer
officer or enlisted
strike or lay
211
Persons authorized
b.
as
commanding
the
direct.
to visit.
Members
(1)
of
Other
(2)
ters,
approved as
visitors
commanding
officer,
ative,
such
when
sis-
may
be
(3)
visits,
whenever
it
fairly regularly.
(4)
visit-
visit.
band
sion
if it is
officer.
the
Visitors
If permission of
commanding
officer
such search
may, at
is
refused,
his discretion,
Supervision of
visits.
AU
visits
with
pris-
and
e.
to
Special
may
212
officer
may
officer
b.
the
designated by the
commanding
Personnel.
The
by the Bureau
of
Naval
guard
is
The commander
of the
responsible for
guard
The
d.
by proper
guardhouse, or when prisoners are being transferred to another station or otherwise removed
from the immediate control of the post guard.
The
prison officer,
command
placed in
e.
When
if
there be one,
is
under
its
also
5-58
PRISONER GUARDS. a. A
guard
of prisoners.
may
GUARD. a. A
is
SENTRIES
ON
PRISONER
tions.
escape, or
be
be required
may
the
may
guard
He
mandant.
b. Such other reports as
by the commanding officer.
authority.
responsible
court martial.
a.
is
removed from
commander other than the commander of the main guard may be necessary
when the number of prisoners is excessive,
when prisoners are engaged on a work project
under
officer
hold daily sick call for prisoners and furnish such medical service as may be necessary.
For duties of medical officer assigned duty at
any naval place of confinement, see article 106,
Manual for Naval Places of Confinement.
5-57 REPORTS AND RECORDS.Every
When no
commander
will
main guard.
minimum.
direct.
manner as members
The number of sentries
If
means
for
213
of the guard.
g.
not salute.
h.
when spoken
to
by an
officer.
If
spoken
to
no one
SHELTER
215
Chapter
SHELTER
Section
I.
General
III.
__
Par.
Page
6- 1
6- 2
219
220
6-4
221
6- 6
6-1
224
226
217
Section
GENERAL
Par.
6-1
General-
219
for
military purposes.
6-1
GENERAL.
a.
Adequate
shelter con-
the
field.
It is of
men
as far as
is
consistent with
Depending on the
tentage
795287
50-
-15
Troops are in
private
or
public
billets
buildings
6.
(3)
especially
Billets usually
air
of
observation.
not
enforcement of sanitary
the United States and
by an amendment
"No
its
rules.
Billeting
possessions
is
in
limited
to the Constitution
which
time of
peace, be quartered in any house without the
consent of the owner; nor in the time of war,
but in a manner to be prescribed by law."
provides that:
219
Section II
camp
site
Par.
Page
6-2
6-3
220
220
6-2
When
camp
is
to
selected in the
6-3
SITE.
Concealment from
(3)
same manner
as a bivouac.
a.
officer,
unit.
ways have
command.
(2)
(1) Sufficient
the
by engineer
to be constructed
Tactical requirements:
b.
attack.
c.
Ample supply
of
gravel
(3)
Elevated
site,
steep slope.
(4) Shade trees in warm weather;
windbreaks in cold weather.
(5)
Accessibility to
hills
as
good roads.
220
air observation.
(7)
site
areas.
Section III
camp
Establishing bivouac
Par.
Page
6-4
6-5
221
221
b.
lish
6-4
possible a
camp should be
In the event
the arrival of the occupying unit.
the camp must be established by the unit which
is
occupy
to
it,
the procedure
is
the
same
as
6-5
Prior
the
to
arrival
of
the
troops.
the bivouac.
Mark
unit
areas
(See
8).
supply
is
damaged
is
correctly
used,
that
food
is
not
maintained.
(3)
Manual, Ch.
2.)
(1)
(3)
(a)
(b)
(c)
guides.
(4)
and with
adequate drainage.
(5)
site side of
(e)
Procure
fuel,
water, etc.
221
222
o-
<ZZ3
~3
<ZH<CZI
CZ>LZ> t=>
czz>cz> cz>
cz>cz> cz>
PLATOON
AREA ^--^
CO. HEADQUATERS
a M. G. PLATOON
FIRST
<3
"o
e?
EZ>.CZ> cz>
3^:
LS^J
THIRO PLATOON
SECOND PLATOON
AREA
AREA
>
J
cV
L-
HEAD
223
fr
'
^ outpos t)
<-
PATROL
BETWEEN
a OUTPOSTS
7\
Section IV
Commands
Execution
Striking
6-6
Par.
Page
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
224
224
224
224
225
method of pitching shelter tents so that commanders may establish bivouacs quickly. When
properly instructed, two men should be able to
erect a shelter tent in five minutes.
6-7
FORMATION.a.
pitched in line and in formation only for purposes of instruction and for formal field inspecIn bivouac, full use wiU
tions of equipment.
sling
are
arms prior
to
armed with
rifles
they will
COMMANDS.
c. At the
command PITCH TENTS, each
man, not armed with a pistol takes one step
obliquely to the right front and lays his weapon
on the ground with the muzzle to the front,
barrel to the left, and butt near the toe of his
right foot.
He then steps back into place. He
immediately unslings his equipment and places
his pack on the ground two paces in front of
him. He then takes from his pack the shelter
half, pole, and pins.
Each man then spreads
his shelter half on the spot that the tent is to
occupy with the even-numbered man's half on
the
(right),
MARCH.
(RIGHT),
using
The
d.
and
The
He
then pins
guy over
PITCH TENTS.
EXECUTION.a. Forming.At
shelter
camouflaged
down
MARCH.
COUNT OFF.
commands given
When
left.
halves,
even-numbered
6-9
gether.
line.
When men
6-8
Men
line
this pin,
He
of the
the
command ODD NUMBERS MARK POSITION, each odd numbered man draws his
bayonet and, with the ring to the front, thrusts
it into the ground outside of and against his
left heel near the instep.
The bayonet marks
the position for the front pole of the tent.
224
1.
Tent
pins.
3.
Foot stop
Doors.
4.
Shelter half.
2.
lines
Figure
3.
Shelter tent
(composed
of
two
shelter halves).
it,
position
when
the line
is
taut.
is
225
in a vertical
(See
fig. 3.)
He
then adjusts the rear tent pole through the eyelets in the rear of
man
pins
down
guy pin
so that
it is
two-and-a-
line.
The
left side of
Figure 6. Shelter
Figure
4.
Shelter
and
front
guy
tent, front
view
line in
position.
Figure
7.
side.
6-10
the
men
figs. 4, 5, 6,
and
STRIKING.To
first
unbutton
man
the right
7.)
sufficient
buttons so
them
When
the tent
Figure 5. Shelter
packs.
Section
PITCHING, STRIKING,
Par.
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
226
226
226
227
228
228
b.
(1)
Draw
pin down.
(4)
(5)
Draw
tions
(13)
if
there
is
one.
6-12
move
all
is
c.
Lower the
d.
Remove
being lowered.
tent
down wind.
collect
Spread
d.
lines to
6-13
(3)
stops,
wall pins.
Procedure.
flat
the foot.
(6)
pins.
e.
j.
(7)
(9)
tion strip
ridge.
and
in the
grommets
of the
tent.
and hold
it
in position.
226
Throw
all
is
j.
lines.
in
position on top,
Figure
8.
Parts
1.
4.
Door wall
Eave line.
8.
9.
fastener lines.
line.
The commander
marked by driving
a wall pin on the spot to be occupied by the
right front corner of each tent.
The interval
between adjacent marking pins should be 30
The
line of tents is
feet.
tween
tents.
men who
Each
tent
is
usually erected
by
ready driven.
(2)
Drive
left front
will go,
left front
erected.
bottom
Preliminary arrangements.
the
the
will stretch to
a.
Pull
so that the
Door
Stovepipe openings.
6.
2.
7.
(3)
Spindle.
3.
5.
227
Carry the
left as it
it
in line
Three men
(4) Adjust center pole and hood.
crawl under the tent and fit the center pole into
the plate of the chain and plate assembly.
Adjust the hood.
With a man steadying each
(5) Raise tent.
corner line, the men underneath the tent raise
the tent.
lines
lines are
(7)
drawn
taut.
Place
the
foot stop
line
228
all
the lines
taut.
6-15
a.
Remove
all
line,
a.
To straight-
the
left side
To straighten
fashion.
downward toward
Fold the
(7) Complete folding of the bundle.
bundle from one end toward the center at the
first seam (the seam joining the first and second
panels).
Fold the bundle again toward the
center so that the canvas already folded will
come within about 3 inches of the middle
panel.
Fold the bundle once again to the far
seam of the middle panel. Starting from the
opposite end of the bundle, fold the first panel
width in half. Fold this again. This will
bring it about 4 or 5 inches from the part of
the tent already folded from the first end.
Throw this second fold completely over the
part already folded.
Tie
(8)
bundle.
Draw
the
exposed
eave
lines taut
b.
Bundle.
34 inches.
by 23 by
back
wall, will
er
Figure 9. Pyramidal
tent,
229
M-1934
Parts
1.
Spindle.
7.
2.
Tent hood.
8.
3.
Hood
lines.
9.
Tent
Foot
stops.
Door
flap.
10.
Lug.
5.
Lacing lines.
Tent poles, upright.
11.
6.
Eave
12.
Door
Door
4.
lines.
pines, 24-inch.
fastener lines.
flap lines.
231
Chaper
I.
II.
III.
Field Sanitation
Personal Hygiene
First Aid
Page
7_1
7 20
235
246
250
7 ~ 25
233
Section
FIELD SANITATION
Page
Par.
in the field
Camp
refuse
Excreta
Urinal soakage pits
Soakage pits
Night urinals
Disposal of liquid wastes in Arctic regions.
Incineration
Ventilation
Insect control, general
Flies
Bedbugs
Cockroaches
Mites
Rodent control
235
235
236
236
236
238
239
239
239
239
239
240
240
241
243
243
244
244
244
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
Mosquitoes
Lice
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
IN
THE
FIELD.
a.
After meals
all
eating the
where
of.
is
men
file
refuse, liquid
in
each can
is
After
usually sufficient to cleanse the utensils.
immersion in the third can the mess gear dries
795287 50
16
7-2
WATER SUPPLY.a.
Contamina-
should be regarded
as contaminated until proven to be potable by
bacteriological analysis.
It may be contamition.
field
of clay.
d.
to be pure
is
chlorinated
and aerated.
Heat is one of the safest measures to sterwater but it requires time and fuel. Water
should be boiled for 20 minutes and allowed to
e.
ilize
cool.
/.
235
236
Wooden
may be so employed.
EXCRETA. a. When a column halts,
or cardboard boxes
a
sanitary detail should prepare temporary la-
of a tree, etc.
trines.
cal
there
the
Empty
(3)
full of
water.
(4)
h.
water.
i.
Two
canteen of
j.
to the gallon,
7-3
The ultimate
field is
(1)
limited to
7-4
collects
CAMP REFUSE.The
in
company
streets
refuse
and
which
environs
7.5
the
A
is
first
day
in
be covered with
combat,
dirt.
Temporary camps.
b.
camp
site,
all
(1)
To
prevent soiling
These trenches are used for bivouacs and temporary camps. They should not
be confused with the deep-pit latrines required
in more permanent camps.
(2) Straddle-trenches, 1 for each 10 men,
should be constructed on a line and be parallel
to each other.
(3) The dirt that is removed should be piled
at one end of the trench, leaving a firm foothold on each side. Put a can or shovel on each
pile of dirt so that each man can cover his
excrement and toilet paper as soon as he is
through.
If excrement is left exposed, flies
crawl on it, and then flock around the galley,
and contaminate the food, spreading disease
throughout the command.
(4) An ample supply of toilet paper should
be provided, and be protected by cans or
canvas during the rainy season.
3 feet long.
(5)
and
The
march
of today
is
line of
tomorrow.
c. Permanent camps.
(1) A flytight box of
approved construction should be used over
deep-pit latrines.
It is essential to maintain
For
details of construction
and flyproofing
237
pound
using
cresol,
the
seats
Aiter
must be thoroughly
men
prevented from
using them until this has been done, as otherwise they may be severely burned. The cresol
when
POSITION
,
SEAT
IS
feet
OF COVER WHEN
IN
USE.
STOP BLOCK
-2
X 4"X
6'
1X2
STRIP TO CHECK
WARPING OF COVER
HINCE (BENT)
TOP OF BOX 2'-0" WIDE X 8-0" LONG
WITH FOUR OPENINGS 10"X 13" EACH.
and place a
(7)
Figure
1.
of the box.
for each 12
additional week.
(5)
The
latrine
The
dug around
latrine should
it
be cov-
The
fly trap
(10)
tin,
The
site.
is
ar-
238
For use in loose sond where o pit might collapse.
One seat cut from the plywood top of preceding
page
fits
well here.
7-6
urinal-soakage pit
Dig a
LEDGE LEFT HERE ON WHICH A
SECTION CUT FROM A PREFABRICATED
TOP IS PLACED
CUTOUT
ATTACHED TO
COVER FORMING LIP TO
PREVENT FLIES FROM
ENTERING
SURFACE
is
constructed as follows:
pit
empty perforated
and
tin cans,
insert
at
200
men
from 100 to
indefinitely.
Figure 2. Double
oil
drum
latrine.
Figure
Figure
(13)
The
3.
portable
field latrine is
the
main
building.
often pro-
way from
4.
Two
SAND OR EARTH
///////^
EMPTY KEROSENE,
CAN WITH A, B,
CUT, BENT, AND
'SACKING, BURLAP,
OR HEAVY PAPER
SOLDERED, TO
B, C.
LARGE STONES OR
PERFORATED TIN-CANS
or three
Figure
5.
239
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
HILLSIDE INCINERATOR
With evoporotor pit
company
streets urine-
semiimpermeable
useful in disposing of
soakage
pits
be
should
constructed
the
at
liquid
waste
in
soil.
7-7
urinal-soakage
pit,
except that
it is fitted
with
7-8
METAL
TOP
FIRE
at
POT
(laundry water,
DIMENSIONS:
2 Feet Wide
3 Feet Deep
Arctic regions.
Due
to
permanent ground
frost
The
liquid will
thaw
in the spring
ator.
(See
cineration
Mann
fig.
first
(MC),
The
method of
devised by Rear Adm. W.
6.)
hillside
USN, and
described
the
Journal of the American Medical Association,
April 6, 1918, has proved simple and satisfactory.
and 6
in
feet or
hillside or
6.
Hillside incinerator.
and
stoked gradually
Liquids
drain down into the rocks in the trench and pit
where they soak into the ground or are evaporated.
The hot rocks and combustible gases
dry the garbage as it progresses downward into
the fire.
This mode of disposal has the following advantages:
at the top of the trench
down
(a)
is
Simplicity.
embankment
may be utilized.
(c) It requires a minimum amount
that
in-
L.
(BURLAP)
Figure
and
SOAKAGE PITS
(d)
to
heat
thus
facilitating
of fuel.
is
exposed
evaporation.
The
function efficiently.
is
240
air.
The stove, flues, and pipes
good repair. The careless use of
heaters has been the cause of most cases of
carbon monoxide poisoning in Arctic regions.
7-12 INSECT CONTROL, GENERAL.
The human race is constantly at war with
trance of fresh
must be
in
Common
Common name
Flies
--.
Common
Genus
diseases
Breeding places
transmitted
Typhoid
fever cholera,
dysentery, diarrhea,
and other infections.
tica)
necessary.
Range
Life history
Manure,
Eggs hatch
in about 36
hours to larvae. Larvae
i^ to
of flight
mile.
days
In 2 to
mature
into
adults.
Anopheles _.
Rural stagnant
Malarial fever
pools,
Eggs deposited
100; in 2 to 4
mass
in
of
days hatch
and in a
week reach pupae or
into
larvae,
In 2 or 3 days develop
wings and become adult
mosquitoes.
Domestic; develop in
water in any container
near a house or in gutters,
etc.
Pediculus (P.
Lice.
menti)
vesti-
Typhus
fever, relapsing
fever.
cisterns, spouts,
Lays about
man
Maximum
of 75 yards.
adults.
cling to hair or clothing of host (man). They
Eggs
hatch outin3 to
and mature in
days
Do
keep
close
to
one
host.
10 to 15
days.
7-13
FLIES.a.
housefly,
blowfly,
Important
and
stablefly
kinds.The
are
usually
The
The
piled
wet straw,
and rotting vegetation, and manure mixed
ly cracks
DDT
(a)
Destruction of the adult fly.
all screens on doors and
should be applied to
DDT
and
residual
from
contact
2 to 3
insecticide
months.
If
killing
the material
acts as a
flies
is
for
diluted
renew the
treat-
DDT
DDT
DDT
DDT
cylate,
percent, will
As
kill flies.
it is
flies
usually
well to prepare
eight parts
stir well
DDT
241
DDT
extremely important.
residual spray
should be applied at the rate of 1 quart of 5
percent per 250 square feet to the ground and
enclosures around latrines, garbage racks, and
any other places subject to fly breeding. Pit
latrines should have spray applied to the walls
inside and outside of the pit and box, and the
walls and screens of the enclosure.
Xyleneemulsions (Standard Stock No. 51-1-157475, 1-gallon cans or 51-1-147-500, 5-gallon
cans) must not be used in pit latrines or in
other closed spaces where explosive concentrations of xylene fumes may be built up.
In
such situations, the diluted high flash point
emulsion (DDT Emulsion Concentrate, Standard Stock No. 51-1-156-50 for 1-gallon cans, or
51-1-156-55 for 5-gallon cans) Federal Specification No. 51-1-19 must be used, or 5-percent
DDT
DDT
in kerosene.
distance
(4)
off shore.
Repellents.
The
Crude
is
may
be used around
galleys and latrines to repel flies, and coating
the interior of latrines with black material
serves the same purpose.
7-14 MOSQUITOES. (a) Relationtoman
unsatisfactory.
oil
Mosquitoes rank
first
among
all
insects that
The
quitoes
and,
possibly
worms
that produce
filariasis.
agent of encephalomyelitis
mosquitoes.
is
The
filaria
causative
transmitted by
242
(6)
Medicinal prophylaxis.
The routine
ad-
killed
About 4
lactic against
Insect repellent in
(c) Personal protection.
2-ounce bottles should be obtained on requithe nearest naval supply depot
sition to
or storehouse in such quantities to provide an
allowance of three 2-ounce bottles per man per
month in malarious areas. To use the repellent
properly, shake 12 to 15 drops into the palm of
or 5 seconds' spraying
room
can be initiated.
DDT
solution of
when
The
distribution of
from
also a promising
method
vectors of
Adult mosquitoes
(d) Adult mosquito control.
should be destroyed by spraying or painting
screens and the interior of quarters as described
Adult mosquitoes in
in paragraph 7-136 (2).
tents, huts, shelters, and buildings may be
10
percent
auxiliary sol-
secticide smokes)
of the culicine
an
many
required for
is
DDT
acre.
other hand
is
not ventilated.
The use of
solutions is an effective and
rapid method of spray killing adult mosquitoes
over large areas. The method is particularly
useful during the early phases of occupation
before organized spray-killing of adult mosthe
if
to 2 quarts per
DDT
fast
aerosols (in-
combat planes
is
larvicide is
DDT
One quart
a dust.
of Diesel fuel
oil
containing
5 percent
percent
water surface.
of
DDT
to the acre,
6 to 9 days.
acre
is
required
One
DDT
per
or dust
is
used.
to
CNO
circular letter
to
all
by
ships
air-
and
stations,
1946.
"Large-Scale Dispersal of Insecticides, Justification for" requires approval prior to the use
of aircraft in insecticide dispersal operations
(continental United States).
Heavy doses of
will kill fish and other aquatic forms.
DDT
or trailers
oil
film.
ing young.
oil
in clothing,
head and body louse coupled with scratching, produces scarring and bronzing of the skin
referred to as "vagabonds" disease.
Epidemic
typhus is transmitted by scratching the infected
of the
crushed
louse
bite or into
transmits
louse-borne
third louse-borne
disease,
The body
relapsing
fever.
trench fever
is
factory
243
The
destructive
(a)
Fre-
The powder
is
sizes.
is
also available in 5-
and 25-pound
head
and body
(b)
killed
there
lized periodically.
is
ters, all
The
Where
(2)
Use of
insecticides.
The
may
most
bedbugs
effective
is
DDT.
244
heavy even deposit
of
DDT.
About 3% gallons
and the side
70-man barracks.
walls of an ordinary
put out.
7-17
COCKROACHES.a. ControlAll
roaches are killed by adequate doses of DDT.
The German roach is more difficult to kill with
DDT than are most insects. Other roaches
fires
residual
action
usually
needed.
sprayed around
and
in
other
but heavy
applications
are
should
be
The
pipes,
material
on table
legs, in cracks,
frequented by roaches.
in talc, as supplied in bulk,
areas
percent
should not be diluted. It should be generously
applied to cracks and other points inhabited by
roaches.
The practice of spraying followed
immediately by dusting while the surface is
still wet usually gives the most satisfactory
results.
7-18
MITES (CHIGGERS, BEDBUGS,
BETES ROUGES). (1) GeneralMite larvae
are blood-sucking parasites whose hosts include
man, small rodents, rabbits, and other animals.
These larvae may cause noneffectives in forces
operating in the field (especially Southwest
Pacific and Southeast Asia) through their
ability to transmit scrub-typhus, a severe and
debilitating disease.
may
Characteristics.
Protection of personnel.
(a) Clothing
leggings provide some protection.
(3)
and
and
and front
of shirt.
It
may
also be applied to
Care should be
Dimethylphthalate-emulsion
(c)
tion
clothing
of
is
impregnaComposition:
preferred.
dry
to
before
wearing.
To avoid
scrotal
irritation
DDT
by
DDT
Ten
Five-percent
kill.
mem-
branes.
Bar-
in kerosene,
Eradication of breeding.-
(4)
(a)
Clear under-
and bushes from the area inhabitated by troops. Burn or remove all
debris.
Scrape off vegetation and surface dirt
with bulldozers. Apply flowers of sulfur (325mesh) to the vegetation and ground with rotary
dusters at the rate of 1 pound or more per 1,000
square feet (45 pounds per acre). Repeat
weekly or more often in event of rain.
brush,
vines,
objectionable odor.
caution.
The
It should
be used with
7-19
The rodent
is
General
The
distribution of rodents
may
be considered
location.
(2)
gram
Control.-
inch
mesh hardware
cloth.
collection.
fires, floods,
earth-
245
quakes, etc.
DDT
desirable.
(b)
taken, particularly
apply 5-percent
10-percent
r
Section II
PERSONAL HYGIENE
Introduction
Par.
Page
7-20
246
246
246
246
249
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
Vermin
INTRODUCTION.Hygiene
7-20
is
the
Personal
hygiene deals with the efforts each individual
must put forth to keep in good physical, mental,
and moral condition and with the precautions
he must take to protect himseif from disease.
The body may be compared to a machine, a car,
or a rifle for example, which must be kept clean,
in excellent condition, adjusted, and used in
such a way that its service will be long, honorable, and faithful, without danger to self or
neighbor.
science of the preservation of health.
down
time a
man
does not
feel
man.
If at
any
perfectly well or
7-22
are caused
so small
microscope.
are
in
These disease-producing
commonly
called germs.
The
agents
usual ways
as follows:
(1)
In
liquids.
246
(2)
toes,
flies,
or
drinking
water
or
other
lice,
ticks,
or fleas, or introduced
opment
The
devel-
b. Food.
Do not eat to excess. Food should
be well chewed; not eaten in haste. It should
be of wholesome quality and of good variety,
including fruits and vegetables. In many
foreign lands sanitation is poor and food prepared by the natives is likely to carry diseaseproducing germs. To be safe in this situation
eat only food prepared in your own messes or
in establishments approved by the medical
officer.
As a rule hot, well cooked, freshly
prepared food can be considered safe. In hot
weather cream-filled pastries and puddings
should be avoided since these foods are frequently contaminated.
Do not eat a heavy meal,
immediately before a long march, swimming,
Drinking water.
amount at one time, especially when overheated by exertion. Do not drink water which
has not been certified by a medical officer unlarge
sterilizing
food
air breathed.
prohibited.
lips to
the faucet
tablet
form or added
is
to
d.
gear.
knife, fork,
it
Wear
when
If
perspiring or while
clothing
is
damp.
Do
Bathing.
the entire
Keep
body
the
body
again.
e.
/.
247
clean.
Bathe
(4)
Toe
nails
kept clean.
(5)
while in barracks.
The
in
before going to
Have
dental
by use
of dental floss.
by the
and pain.
gum
Never
powder
h. Exercise
and
equally essential.
rest.
Exercise
and
rest are
muscles in tone and increases endurance. Exertion to the point of mild fatigue is wholesome;
carried to the point of exhaustion, it is harmful.
Rest is essential for restoring muscular and
nervous energy. Sleep should be regular, undisturbed, and of sufficient duration to result in
a refreshed feeling and relief from fatigue. If
sleep fails to relieve the feeling of physical
and
/.
Hair.
trimmed.
possible.
be condemned.
248
of food,
camp
rats,
site
or
and other
vermin.
before dark.
Where mosquitoes
p.
Medical
attention.
medical
the
officer
case
of
diarrhea,
Avoid all
and persons who
unless duty requires it; if duty
the medical officer will instruct you
appear
ill
requires
it,
and recommendations
lations,
up by the
set
by
character
cultivating
those
habits
and
will suffice.
to
s. Mental hygiene.
The mental attitude has
a close relationship to health. The rules, regu-
in the
tion.
annoying and
which are
he pushes aside without
worrying or brooding over them, for he has
found that upon looking back, they were but
trifles.
He never gives up when faced with a
difficult problem or assignment, for he is certain
that with hard work and study, a solution will
be found.
constantly
One
irritating situations
arising,
mind is
To keep the
Avoid
crowds when many people are having "colds"
and sore throats. Spitting is unnecessary and
spreads disease.
r.
Avoid
venereal
diseases.
The
venereal
by sexual
Only a
The use
disease
in
its
venereal
influence
value
is
to
if its
be obtained.
ill
is
maximum protective
Alcohol.
while
off
The
life
and keeps us
too seriously.
is a personal problem
However, the abusive
greatly to be condemned for
duty or ashore
use of alcohol
is
The
result is a failure
of
mand
lice,
are the
They
DDT
disturbed rest
ment.
lice)
and head
249
The body
powder supplied by the Medical DepartA clean body and frequent change to
clean clothes will in most cases avoid this
Men
infestation.
hav-
Section III
FIRST AID
WOUNDS, HEMORRHAGE, SHOCK, SPRAINS,
DISLOCATIONS, AND FRACTURES
A.
General
Treatment of wounds
Hemorrhage
Control of hemorrhage
Wound
dressing
Shock
Sprains
Dislocations
Fractures
Par.
Page
7-25
726
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
250
250
251
own
251
to his help.
253
253
253
253
254
B.
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
General
Service litter
Improvised litters
Without litter
TREATMENT
C.
Removal
IN
7-38
7-39
7-40
of foreign bodies
7-41
Gas
Freezing
Sunstroke
Heat exhaustion
fits
D.
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-51
28
259
259
260
260
261
261
261
261
261
261
262
262
262
RESUSCITATION
Artificial respiration
A.
255
255
256
256
COMMON EMERGENCIES
7-52
262
is
GENERAL.a.
Definition.First aid
person while awaiting regular medical attendance, or to prepare him for transportation to a
medical facility.
250
wounded and,
in case of his
who come
Efficiency in
first
tained only
To
him from
(2)
dure.
administer
first aid.
Keep
cool,
act quickly,
TREATMENT
a. General.
skin
into
is
A wound
is
pierced or broken.
incised,
contused,
WOUNDS.
any injury
in
Wounds
lacerated,
which the
are divided
punctured,
outcome
It is better to leave a
of the case.
it
first-aid
carelessly or ignorantly.
indicated:
(1) Expose the wound for examination and
treatment by unbuttoning, unlacing, ripping,
cutting
or
boots,
wound
objects.
Control bleeding.
(3) Prevent infection by the application of
a sterile dressing, preferably that from a firstaid packet.
if it
occurs, treat
to prevent shock
it.
HEMORRHAGE.There
7-27
(See
figs. 7, 8,
and 115.)
(4)
(c)
(2)
but
251
are
there
Arm
(See
or hand.
figs.
and
8.)
varieties of
may
b.
c.
Capillary.
Carotid
Brachial
The
CONTROL OF HEMORRHAGE.
7-28
Facia/
Subclavian
and
in a steady stream
Temporal-
Radial
Ulnar
Femoral-
more
(1)
artificial
Elevation.
usually
stops
limbs and
may
capillary
hemorrhage
of
the
venous and
arterial
hands,
and
legs,
feet.
trol
of
Pop/itea/
fit back ofknee)
means as follows:
The use of this simple means
arterial
795287 50-
-17
Figure
7.
252
Thigh,
(e)
leg,
or foot.
Press
strongly with
bone.
(See
figs. 7, 10,
and llD).
and twisted
is
packet.
carefully
it
firmly.
Figure
Head and
10.
neck.
Figure
9.
Course
of arteries
and pressure
points:
Upper extremity.
2.
on
plied.
3. Loosen the tourniquet for a few minutes
every half hour to allow restoration of the cir-
253
is
usually sighing.
Treatment.
threefold:
The
treatment of shock
is
(1)
alleviation
left to
Figure
12.
removed
WOUND
7-29
DRESSING.a. Cleansing
wound. Cleansing of the wound except for
the removal of gross objects which can be lifted
out without touching the wound itself is inad-
the
visable as
is also
fully
it by grasping the
thumb and fingers.
When
ready to dress the wound, open the compress by pulling on the two rolls, being careful
not to toucl) the inside of the compress with the
fingers or anything else. Still holding one roll of
the bandage in each hand, apply unpapered side
of the compress to the wound, then wrap the
bandage around the limb or part and tie the
ends together or fasten with safety pins. The
bandage may also be used as a sling if the arm is
wounded; or it may be used to bind both legs
together if one is injured.
7-30
SHOCK.a.
General.Shock
is
aid
to
is
an area where
possible.
officer as
a. General.
A sprain is
the straining or tearing, by a sudden twist or
wrench, of the ligaments and capsule which
SPRAINS.
7-31
Symptoms.
Pain,
heat,
are
first
The
ankle, wrist,
and swelling at
by discoloration
knee, and elbow
c.
Treatment.
(1)
the part.
Pack
(2) If treatment is begun immediately.
the joint in crushed ice until it is well chilled,
then apply a pressure bandage.
Repeat at
If treatment
developed.
Elevate
is
begun
the joint
if
possible
and
7-32
location
an injury to a
joint, characterized
by
254
slip-
joint has
Treatment.
c.
The
once.
Send
by
bone
injudicious
is
greater
FRACTURES. a.
7-33
ture
a break in a bone.
General.A frac-
simple fracture is
no wound extending from
is
is
damage
to
adjoining large
vessels,
or
of recovery.
muscles,
move
Treatment.
c.
ture.
felt
when
Straighten
(1) General.
the limb,
(a)
if
Simple frac-
necessary,
by
such as to permit his walking or being immediately transported to medical assistance, fix
or retain the limb in position by issue splints
or other available material.
(b)
Compound fracture.
for
Splints.
will
do
splints,
such as shingles, sticks, pieces of boards, bayonet scabbards, chicken wire, a rain spout cut and
fitted to the limb, or bunches of twigs.
It is
important that the splints be well padded on the
side to be applied next to the skin and that they
be securely bound by bandaging or by tying
above and below the point of fracture, but not
Pillows are excellent
over it.
(See fig. 13.)
pads.
The opposite leg can be used as a splint
for the injured one.
(See
fig. 14.)
be handled gently. It is
know what not to do
In certain cases imas to know what to do.
mediate movement or transportation is very
detrimental and first-aid treatment should be
administered and medical assistance brought
to the patient rather than an attempt made to
transport him to the medical officer. This is
especially true of fractures of the head, chest,
ture
be
of grating to
the bones
cases should
Figure
equally as important to
Figure
14.
13.
dence of shock.
Symptoms.
Application of splints.
(a) Fracture of
-"With the forearm flexed to a right
angle, thumb up, apply a splint to the inner surface, extending to the tips of the fingers, and
(2)
the forearm.
splints,
sling.
splints,
foot.
B.
255
WOUNDED
7-34 GENERAL.After the patient has
been given first-aid treatment as prescribed in
section III, it is imperative that certain precautions be observed in his removal or transportation, which can best be accomplished by
use of the service litter or an improvised litter.
If conditions or lack of personnel do not warrant
the use of a litter, he may be transported without litter (carried).
7-35 SERVICE LITTER.a. The transportation of patients for moderate distances is
best done with the service litter.
The method
b. Placing a patient on a litter.
of placing a wounded man on a litter is shown
in figure 15.
An
its
application.
If
the patient
as short a distance
Special fractures.
These
-(a)
Fracture
of the
skull.
injuries
are
sary.
Slings.
Fractures of the upper extremishould be supported by a sling after splintArm slings may be made of bandages, if
ing.
available, or may be improvised from the ordinary clothing by using safety pins to fasten the
coat sleeve to the front of the coat to support
the arm.
The coat flap may be used for the
same purpose by pinning or by punching a hole
through the lower edge of the flap and buttoning
this to a coat button.
(4)
ties
Figure
15.
Placing a patient on a
litter.
due to wounds of
sometimes relieved by judicious
In wounds of the
elevation of the shoulders.
abdomen the best position is on the injured
side, or on the back if the front of the abdomen
is wounded, the legs being drawn up and supIn injuries of an upper extremity the
ported.
best position is on the back with the arm across
low.
the
Difficulty in breathing
chest
is
by the
side.
In
step.
Litter
bearers.
Bearers
The handles
256
to keep the
ground.
over uneven
Rifle-blanket
b.
side,
rifle is
laid transversely
d. Direction of carry.
The patient should
normally be carried feet first except in going up
a steep incline however, in case of fracture of
the lower extremities, the feet should be first
going up and the head firsi coming down to
prevent the weight of the body from pressing
on the injured
first
7-36
the service
litter is
may
litter
part.
with blankets
and poles about 7 feet long.
The blanket is spread on the ground. One pole
is laid across the center of the blanket which is
then folded over it. The second pole is placed
across the center of the new fold and the blanket
is folded over the second pole as over the first.
(1)
is
or shelter tents,
by ripping the
bottom or snipping off the corners, passing two
poles through them and tying crosspieces to the
poles to keep them apart.
(2)
(3)
A shelter half,
or carpet
may
rifle
The
rifle.
litter is raised
from
single bearer
man
may
support
This
best.
The
(1)
is
as
effected as follows:
on his
face,
him
his armpits,
to his knees;
twine.
(4)
A litter may be
(5)
Camp
cots,
window
shutters,
doors,
7-37
WITHOUT LITTER.a.
The rifle
be made by running
the barrel of a rifle through each sleeve of an
overcoat, turned inside out and buttoned up,
seat.
good seat
may
The
back up,
tightly
Figure
16.
arms
carry.
first
257
which case the following methods
should be used:
Lay the man on his back and place yourupon your back by his left side, your head
Grasp his right
in the same direction as his.
arm above the elbow from its under side with
your right hand. With your left hand grasp
his same arm below the elbow, from the top
(1)
self
fig. 22.)
Then, keeping the right
your body slightly upon the man's body
and entwining your legs around his own, roll
over to the left onto your stomach, pulling the
man with you. The man is now lying face
down on your back, with his left arm free and
his right arm over your right shoulder.
(See
fig. 23.)
After assuming this creeping or crawling position, draw the man's left arm under
your left armpit. Secure both wrists of the
man with any available material (cloth, band-
(See
side.
side of
JTigure
17.
handkerchief,
neckerchief,
age,
may
chmb
when
ladders, or,
man
etc.).
You
in this position
if it is
desired to carry
him
This method
may
be varied by tying
first and then lying
down on top of him and inserting your head
and shoulders through the loop formed by the
man's tied wrists. Should the man's right arm
be injured, place yourself on your back by his
(2)
right side
right,
Figube
upon
arm between
shown
in figure 19;
hand and
shown
instead of his
e.
Two
bearers
(see
fig.
25).
The
man between
bearers
the patient's
arm
versa.
his right
left is
his left
18.
he now
where the
Pick-a-back carry.
and grasp
substituting
shown
hand he
steadies
<?=&
it
he
in figure 21.
reversed.
Com-
position, across-back
across-back carry.
across-back carry.
carry.
Figure
19.
258
7-38
a.
TREATMENT IN COMMON
EMERGENCIES
C.
From
the eye.
(1)
Figure
23.
body
If,
(2)
the upper
lies
under
24.
may
be
(4)
When
acid
is
alkaline preparation
made from
When
weak
From
the throat.
As the
(1) Symptoms.
sudden interference with the breathing, the person clutches at his throat and gasps
There may be violent coughing or
for air.
attempts to vomit; the face becomes blue.
b.
result of
(2)
Treatment.
If
another person
is
at hand,
notifying
officer,
Figure 25. Two-bearer
carry.
cident.
the foreign
vigor-
provised
foreign
legs
and one at
litter
his head,
should be used.
When
swallowed.
When
dangerous bod-
make matters
freely of bread
worse.
Make
and potatoes
of
soft material
way be
in that
carried safely
From
the ear.
Foreign
warm water
syringing with
available)
is
etc.,
may
doctor.
a syringe
(if
by pouring water
or
Toothpicks, matches,
foreign
removed by gentle
result.
If
the
removed summon
to
remove
7-39
STINGS.a.
They may be
readily identified
by the following
between the
side, outside of
on each
the teeth
26.)
fang prick.
The
(See
means a
Figure
26.
(See
fig.
27.)
259
Treatment.-
(3)
bites and
stings.
Bites from
and spiders and stings from bees,
wasps, and similar insects are treated by ap-
Insect
(b)
scorpions
ammonia or soda.
Animal bites. First-aid treatment for
ordinary wounds may be administered, but
(c)
7-40 POISONING.a. The following circumstances may indicate that poison has been
taken
Sudden sickness
(1)
or taking medicine.
(2)
The presence
Figure
27.
much
b.
In
all
followed quickly
treatment
below.
is
as
prescribed
260
Caustic
c.
or
(acid
alkaline).
tongue, or
The
lips,
of chemical
is
antidote,
castor
d.
the
if
oil,
known, or
olive
oil,
cottonseed
oil,
or milk.
Noncaustic.
mouth
If there is
no evidence near
common
salt
Within a few
a reddening and itching of the
becomes inflamed and swollen,
hours there
is
which
and even pustules often developing.
b. Treatment.
First scrub the part coming
into contact with the ivy or sumac with soap
and water to remove the poison. If available,
a three-percent solution of potassium permanganate in water is an excellent wash and should
skin,
blisters
be applied to
exposed surfaces.
all
solution
in a
circulation.
e.
Opium or morphine.
The pupils
is
of the eyes
shallow and
ficial respiration.
is
There
is
warm.
OR SUMAC POISONING.
Symptoms.-
common.
mation
Epsom
It is a local irritation
is
quite
and inflam-
salts applied.
Tear gases.
acid solution,
Do
limewater.
c. Lung
make the
or
solution,
irritants.
patient
Loosen
lie
quiet.
litter
Vesicants
(blistering
gases).
Give
if
the
(2)
his
IVY
7-41
a.
Use a
just as effective.
is
If possible,
or hillsides.
cellars;
levels.
walk.
Do
(4)
they are
if
affected.
More
(5)
casualties, will
latest
medical
officer
and the
7-43
symptoms
even
if
treat it
symptoms
When
become
If this occurs it is
is
necessary.
man becomes
unconscious from
room without
a fire, remove the clothing and rub vigorously
with snow or with a wet cloth until signs of
returning circulation are observed.
When
warmth and consciousness return, give him
warm tea, cover him up warmly, and let him
(2)
if
possible carry
him
into a
remain quiet.
7-44
face
is
SUNSTROKE.a. Symptoms.The
flushed,
skin hot
The
patient
b.
if
may
Treatment.
be unconscious.
Place
him
sprinkle water
7-45
toms.
HEAT EXHAUSTION.a.
This
is
Symp-
Apply heat to
men
Treatment.
or
Treatment.-
b.
clothing
cold,
Do
then loss of sensation. The part affected becomes white or bluish white.
b. Treatment.
(1) The part affected should
not be warmed before the fire but rubbed with
snow or with a cloth dipped in cold water
wrung dry. After the part has been rubbed
well, dry it thoroughly and smear it with grease.
If the
off.
officer.
place in tub
of
261
(2)
(1)
by cutting or
Remove
Do
the
not pull
it
large.
if
General.
ripping.
present.
Burns and
blisters
Protect
the burn or
If
fire,
262
This is always
dangerous and should not be attempted until
a.
of the
who
if
indicated.
show
will
last
mediately.
period.
if
Patients
signs
(3)
of
life
The treatment
of electric burns
may
bleeding,
ance.
result
Do
is chilled.
by applying
Keep head
elevated and
condi-
It is directly
Treatment.
back with
caused by too
Place
little
blood
Loosen
Fresh air
should be provided by preventing crowding
around the patient, by opening the doors and
windows, or by taking the patient into the
open.
Apply cold water to the face and let
him inhale smelling salts (ammonia).
7-50 EPILEPTIC FITS.a. Symptoms.
During an epileptic fit the patient frequently
utters a peculiar cry before falling, immediately
becomes unconscious, falls, and has convulsions,
The face
jerking the arms, legs, and body.
becomes deathly pale, the eyes roll and are
turned upward. There may be foaming at the
mouth and if the tongue is bitten the foam is
bloody.
Nothing can be done to stop the fit
after it has begun.
Lay the person on his back
b. Treatment.
and control movements which might cause inPlace a folded towel or other convenient
jury.
elevated.
patient
cool
D.
RESUSCITATION
exhaustion,
in the brain.
b.
the
FAINTING.a. Cause.This
7-49
is
the
clothing.
method
Lay
downward on a blanket
or
one
side.
The arm on
the
side
toward
is
little fingers
263
At the end
expiration.
should be directly
above the heels of his hands. Hold the pressure
momentarily and then quickly remove it by
swinging backward to the original position,
which permits the thorax to expand and prothe
shoulders
operator's
The
Figure
28.
patient's
mouth should be
mucus
cleared of
gum
so that there
is
no
inter-
To keep
the patient
warm
any
or tobacco,
during
air.
artificial
respiration
bottles,
gases,
fumes,
or noxious
shock or collapse;
freezing or exposure to extremes of heat or
thetics;
Figure
29.
electric
shock;
which breathing
The
suspended.
symptoms
is
by
temporarily
which
the
may
be
recognized are: Cyanosis (blueness of the skin
and membranes); suspension of respiration; or
necessity
for
artificial
respiration
Artificial respiration
the patient
is
officer.
a.
Treatment
drowned.
for
person
apparently
waste no time.
Loosen
about neck, chest, and abdomen.
With handkerchief or towel in hand, gently
swab out the mouth and throat to remove mud
to give the victim all the air possible.
clothing
Figure
Note. Figures
30.
28, 29,
and
30,
by courtesy
of the
264
Turn the patient
over, face
respiration.
It
is
well at the
same
for
of observers
265
Chapter
FM
Section
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Marches
Advance Guards
Rear Guards
Flank Guards
V. Outposts
795287 50
18
FM
FM
Page
8-1
269
273
277
278
279
8-19
8-31
8-34
8-37
267
Section
MARCHES
Par.
Page
General principles
8-1
8-2
8-3
269
269
269
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
270
270
To
March formation
8^
(route column)
Rate
of
march
Halts
Conduct of march
Meals on the march
Water discipline
Care of feet
Care of troops
Obstacles, stream crossings, and causes
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
of delay
Forced marches
271
271
271
272
272
272
The
b.
MEDICAL PERSONNEL.A
8-5
officer
8-1
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.a. A
march
The marching
by the amount of
b.
the unit
march.
8-2
straggling
men
a unit
is
judged
and elongation,
at the end of the
To accustom men
8-6
UMN).
The elements
b.
of the
column cover
in
file
c.
(platoon,
8-7
FORMING THE COLUMN.a. To
form the column for a march the commander
issues the necessary orders (march order.)
b.
information:
(1)
PRIOR TO THE
mander inspects
of the
efficiency of
of the
medical
suc-
ordi-
is
(2)
of
The
measures.
initial
The hour
march column
component units
Ordinarily, a
the arrival of
is
at
formed by
an initial
march
269
270
When
d.
unit
is
by
movement
of each
necessary, the
regulated
Units
arriving at the initial point before the time
designated, halt until the prescribed hour for
then passage.
8-8 START OF THE MARCH. Canteens
should be filled the night before the march.
The sick and physically unfit should be elimi-
which
its
initial point.
more than
of
marches
first
march
or
The
miles.
distance
is
progressively
normal
march of seasoned troops, in order to accustom
them to marching and carrying the pack.
increased
to 2 miles a
e.
LENGTH OF MARCH.On
8-9
halts.
day up
march
to the
g.
march
as early in the
day
maximum
Under average conditions 10 to 12 miles constitutes a day's march for large forces, while
smaller forces may march 12 to 15 miles in a
day.
marches exceeding 15
8-10
RATE OF MARCH.The
marching
viding
unless
required
by
to avoid excessive
special
midday
men remain
for experienced
long hikes
for
somewhat
men
for
the most
slower,
due
primarily
to
longer
rest periods.
8-11
HALTS.a. A halt of about 15
minutes should be made about 45 minutes after
the start. This permits the men to adjust shoelaces, rearrange packs, attend to the calls of
nature and, in general, remedy any faults which
might affect their marching ability. Succeeding
halts of 10 minutes each are made every 50
minutes, except the noon halt for dinner which
is
for
b.
down
off
hour.
During
rest periods
men
should
sit
or
lie
equipment
not removed
the shoulders.
Equipment
may
is
be loosened,
if
miles, or
body is warm
enough for muscular action to be most efficient.
The average rate should not be more than 3
rate should be slow until the
end of the
as practicable so that
made
On
when necessary
heat, halts of
in or near
from
towns or
what
is
required.
8-12
Strict
march
to
minimize the
rates.
d. Men are not permitted to leave the
immediate vicinity of their unit during halts
without the specific authority of an officer of
their unit.
If the condition of the ground
permits, they may be instructed to sit or lie
down.
e. A petty
platoon and
officer
is
rifles
or carry
them
at
As a
rule,
troops on the
march pay no
The march
men
is
habitually at
accommodate
their step to their physique. To combat monotony, it is advisable occasionally to march in
to
Tall
men
column are
dictates otherwise.
main
profusely,
/.
(See ch.
7.)
FEET.The most
Properly
shoes, in
271
and sore
Neat's-foot
oil
feet.
c.
fire,
Wet
causes
it
and
to deteriorate quickly.
d. Shoe cavities should be examined for protruding nails and wrinkles. Broad laces should
be used; the tongue should be smooth and lie
272
Woolen socks (heavy or
e.
worn
for
marching.
light)
Cotton
should be
should
socks
g.
h.
The
i.
troops'
feet
should
be
of
nails
at
blister
the
be
given
particular
is
Detailed
given to adjustment of packs and
equipment.
b. Use care to prevent men from obtaining
unwholesome beverages and food, and from
indulging in excessive eating and drinking.
c.
Hot weather
is
Every precaution is
taken to prevent suffering from this cause.
of hardship on a march.
where there
is
when
practicable,
tion of ah.
d.
tation
is
available.
inspected
should
CARE OF TROOPS.a.
8-16
attention
after reaching
blisters
attention.
of
day's
Heel
g.
tion
there
is
when
crossing bridges.
8-18
FORCED MARCHES.a. Forced
marches seriously impair the fighting power of
even the best troops and are undertaken only in
cases of urgent necessity.
foot troops, forced marches are
b. With
generally
made by
in creasing
the
number
of
Section II
ADVANCE GUARDS
General
8-19
GENERAL.
a.
Par.
Page
8-19
8-20
8-2
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
828
8-29
8-30
273
273
273
273
275
275
275
275
275
276
276
276
An advance
guard
is
a security detachment that precedes and protects the main body of a force marching toward
the enemy, whatever its march formation, and
covers its deployment for action when contact
is
made.
If
own
security de-
SPECIFIC DUTIES OF
8-21
GUARDS. In
accomplishing
advance guard is required to
a.
Remove
its
ADVANCE
mission, the
and
bridges.
b. Reconnoiter to the front and flanks to
guard against surprise and to secure informa-
tion.
c. Drive back small bodies of the enemy, to
prevent their observing, firing upon, or delaying
the main body.
d. Secure such terrain features as will protect
the main body from hostile fire and observation
and which provide suitable positions for observing the fire of friendly supporting weapons.
e. When the advance is definitely stopped,
seize suitable commanding positions to cover
the development of the main body and determine the strength, disposition, and flanks of the
enemy
forces.
8-22
a.
DISTRIBUTION
An advance guard
is
OF TROOPS.
generally subdivided
follows:
(2)
(3)
(1)
c.
8-20
The
a.
To
main body.
tion
Reserve.
(4)
b.
and support
initial
are employed
when
Additional patrols
necessary.
c. Contact
between the elements of an
advance guard is maintained from rear to front
by connecting
files
or groups.
Figure
8-23.
273
274
50-300
I
ADVANCE
GUARD
I
ADVANCE
__.200-300 YDS.
COMPANY
RIFLE
FIRE
YDS.
FLANK
PATROL
POINT
SQUAD
PLT.
MG
PARTY
LESS
SQUAD
SECTION
TEAM
300-450
GROUPS
CONNECTING
yds:
FLANK
PATROL
SUPPORT
^A
UP TO
FIRE TEAM
COMPANY
LESS
PLATOON
LESS
MG SECTION
800YDS.--
(S)
400-600
CONNECTING
YDS.
GROUPS
FLANK
GUARD
A
SQUAD
MAIN
BODY
300-450
/:-.
YDS'
GROUPS
CONNECTING
FLANK
PATROL"
FIRE
REAR
GUARO
I
TEAM
OR j FIRE TEAM
50300
PLATOON
MG SECTION
YDS.
REAR PARTY
I
PLT,
MG
LESS
SQUAD
SECTION
I
REAR
I
figure
note:
i...
an
a distribution
Note.
POINT
SQUAD
An advance guard
of
company
size or smaller
has no reserve.
8-23
a.
The
portion
larger the
command
b. Units
functioning as advance guards
should have sufficient supporting weapons.
is
command
275
The
c.
maximum
for the
size of
Table
1.
Advance guard,
Main body
total
Battalion (less
company)
None
company
Advance party
Support
Reserve
..
1 rifle
company
(less
ad-
platoon plus
Point
section
(loss
squad.
machine guns
vance party)
point)
Company
(less 1
platoon)
platoon plus
None
do
section
do
Do.
machine guns.
Platoon
(less 1
8-24
do
squad)
cupied by each element. None of these distances are set. They vary with the mission of
the whole command, the size of the elements,
the terrain, the proximity to and nature of the
visibility such as daylight, darkness,
enemy, and
formation obtained.
b. The point confines
axis of
are observed,
fire;
activities
parties encountered.
by
its
when
it
all
to
the
small hostile
by
fire,
None
do_.
Do
determine the amount of the resistance. Different action may be required depending upon the
mission of the command as a whole; e. g., should
reconnaissance be paramount the point would
be ordered to halt, conceal itself, observe, and
send back information whenever hostile activities are encountered.
c. The point usually regulates its march on
the advance party, one member being detailed
to observe to the rear, to maintain distance,
and
to receive signals.
8-26
THE
advance party
stitutes
support.
the
the
support
(2)
(3)
reconnoitering
made
It is
hostile rifle
(1)
against
fire.
and con-
element
of,
the
To accomplish
by
effective
this it:
is met.
276
for its
own
security
by sending an advance
8-28
reserve
constitutes
one or two fire earns placed in the space between the elements. The individuals so designated are referred to as connecting files and the
fire teams as connecting groups.
Contact is
usually maintained from rear to front. Therefore, whatever measures that may be required
are furnished by the element in rear to maintain contact with the element next in front.
They are so spaced that each file or group can
maintain constant visual contact with both
the following and preceding file, group, or unit.
When visibility is good, two or three connecting
files may be sufficient; in darkness or on roads
with poor visibility a larger number of files or
groups are needed.
b. Connecting files or groups halt on orders
j
when
Members
of connecting
or groups look
files
and
is
necessary to
PATROLLING.a.
8-30
rear.
to his mission.
well reconnoitered.
power.
b.
It
is
commander
force as a whole.
The main body must be
protected while making its dispositions, but
against a strong enemy the reserve must not be
committed to action which would later prevent
the concerted action of the entire force against
the
enemy.
Aggressive
action
is
justified
The
tactical
success
or
main body.
reserve,
enemy, acts as a
when employed
unit.
of the
b.
CONNECTING ELEMENTS.
own
of the patrol
must provide
man
(the get-away man) to return with information should the patrol become seriously
engaged. Normally, the strength of a reconnaissance patrol is one or more fire teams.
Flank security
patrols
guards.
e.
against the
The formation
for its
operate
is
in
joins the
rejoining its
own element
at the
first
oppor-
tunity.
/.
When
seriously reduced by
absent patrols, reinforcements should be furnished from rear elements.
Section III
REAR GUARDS
General
Mission
Delaying action
GENERAL.
8-31
a.
Par.
Page
8-31
8-32
8-33
277
277
277
rear guard
is
The
b.
ical
The
b.
distribution, strength
tion,
of
rear
the
means, such
(3)
as,
Selecting
advance.
(4) Fighting delaying actions.
(5) Executing withdrawals without becoming seriously involved.
advance guard.
porary halts.
(7) Reconnaissance.
Strength
(2)
and composition.
A rear guard
support.
by
rear guard
is
usually reinforced
additional machine
8-32
guard is:
fig.
1.)
To
(2)
of action.
(3)
of the
(4)
(See
mission of a rear
To
(1)
sity of
dom
MISSION.a. The
To
main body.
To
protect
it
ground observation.
mission
of obstacles.
Distribution of troops.
The subdivisions
are arranged in inverse order to those of an
(1)
its
(6)
(8)
Sacrificing itself,
if
necessary, so the
main
safely.
DELAYING ACTION.When
an
guard to fight, it pi-otects
the rear of the main body by a stubborn defense
in one position or in successive positions, depending on the speed of movement of the main
enemy
body, the number of positions suitable for defense, and the strength and aggressiveness of
Where the retirement progresses
the enemy.
favorably and the terrain is suitable for defense, the rear guard fights delaying actions in
successive positions, each so conducted as to
force the enemy to deploy at long range and to
launch an attack, and so timed that the rear
guard can break off the engagement and withdraw before becoming decisively engaged. (For
such type action, see Ch. 11, Sec. IV.)
277
Section IV
FLANK GUARDS
Par.
8-34
8-35
8-36
General
Mission
Contact with the main body
GENERAL.a. A
8-34
flank guard
278
278
278
is
mission.
c. The flank guard must be highly mobile.
Usually flank guards must cover greater distances than the main body in the same or in a
shorter period of time.
d. Due to their mission and the greater distances that the flank guards have to cover, it
Relieving
is often necessary to relieve them.
making the
the column
relief.
at
The
their
own
unit at
8-35
guard
is
effective
body
of the
marching column.
(1)
Marching abreast
and
of
in a direction
main column.
of
hostile
(This method is
employed when the locality from which an
attack might be expected is well defined.)
(3)
Occupying
when
key
positions
successively,
must be
when it is practicable for the flank
guard to move from one position to the next
without exposing the main body to attack.
several
dangerous
localities
passed and
8-36
RODY.
CONTACT
WITH THE
MAIN
must be
maintained between the flank guard and the
main body.
a.
Effective communication
normally maintained by
connecting files or groups sent out from the
main body, but, if not provided, the flank guard
commander is not relieved from the responsibility of maintaining contact.
b.
Such contact
is
278
Section
OUTPOSTS
.-,
"^""'o-T
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8 _42
General
Mission,.
Classification
Elements
Establishing an outpost
i-
GENERAL.
8-37
a.
An
outpost
o
279
be furnished by
J the lower units, the action of
279
279
279
280
282
is
com-
and observation by
hostile
ground
Enemy
tion of the
and nature
capabilities, terrain,
mam
and the
loca-
location
Qom bat
outposts.
mam
,,
an area on
battalion occupying
,.
.,
The
resistance.
outpost line
is
The
authority.
may
by higher
general outpost
is
in position, the
If
combat out-
post ordinarily consists of a series of observation groups placed to observe the approaches to
of the outpost.
an outpost vary with the distance, mobility, armament, and attitude of the enemy; the terrain;
c.
coordinated by a higher
echelon.
thereof,
forces.
b.
>
is
of
main
the
is
stronger.
When
position.
no general outpost
established,
the
tablished
plished
a.
b.
by
of fire
talion supporting
c.
Reconnaissance.
Observing and reporting information re-
are es-
a short
is
being
established.
may
/. Developing enemy dispositions and delaying the hostile attack in order that the commander of the whole force may effect suitable
measures for combat.
8-39 CLASSIFICATION.Outposts are of
more highly
organized and have greater resisting powers.
March outpost missions are ordinarily assigned
to advance, flank, and rear guards during halts,
Bivouac outposts are
d. Bivouac outposts.
stronger and more elaborate in formation than
march outposts. They are used to protect a
force that occupies a bivouac or camp area, or
a town near enough to the enemy to require
security measures,
large
c.
formation.
d.
e.
8-40
A general
outpost may
be located 2,000 to 6,000 yards forward of the
main line of resistance. It is usually established and controlled by a high echelon such as
a division or corps. Even though troops may
ELEMENTS.a. The
outpost of a
divided from rear to front
into the reserve, supports, outguards, sentinels,
command
is
When
280
established.
The
post element
is
The
b.
to give
reserve.
it.
The missions
of the reserve
or,
if
may
reserve
to
any
fulfill
of its
missions.
reserve
is
maximum
at a
resistance.
Supports.
c.
resistance
of
own
advance of the
of
the
outpost.
Detached posts.
Detached
limits of
any support
sector.
a.
post area.
which
is
clearly defined
Supports
aries.
security
vary
strength
in
company,
numbered consecutively from right
platoon
They
to
to
left.
and
in the
the
outguards
reinforced
from a
and are
Outguards.
are
at
maximum
distance
battle position.
An outguard varies
in strength
enemy
Outguards are
outposts, and are
8-41
port sector.
e.
Sentries.
outpost.
to
observe
the
fore-
If
He
will, in his
combat
when required.
b. March outpost. Security will be provided
for a unit on the march in the form of advance,
flank,
When
the
main body
mam
much
body.
If the
main body
the normal break during a march, the comof troops will provide for
security that
Sentries
mander
ESTABLISHING AN OUTPOST
Combat
by all types
numbered from right to
of
tion.
is
left
The
may
Sentries
g.
Supports
echelon
cipal
They provide
the
outguard
is
needed.
position,
He
any additional
will reconnoiter
assign
areas
to
be
/J
A BA'
BIVOU AC
(2
PATROL
ROUTE
wTV It
281
AREA
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS)
'<
OPLR
OUTGUARDS
FIG.
BIVOUAC
FlGUKE 2. A bivouac
OUTPOST
outpost.
282
Bivouac
mander
outpost.
The
to take in
b.
Combat
com-
guard.
relief.
battalion command post and supplies; designates the size of the outpost, terrain features
that must be covered, the location of the outpost line, the security troops and their action
in case of attack.
(See fig. 2.)
8-42 RELIEF.a. The outpost of a small
command
That
combat outpost
will
c.
and interior
guard; prescribes the necessary measures for
antiaircraft security and antimechanized dedetails the bivouac outpost
since
battalion
outpost.
march
will
The
begins.
take
its
position
unit to be relieved
for several
days.
d. Bivouac outpost.
A company assigned to
outpost a bivouac area will generally remain
in position over several days, whereas a small
unit sending out a few men will relieve these
engaged.
men
is
large force
of a
daily.
COMBAT TECHNIQUES
283
795287
5019
Chapter
BASIC
COMBAT TECHNIQUES
Page
Par.
General
II. Combat Formations
III. Combat Signals
IV. Technique of Fire Machine Gun and Rifle
V. Use of Grenades
Section
I.
9-1
9-2
9-6
9-12
9-25
9-28
9-35
9-40
9-45
285
287
288
301
308
326
335
344
360
364
Section
GENERAL
Par.
9-1
Purpose
9-1
PURPOSE. The
techniques of combat
tactics considered in
purpose of
this
chapter
is
Page
287
which are essential to the practical application of the principles of small unit
Chapter
10.
287
Section II
COMBAT FORMATIONS
Par.
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
General
Positions of individuals
Formations
Higher units
GENERAL.a. When
9-2
the
Page
288
288
289
289
fire,
frequent to enable the squads to pass over obstacles such as rivers, swamps, jungles, woods,
situation,
and sharp
The
down
deployment
For the fire team
(a) Column.
(b) Wedge.
for this
are:
(1)
(c)
Echelon.
(d)
As
(See
1-11.)
Echelon.
(e)
Line.
figs.
12-19.)
commander
fire
squad leader to
Use of formations.
288
stricted to
leader.
leader.
The
fire
team leader
Initial
the squad or
POSITIONS OF INDIVIDUALS.a.
The squad
b.
9-3
squad
(d)
the platoon
V.
(See
commander.
ridges.
self
skirmishers.
figs.
Forma-
leader.
which
by enemy
If
the
fire
action or
team
is
in the
foremost position;
if
FORMATIONS.MG
them
b.
to the situation
The formation
and terrain.
machine-gun section
of a
289
rifle
observers
by using formations
differing radi-
maneuver elements.
The use
of formations
by the
terrain
and the
situation.
is
by
dictated
290
BASIC FORMATIONS
ASST.
AUTOMATIC
AtST'
RIFLEMAN
RIFLEMAN
COLUMN
FIRE TEAM
LEA'..
AflAN
SKIRMISHERS LEFT
RIFLEMAN
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
SKIRMISHERS RIGHT
ASST.
of the fire
team.
AUTOMATIC "HfFLEMAN
k
FIRE
TEAM LEADER
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
ASST.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
to
wedge.
291
292
FIRE
TEAM LEADER
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN.
ASST.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
to skirmishers right.
ASST.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
Figure
4.
left.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
FIRE
TEAM LEADER
FlQUKE
5.
293
294
FIRE TEAM
AUTOMATIC. RIFLEMAN
"ASST.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
Figure
6.
left.
AS3T. AUTOMATIC
RIFLEMAN
Figure
7.
left.
295
J*
Bt
RIFLEMAN
/\
A^c
^S^ ^/^
>/
//
/gzf'
FIRE
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
ASST.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
L/^
//
/ Jf-W
jS
v^"
right to
column.
RIFLEMAN
FIRE
TEAM LEADER
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
ASST. AUTOMATIC
RIFLEMAN
right to wedge.
'
>
296
AS8T. AUTOMATIC
RIFLEMAN
Figure
10.
JE^E;
ASST.
AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC
RIFLEMAN
RIFLEMAN
/^F
LJJ^
FIRE
TEAM
/ V^
hi
I
LEA[?E1*.
i^lemaX^^/
Figure
11.
From skirmishers
left to
wedge.
COMBAT
A.
BASIC
I
FORMATIONS
SQUAD COLUMN*
(FIRE
TEAMS
IN
WEDGE)
IN
Squad:
Rifle
16.
DRILL
297
COLUMN)
"COLUMN"
>
"ire
Team
Fire
ream
d,
<
*2
>2
Fire
Fire
Team
Teom
d)
d)
>3
<!>
Fire
Team
*3
Fire
Team
NOTE:
It
desirable
is
teoms have
fire
from
those
in
this formation
in
AR
the
thot
on the opposite
other two
fire
one of the
flank of
column
teams.
<j>
HO 4963-2
Figure
12.
Figure
13.
leader
team leader
_.
Rifleman
teams in wedge).
298
WEDGE
4 "V" (SQUAD)
o
O
Q
V
0^0
'
*l Fire
Teom
*3
^
*
*3
Fire Tec
Fire
*2
Team
Team
Team
Y
*l Firt
SO
Fire
6 *l t6-
'
#2
Fire
rl)
*
Teom
- t
ECHELON RIGHT
6.
299
ECHELON LEFT
o
*l
YJ
i
Fire
10
*2
Teom
Fir*
Teom
*' Fire
Teom
*2
Fire
Tea n
Fire
Team
0 4563-2
*3
Fire
Teom
*0 43SS-2
Figure
795287
50
20
16.
Echelon right.
Figure
17.
Echelon
left.
300
7 SQUAD LINE
TEAMS
(FIRE
WEDGE)
o
TEAM)
No. 3 (FIRE
IN
No.
TEAM)
(FIRE
No. 2
o
(FIRE
TEAM)
Figure
8 SQUAD LINE
(FIRE
&
o
V
,
1
No. 3
(FIRE
18.
ii
ii
TEAM)
No.
(FIRE TEAM)
No. 2 (FIRE
o
Figure
19.
(!)
Squad line
(with
fire
left).
TEAM)
Section III
COMBAT SIGNALS
Par.
General
Whistle signals
Special signals
Arm-and-hand signals
arm-and-hand signals for
Additional
weapons units
General instruction for making arm-andhand signals
Page
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
301
301
301
30
9-10
306
9-11
307
9-6 GENERAL. Signals are used to transmit commands or information when conditions
are such that voice communication is difficult
or impossible, or when silence must be mainSignals
tained.
may
be whistle,
special,
or
arm-and-hand.
prompt
9-7
orders.
reception.
WHISTLE SIGNALS.a.
(1)
This signal
Sound a short
is
used to
fix
Attention to
The squad
and understood.
may
leader operating
on his helmet
butt an effective way by which to signal
"halt," "danger," "move forward," "assemble
These signals must be determined
here," etc.
and rehearsed prior to the occasion for their
Various pyrotechnic and smoke signals
use.
may be designated as signals to attack, withdraw, mark front lines, indicate targets, etc.
The following signals will be used by observers
of all arms and services in transmitting warning
of the approach or presence of hostile aircraft
at night,
or
rifle
or mechanized vehicles:
Three long
or
or of their
to
will
upon
their leader.
If
by the commander of
some other unit, or if no orders or commands
are given by their own leader, they will at once
return full attention to their own squad or
the signal was given
group.
Cease firing.
may be
command
rifle
the sound
leaders
may
others.
9-9
ARM-AND-HAND SIGNALS.a.
movement
is
to
If a
be executed by a particular
unit or units of a
Sound
command,
a signal designat-
movement.
and diagrams
Explanations
of
various
fol-
lowing illustrations.
To the right
(1) Forward.
{used when starting from a
and
{left); to the
halt).
rear
Face
move
(See
fig.
20.)
301
302
Figure
(2)
palm
Halt.
Carry
20.
Forward.
the
hand
to the shoulder,
hand upward
the arm and hold
(See
fig.
is
understood.
21.)
(5)
(See
fig.
24.)
Figure
fig.
22.)
(See
and
position above
24.
{right or left).
Carry
on the side toward the new
direction across the body to the opposite
shoulder and, with the palm down and the forearm horizontal, swing the forearm in a horizontal plane, extending the arm and hand to
Change direction
(6)
the
hand that
point in the
is
new
direction.
(See
direction.
fig.
25.)
(4)
the shoulder,
fist
fist
23.)
(7)
the
joiued,
Assemble.
full
(See
fig.
26.)
circles
303
repeat swinging
the other
jr.
the signal
completed.
is
(See
29.)
-'-jJ!
(8)
Fix bayonets.
the right
(See
fig.
hand
in fixing a
bayonet on
rifle.
27.)
fig.
30.)
As
Raise
skirmishers.
same time
(See
(12) Squad.-
(See
fig.
the
hand
and
arm
31.)
Figure
skirmishers.
Fire team.
Extend
28.)
Figure 28. As
30.
fig.
(left).
(See
right
31.
Squad.
palms
(See
of the
fig.
32.)
304
V
Figure 32. Platoon.
Column.
(14)
From
position
of
arm
Figure
whom
arm and
hand to the side and immediately swing them
back up in a pendulum-line movement straight
to the front, not higher than the shoulder and
then drop them back again to the side.
(See
fig.
the signal
is
(17)
fig.
35.
Line {same as
Echelon.
"As
skirmishers")
(See
29.)
(See
fig.
36.)
33.)
X^J
Extend
arms at an angle of 45
above the horizontal forming the letter V with
arms and torso. (See fig. 34.)
(15) V.
(19) Shift.
with both
Point
to
individuals
Then beat on
concerned.
fists.
(See
or
units
chest simultaneously
fig. 37.)
Extend
(16) Echelon.fists
closed.
Draw
the
horizontally to-
if
(See
fig.
38.)
(21)
arm
Figure
in sight.
fully
the signal
is
intended with
fist
closed.
This
is
the signal for battle sight. Open the fist, exposing one finger for each 100 yards of range.
Change elevation by indicating the complete
new
range.
(See
fig.
305
39.)
41.
Commence
firing.
COMMENCE FIRING.
41.)
fig.
COMMENCE FIRING.
41.)
fig.
(27)
Cease firing.
it
of
up
Figure
39.
(22) Are you ready?- Extend the arm toward the leader for whom the signal is intended,
hand raised, fingers extended and joined, palm
(See
fig.
40.)
firing.
fig.
43.)
(23)
am
ready.
YOU READY.
(See
fig.
fig.
41.)
Figure
43.
40.)
(29)
To move
Straighten the
by
left
the
right
(right)
{left)
flank.
it,
306
(left).
fig.
44.)
of action.
concerned;
upward
move
(downward)
the hand in
movements by
palm of the hand
Figure
44.
(left)
fig.
47.)
flank.
ADDITIONAL ARM-AND-HAND
SIGNALS FOR WEAPONS UNITS.a. Many
9-10
paragraphs
units
contained
are
paragraphs.
(1)
Action.
in
the
Thrust the
fist
following
sub-
several times in
(See
fig.
Figure
47.
Elevate; depress.
in the direction
fire.
(See
it is
48.)
fig.
is
45.)
^I^S|!
Figure 45. Action.
Figure
48.
Traversing
Extend
section leader,
several times.
(See
fig.
46.)
(5) Section.
palm
fire.
of the
(See
fig.
49.)
307
INSTRUCTION FOR
9-11 GENERAL
MAKING ARM-AND-HAND SIGNALS.
a.
When
hand at the
it
side
and
will
be completed when
first
signal
one has
Section IV
Characteristics
Classes of
fire
Overhead
fire
Range estimation
Target designation
Fire discipline
Fire control
Fire distribution
Fire orders
Application of fire
Final protective lines
Range card
9-12
DEFINITIONS.a. The
Par.
Page
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
308
308
311
313
314
315
318
318
319
322
323
323
325
technique of
fire is
bined
fire
b.
machine gun
unit
fire
is
CHARACTERISTICS.The
9-13
rifles
Figure
308
50.
YD.
500
fire
of
characteristics:
a.
Trajectory.
The trajectory
influenced
is
by three
forces: Veloc-
and
air resistance.
The
farther
the
becomes the
highest
is
of the range
(See
fig.
bullet
curvature
point on
is the curved
through the air.
its flight
this
travels,
the
of
path.
this
trajectory
1000
greater
The
(maximum
50.)
57 YD S
YDS.
a machine gun
a section leader.
trol of
ordinate)
of a fire unit.
c.
1500
(Vertical scale
is
2000
10 times the horizontal.)
H.723
5 VAROS
100
309
15
FEET
200
ANGLES OF FALL
ANGLE OF ONE DEGREE
(I
DANGER SPACES
1000
CONTINUOUS
TO
700 YAROS
800 YDS.
-1000 YDS.-
TRAJECTORY DIAGRAM
(VERTICAL SCALE
IS
H= MAXIMUM
R04324
ORDINATE
at l,OOU-yard range.
CONE OF DISPERSION
Trajectories
Figure
52.
fire.
310
above
this height
and
come within 68
inches of the
ground. The length of these two zones of
danger space is dependent upon the range.
A number of shots fired
c. Burst of fire.
automatically with a single pressure of the
For machine guns the number of shots
trigger.
bullet has again
atmospheric and wind conditions, and variations caused by the vibration of the weapon.
This effect is known as dispersion. The
several trajectories form a cone in the air with
its apex at the muzzle of the weapon.
This
imaginary cone is known as the cone of dispersion or cone of fire.
(See fig. 52.)
upon several
factors
Shot patterns.
e.
strikes
known
vertical target it
of dispersion
makes a pattern
pattern
(See
is
figs.
53 and 54.)
When
several
bullets
are
from a
rifle
RANGE
IN
YARDS
500
yds.
600 yds.
Figttee
700 yds.
53.
800 yds.
150 YDS.
1000
1500
Figure
COO yds.
TABLE OF APPROXIMATE
EFFECTIVE BEATEN ZONES
ON LEVEL GROUND - M2 BULLET
500
2000
900yds.
LONG
-I
YD. WIDE
_^^_^^^__
/.
zone.
The
beaten
The
size
(See
fig.
zone
the
is
by the
311
ENEMY
bullets.
SKIRMISH
ENEMY COLUMN
LINE
FLANK
55.)
FLANK
on
ground
lev el
GUN
on
zone
rising
Is
ground
GUN
shortened
Figure
on
foiling
zone
57.
Flanking
fire
get
it
is
(4) Oblique.
lengthened
which
fig.
(on the
is
fig.
and an
(See
fire.
56
fig.
(See
58.)
is
classi-
the gun.
Fire with respect to the target
a.
(1)
the
left)
CLASSES OF FIRE.Fire
9-14
fied
55.
enemy column
is
lengthened
Figure
against an
enemy skirmish
ground
Frontal.
enemy
may
(See
fig.
LINE
be:
front.
SKIRMISH
FRONT
FRONT
to
56.)
GUN
Figure
FRONT
58.
FRONT
fire
against an
enemy skirmish
(1)
fig.
left)
Fire
57.)
may
be:
is
man
W^\www/w w^<> )wJ)x*wTsv/m^ c
WcVn&ri&Bn&wn;
\t
Enfilade
of the
/'ff^
700 yds.
ner that the long axis of the beaten zone corresponds with the long axis of the target.
fire
in
At short
that of
(3)
Since enfilade
and an
59.)
Grazing.
left)
and an
Flanking.
flank.
(on the
GUN
GUN
enemy column
b.
(2)
Oblique
ENEMY
COLUMN
Figure
(2)
Plunging.
59.
Grazing
Fire which
at a considerable angle.
danger space
zone.
(See
is
fig.
fire.
strikes the
In plunging
ground
fire
the
312
^/
Figure
Overhead.
(3)
Overhead
fire is fire
delivered
(See par.
9-15.)
c.
may
(1)
Fixed fire.
point target.
must be
is
Fixed
machine gun
the
delivered on a
fire is fire
The depth
Fire
Searching fire.
tributed in depth
fire.
Searching
by
The
amount
of
zones to overlap.
Plunging
burst
fire.
The
exact
amount
of
The
sufficiently to
is
loosened only
(a) General.
Travers(3) Traversing fire.
ing fire is fire distributed in width by successive
60.
Combined
direction
and
elevation.
'
fire,
when
the difference
in
direction
The
mils; the
amount
of search will
depend on the
9-15
OVERHEAD FIRE. a.
Definition.
Rifle.
when
Overhead
with the
rifle is
safe
when
There are no
tance below the line of fire.
mathematical rides which determine the safety
angles for overhead fire with the rifle in battle.
Whether or not it should be used in any particular case is a matter of good judgment.
c.
Machine gun.
is
minimum
called
to
rule
is
as follows:
of the
set
(c)
ground.
If this point is
beyond the
feet of
not safe to
(See
fig.
(2)
fire
when the
61.)
Leader's rule.
by the platoon or
rule
(a)
is
used
is
as follows:
Select a point
on the ground
to
J-SAFETY LIMIT
is
The
It is
TAttQET
61.
gun
^wrtgorcoNeegA^
Figure
of
(b)
distance
clearance.
troops or
This
distance.
(a)
fire
313
which
it
314
is
safety.
(6)
this point
by the
of the gun,
greater.
fig.
the
tance.
line of
aim
to an
unknown
point beyond.
By
By
By
eye.
tracer bullets.
observaton of fire.
(a) This is the usual
(2) Estimation by eye.method of estimating range in combat. It is
accomplished by mentally applying a unit of
advance farther
than the point where the line of aim strikes the
ground, this farther point must be determined
by testing new points until the line of aim and
..
safe
TARGET
HTE ROF_coNi_or_FiRe
J60O
MOO
TROOPS
IOOO YARDS
1300
Figure
62.
Imporseldom known in
it is
If it is desired
RANGE ESTIMATION.a.
In
62.)
9-16
YARDS
it
This method is difficult to apply to distances over 500 yards. When the range exceeds
500 yards a point half way to the target is
selected and the range to this halfway point
estimated by applying the 100 yard unit. The
(b)
result
is
then doubled.
When much
(c)
of the
is
When
(d)
is
appli-
Conditions of
light,
in dull,
the object
most
of
which
is
determined
acquired.
yards of then
means
flight.
In estimating range by
the
50
21
the range.
when
Range
machine gun.
Other means of range estimation used particu(5)
estimation
for
larly
(a,)
photograph.
Securing data from other units.
(c) Range finding instruments.
9-17 TARGET
DESIGNATION. a.
aerial
(6)
In
and often
upon our
troops,
it
is
and properly
pointed out so that they may be engaged. If
a leader knows the location of a target but his
designation of it is faulty his men cannot be
expected to place their fire at the desired point.
Although the principles of target designation
are simple and easy to learn, conditions in the
field often make their application extremely
Satisfactory results can be obtained
difficult.
cealed
be
targets
discovered
only by practice.
b.
Methods of
target designation.
(1)
Targets
(2)
By tracer.
By pointing.
By laying (the machine gun).
By oral description.
By tracer. (a) Tracer bullets
are often
To
of
designate a point
Estimation by tracer. Tracer bullets produce a red flame which is visible for about 950
(3)
is
Ranges
(4) Estimation by observation oj fire.
can be determined by observing where the
bullets strike the ground.
In suitable terrain
the puff of dust kicked up will appear slightly
above the target and to one side or the other
depending on the direction of the wind. The
same procedure is used in setting the sights as
(e)
is
The
visible.
315
and nature
"Watch
my
trac-
position.
(6)
If the target
has width
its
flanks are
316
indicated
by
tracers.
flank" and
of a target
By pointing.
by
(5)
of
By
oral
description.
an oral description
Range.
(a)
The elements
are:
Direction.
Range.
The range
the sights
may
may
corrections
if
it
He
rifle
By
gun on a target
is
(b)
(c)
necessary.
Direction.
When
the target
FRONT
is
plainly
such as front,
(See
fig.
63.)
point.
Reference
1.
and
point
point
Reference
aiming
auxiliary
(for
rifles).
reference
widths.
(a)
The
easily located.
be more
men
and
the target.
it
which
is
is
is
no
(See
this
can
of
individual
fig. 64.")
itself
be readily pointed
out,
is
The
target
first reference.
there
The range
When
(d)
clearly stated
When
measurements regardless
finger
firing
diminish in accuracy as
number
two
mils,
well
it
it is
their fingers.
works of man,
may
measure
point
iu relation to
317
is
is
"Range, 500."
"Reference, church spire, left one finger."
"Target, group running."
(See fig. 64.
target K.)
"Range, 600."
1/
600
J
F
Wl
"
IN6ERS
Figure
64.
400
318
"Reference,
church
spire,
right
two
ringers."
is
When
gunner or is
exceptionally difficult to see, fire may be directed by use of an auxiliary aiming point,
securing data by the method given below.
(a) Gun method.
Data for auxiliary aiming
points may be determined by means of the rear
sight slide and windage scale on the gun. The
gun is first laid on the target with correct sight
setting to hit the target, and when the tactical
the target
is
verified
is
when
An
exception to this
"Enemy
"Enemy
enemy
line.
right flank"
own flanks.
FIRE DISCIPLINE.a. Fire disci-
9-18
pline
is
in a fire fight.
machine
combat and exact execution of
gun and
rifle
in
Fire discipline is
the orders of the leader.
necessary for proper control by leaders, and
upon
this control
collective
and other
ence,
fire.
to fire discipline.
b.
The
is maintained by leaders
example of coolness and courage.
Fire discipline
chiefly
by
their
responsibility
for
fire
discipline
assisted
c.
by
in
his subordinates.
is
maintained
(See
(e)
65.)
Description of target.
The target is dein the simplest possible terms; for
9-19
The squad
leader
FIRE CONTROL.a.
is
responsible
scribed
cludes
all
ration
of fire to a target.
have his
POINT
(STUMP>
AIMING
J^r
10
MILS
LINE OF FIRE
1350 YDS.
TARGET
GUN
Figure
65.
the
commander who
and
left
invisible to the
by
fire
fire
misapplication of
on unimportant targets, and waste of ammuDiscipline and correct technical training are fundamental in assuring fire control.
commander's order to his
6. The platoon
section or squad leaders assigns a mission to
fire
nition.
it
will
In
addition, it frequently prescribes the technique
to be employed in engaging targets.
c. The section of squad leader's order prescribes the location for each weapon, the targets
to be engaged or sector of fire to be covered, and
the technique to be employed.
d. In the absence of orders from the next
higher commander, fire is opened, lifted, or
engage, or the sector of
shifted,
section,
9-20
be
fire it will
cover.
FIRE DISTRIBUTION.a.
effective,
must be
Fire,
to
Figure
66.
319
effective opposition.
Fire distribution,
b.
unit
is
rifle.
The
fire of
rifle
The
Concentrated
fire.
Concentrated
rifles
fire
is
Enemy machine
fire.
rifleman
the squad.
He
amount
of the target
which he
The
cover will be
that upon which he can deliver accurate fire
without having to change his position. (See
fig.
66.)
rifle
squad.
will
320
Unless
(6)
instructed
otherwise
the
auto-
obvious targets.
to distribute the fire of then units on the
target area in such a manner that the enemy,
whether visible or not, is kept under fire.
(c) This method of fire distribution is employed without command.
(d) When it becomes necessary to engage
other targets the leader shifts the fire of such
as may be necessary.
platoon firing,
Platoon firing.
(a) In
unless otherwise announced, each squad habitually covers in its entirety the target designated
This enables the leader to
for the platoon.
weapons
(3)
shift part
of his fire to
new
target or to
bat
it
will
(b)
apply the
fire
unit leader
2.
may
They may be
a gully.
generally located
enemy
by the
firing.
whether
in
part or in
its
entirety,
which he
maximum width
fire
No
(1)
of a target
may
target.
fire.
(3)
When
targets.
(a)
traversing
method
is
used.
Each gun
is
laid
entire target.
When
is:
fig.
67.)
The command
for
TRAVERSE.
and
in width,
cliff,
more
leader
c.
(6)
first
fire
to effectively
such as woods, a
3.
must
This
three means:
flanks.
gun.
The
may
or
may
(3)
its
its
assigned
portion as
NO. 2
Figure 67. Traversing method by
section.
Both
NO.
section.
N0.2
Figure 68. Traversing method by
321
Target
less
NO.I
322
RIGHT HALF;
ERSE.
(See
No.
No.
1,
fig.
is
visible
The number
69.)
of
gun
gun
to traverse just
is
beyond the
flanks.
Each
reference point,
the
number
direction.
(5)
ing
If the depth
be more than 200
yards, the range to the near end is announced
for No. 1 gun, and that to the far end for No. 2
gun. Under the above conditions, the target
is covered by giving the command: SEARCH.
(6) Target moving toward or away from gun
If
position.-
Search-
target
is
moving rapidly
receding
(FAR)
has limited
mobility, or is moving slowly, and the ends are
visible to the gunner, No. 1 gun is laid on the
near end and searched up and No. 2 gun is
laid on the far end and searched down.
If the
depth of the target is estimated to be 200 yards
If the target is stationary,
NO. 2
Figure
9-21
the
Method
fire is
is
fig. 68.)
to the gunner.
or less,
the
fire unit,
leader
of
to fire
on
how
the
is
order
contains
to
three
basic
elements.
Only
NO.I
Both flanks
invisible to gunner.
b.
17.)
Fire
c.
ment
of
distribution
element.
(See
(1)
specifies the
fire
over
the
entire
indistinct
The
targets.
fire
par. 9-
This
target.
ele-
distribution
ele-
(2)
ment
e.
When
MENCE
leader
RANGE
Example:
600
COMMENCE FIRING.
9-22
YARDS, SKIR-
(See
fig.
70.)
APPLICATION OF FIRE.Applica-
fire thereafter.
Accurately con-
a.
General.
determined
enemy
(1)
a pre-
bands of
and direction,
being delivered under any condi-
grazing
fire.
The
and
type of distribution.
(2) When the target is the same for the entire
unit except that designated parts of the unit
cover only a portion of it, the target designation
element will be given first and then the fire
distribution element.
d. Fire control element.
(1) This normally
consists of the order to commence firing and to
It may also include the number
cease firing.
fire to
desired this
It
firing unit
of rounds or rate of
is
UPON MY COMMAND.
mand
ment
fire
effective
323
fire,
and capable
fixed as to elevation
of
tion of visibility.
(2)
When
fixed fire
is
incapable of producing
B
\T:
./>V
!?.,
;R0
43 2"
S&R
**+&&
'
''?*>
*&*##*?'.
i..J
target.
f^. fat**'-
324
the
maximum
effective grazing
because of
fire,
be employed,
may
be covered.
may
he
by replacing
this
same
index.)
Range
line
Method
b.
of laying on final protective lines.
Direction.
The gunner centers the trav(1)
ersing
traversing
along
Upon
micrometer.
which limit
protective line
is
the
of
to
lie,
determining
the
sector
final
(2) Elevation.
(See
of
the
final
is
protective
he obtains the
away from the
maximum
final
(By so doing
line.
angle
protective
traverse
of
in
the
He
then
line
Now
He
71.)
gunner,
using a sight
gun on an aiming
notes the
first
point.
graduation
elevating
elevation.
c.
Rates of
Good
fire
visibility.
on final protective
Fire
line.
(1)
during periods of
and adjusted fire. Under such conditions, the
section leader will generally determine the rate
of fire and may also give the order to cease
fine
firing.
the
fig.
The
visible
(2)
Poor
visibility,
visibility.
the rates of
fire.
may
prescribe
TRAJECTORY
AIMING POINT
^^cr7*^^
^AfX^^Jilli,
RANGE
Figure
71.
APPROXIMATELY
"'////,. ...-up,.--
*""-
750 YARDS
is
1
LANDING PARTY MANUAL
the usual rate of
a section on a final
fire for
of the
325
direction of the
and
card.
protective line
The
is
may
be maintained
by-
direction
firing
alternating
c.
pared
d.
line.
9-24
protective line,
final
COMPANY A
fire,
PLT.
e.
may
The gun
The data
position and
for the
its
map
range cards
coordinates
is
<*-
2 JAN. 1*47
1500
1500
Figure
72.
obtained
Range card.
Section v
USE OF GRENADES
General
Hand grenades
Rifle grenades
9-25
GENERAL. a.
Par.
Page
9-25
9-26
9-27
326
327
330
SAFETY LEVER
PRIMER
classes of grenades:
(1)
Hand
(2) Rifle
b.
FUZE ASSEMBL
FU2E BODY-
grenades.
grenades.
The two
PRIMING CAP
0=
Hand grenades.
nades.- A fragmentation
(1)
TIME FUZE
METAL
POWDER CUP
OR
DETONATOR
-
74.)
IGNITING
CHARGE
IRON
SERRATED BODY
EXPLOSIVE
CHARGE
FILLING
(c)
PLUG
Chemical grenades.
chemical grenade
on personnel.
Chemical gre-
ing purposes.
(e)
explosive or chemical
(2)
(6)
73.
Used
Fragmentation grenade.
Offensive grenades.
Rifle grenades.
Training
grenades
is
designed
filler.
Antitank grenades.-
(a)
armored attacks.
An offensive grenade
grenades.-
CAST IRON
SERRATED BODY
Figure
Training
9-276.)
(s.
(1)
SAFETY
PIN
AND RING
FUZE ASSEMBLY
W-~-
327
is
the
may
outer case.
The
(2)
filler.
The
of
filler
grenade varies
monly used
less
-PURFLE BAND
is
the
mechanism that
fires
the grenade.
All
Figure
75.
Incendiary grenade.
SAFETY
PIN- AND
RING
A
LEAD FOIL DISK
PRIMER
How
to
hold.
is
hold a grenade:
(1) The grenade should be held in the right
hand with the safety lever firmly pressed by
the palm. The forefinger of the left hand is
inserted through the safety pin ring.
(A lefthanded man may hold the grenade in his left
hand.)
In this position, the safety pin can be
removed without altering the grip to throw the
grenade.
FUZE
ASSEMBLY
TIME FUZE
SHEET STEEL
BODY
f _
SAFETY
LEVER
VVP FILLER
!*'.
,/,.''
,'
DETONATOR
Figure
9-26
grenade.
76.
HAND GRENADES. a.
There
Parts of the
are three principal parts to a
filler,
to hold a
hand grenade.
328
(2)
Do
When
may
as follows:
(1)
before throwing.
(2)
arm
The grenade
spinning motion
of the fingers as
rotate around
during
(3)
is
fully extended.
is
it
its
its flight
leaves the
hand
so that
it
will
to the target.
is
obtained
when
at
the
shoulder,
to
c
Figure
78.
c
Figure 79. Throwing grenade from kneeling
position.
arm counterbalances
the
movement
-of
the
right arm.
(5)
If the
329
five
yards
five
training;
is
fifty
yards
above
is
ji|^^M
average.
mm
Wmtf^-^y^mi
&%P^3 iL^^H
^ftrf
W^^^k
'
/*"
'
fj
i.T.
'
\si*W
*p^^^^~
u
'
ftrfl
Dosition.
"^rJ
330
is
necessary.
one type of
of
d.
many
precautions.
When
Many
throwing
'^""rr
u-
STABILIZER TUBE
SAFETY PIN
'
Do
of
vines.
(8)
When
live
(2)
Nomenclature.
The names
of the parts
AD
~y$^^
~'}&^
w
Figure
81.
Special cartridges.
sight.
differ-
,,...
~/^r
Jfcfir
throwing.
similar in
___
BODY
Do
is
-f
or
(4)
antitank
This is the
it is
Safety
the
in figure 81.
grenade
rifle
(6)
is
weapon by a
special device.
Ball cartridges
Ml
fired
rifle:
First
remove the
clip
and ammunition
331
LATCH
\S
ALVE'
ITHER
from the
rifle
and
clear the
chamber.
Second,
Third,
slip
rifle
launcher enters
the hole in the valve screw.
Fourth, push the
launcher down until it hits the bayonet lug on
the underside of the gas cylinder.
Fifth, push
in the
M8
grenade.
it
The
is
M8
to
is fastened by tightening
must be checked frequently.
it
slip
forward during
SIGHT LEAF
firing
and droop.
(3)
The
sight
M15
M15
is
ELEVATING
ASSEMBLY
SCREW
The
grenade launcher
shown in figure 83. It can be put
sight.
SIGHT BAR
c.
Sequence
of
operations.
sight
M15.
The
same
se-
also
795287 50
22
(1)
(2)
(locked).
(3)
(4)
(5)
332
Withdraw
(6)
the
from
pin
safety
the
grenade.
Push the
(7)
safety to
(unlocked).
weapon on the target. If highused aline the weapon first with the
Aline the
(8)
angle
fire is
muzzle lowered.
Then
raise the
weapon
(9)
Firing positions.
d.
to the
it.
The
antitank
rifle
gre-
nade
grenade.
When
(1)
fired
'
rifle
shoulder.
(2) Do not fire from the shoulder when in a
prone position. Do not fire from the shoulder in
any position where the body cannot move backwards at least 12 inches with the recoil of the
If necessary to fire from a prone position,
rifle.
use a rest for the butt of the rifle or carbine.
(3)
Figure
84.
Firing
rifle
grenade offhand.
rest
on the
right heel.
firmly
sight.
away from
well
(4)
left
When
hand
firing
swivel.
trajectory firing.
When
shown
(6)
firing
way
to fire
while kneeling.
under the
is
arm
vertical
is
when
held well
rifle
right elbow
shoulder.
Left
is
Figure
85.
Firing
rifle
Figure 86 shows
how
from a prone
This rest may be
a stump, vehicle rut, or anything else near at
hand. Place the right forearm over the top
of the rifle butt to hold it in position.
(7)
to fire
87.
UU "
^yyywwLV*?
Figuke 86. Firing
Figure
e.
Safety precautions.
Following
is
87.
rifle
Firing
rifle
(1)
General precautions.all
all
grenades are as
(a)
When
(c)
using the
M7
launcher,
inspect
General rules to be
times with
follows:
make
it is tight.
(d)
unless
ticularly
a sum-
333
on the inside
clean
(/)
When
is
free of grit.
(b)
should be worn.
in flight,
lie
helmet
334
(g)
If
rifle
grenade
vicinity of troops,
men
Special rules
is
removed.
Rules for
(3) Precautions with impact fuze.
handling grenades with impact type fuzes are
the same as the rules applying to firearms in
general, with these additions:
(a)
Do
(6)
If
M3
or
M6
do
not
fire
Section VI
^8
9-29
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-33
Scouting
The compass
335
335
339
339
Terrain appreciation
Observing and reporting
Instructions to the individual in case of
341
3-11
9-34
capture...
343
tne ^ re *
9-28
GENERAL. The
is
member
of
cient
him
tactical training of
The
individual
must be
so
trained
that he will
moments
of
10st ^ e
weapons such
as a reverse
man-made
or
ral
,,
,-,
A
Anything
that hides an object from the enemy
but
b.
the individual
,,
will
Use
(1)
(2)
observing.
(7)
**>
CORRECT OBSERVING
POSITION
PROSE AROUND
RIGHT SIBB OF TREE
RSERVE PRONE
VM'K CROSS BAR
r EEN< E
r-:'
OBSERVE OVER
'IT"
:
:...
A .CREST AT A
POINT WHERE if
OR GRASSY
IS
BROKEN
OBSERVE PRONE AROt
RIGHT SIDE OF ROCK
Figure
88.
Nil
336
(2)
Use
(3)
Be
(4)
all
(2)
Movement.
The
(See
ing.
movement
observing,
move exposed
parts of
use of
fig.
all
and
89-90.)
available cover
and con-
figs.
91-92.)
gency.
(5)
When
Do
(4)
principles of
(See
are:
(1)
Make
(3)
drop quickly.
point of view.
d.
When
available cover.
able to
c.
Take advantage
cover up
of
sounds at night to
own movements.
r
(1)
(3)
Lower head
Keep
all
slowly,
parts of the
draw arms
body
in,
flat
on ground.
(2)
(4)
new
position.
to rush.
(5)
Spring to
feet,
stepping
off
with
left foot.
(6)
Run
left
in a zigzag line
a prone position.
(1)
(3)
fall
feet in position.
(2)
ri
(4)
337
Drop Quickly
to knees, slide
flat
intending to
hand
to heel of the
rifle.
if
not
fire.
'
(5)
Figure
(1)
rifle is
91).
Ready
to
fire.
dragged along on
(2)
To move
left leg
forward,
toe of the butt with finger over muzzle to keep out dirt.
(3)
left leg.
(4)
faster
to crawl.
by
rifle
gets in the
way
makes
silhouette
338
(1)
(2)
Body
is
kept
free of ground
Move
(3)
(6)
At night move
(7)
areas and
for concealment.
stealthily
and quietly;
Passing
obstacles.
All
Notice that
when
depend on darkness
legs, rifle is
when
creeping the
crawling.
body presents
to creep.
man
movement near
will
The danger
Under
To
<
individual
wire.
moves on
cross
his back.
He
(See
resting on his
fig. 94.)
Cutting wire.
This prevents
(See
fig.
95.)
wire.
339
m.
Map
a.
FM
reading and
field
sketching.
(See
21-25.)
c.
d.
b.
THE COMPASS. a.
Method of
Hold with thumb tlvrough ring,
supported by the first two fingers. (See fig. 97.)
(2) Adjust eyepiece until figures on dial can
9-31
using.-
(1)
be read.
(3)
north.
(4)
(2)
above.
as directed in (1)
is
and
under
is
now
magnetic north.
(5) Turn the body either to the right or left.
The number now under the stationary index
is the magnetic azimuth of the new hne of sight.
(See
wire.
Figure
95.
fig. 98.)
Cutting wire.
340
r
FRONT SIGHT
LUMINOUS
DOTS
(HAIRLINE)
COVER
STATIONARY
MOVABLE
INDEX
CRYSTAL
MOVABLE BRASS
RIM
45
LUMINOUS
LINE
RIM HOLDER
90
DOT
DIAL
180
DOT
HOLDING RING
-REAR SIGHT
Figure
96.
Nomenclature of compass.
4*ttifa
r^TTrM"' 1 _[<jA
:
\jA
^^^m
(OA
Figure 97. A method
of holding the
compass.
LANDING
PAI-ffY
MANUAL
34]
~^&Gtti6ifotifa>i
THEN
WITHOUT MOVING READ
AZIMUTH HERE THRU
THE LENS
Figure
b.
98.
compass
fields.
Fields of fire.
employment
of all weapons.
effective
The best
fields
open
terrain.
(3)
(4)
Obstacles.
(5)
Routes
movement
of
of troops
9-33
important.
when viewed
Good
the answers to important questions.
observation is an important factor in the art
not only for the individual
Avoiding ambushes, selecting targets, directing fire, and many other
things depend on good observing.
of self-preservation
but for
his unit.
observer's front.
farther
342
Figure
Figure
99.
100.
Terrain features.
How
to
search
terrain.
343
the
is
Section VII
The
knife
Judo
GENERAL. a.
9-35
bat
is
Pur.
Page
9-35
9-36
9-37
9-38
9-39
344
344
345
350
352
Hand-to-hand com-
primitive.
It involves
combat with a
unarmed.
club,
and
by raiding
where it becomes
parties
R.D.
4443
,^^K
344
combat with bayonet, knife, club, or judo becomes necessary. Weapons can be devised
such as blackjacks and garrotes. An example
is
PURPOSE.Hand-to-hand
9-36
or close combat,
fighting
in
(See
figs.
man
is
to give
combat,
taught to the individual
him
confidence in himself
contact, to enable
of his
and
him
to destroy his
enemy
in
close combat,
RD
a sentry.
444
to
32^fc^ku
Figure 102. Garrote taking down
a sentry.
345
in
hand-to-hand combat
He
fire
will often
nent.
body
slightly
forward,
hips level.
(See
fig.
Grasp the
sure.
rifle
with the
left
hand, palm
To
movement
in
any
direction.
Keep
the
Short guard.
To
of
so
of
Guard
Body
3.
too erect.
of
movement.
(2)
left
shoulder.
(6)
(See
Employment
fig.
in
104.)
hurdling obstacles.
1.
To jump holding
the
rifle
at high port,
346
rear
foot
movement
strikes
the
drive the
rifle,
left,
forcefully
arm
bayonet
At the instant
rifle
of full
inside of
Figure
104.
To jump
actions.
by pivoting on the
tion of guard.
Long
(2)
1.
and withdrawal
ball
posi-
thrust
To
guard position,
lunge
extending
(See
2.
forward,
fig.
Figure
3.
To
(1)
tion.
leg.
the
entire
body.
105.)
of the
body
as the
105.
mum
by
determined
It is imto know his reach and
trial at
347
is
man
number
will
foot forward.
Common
(6)
Errors.
by drawing the
thrust
1.
"Telegraphing" the
rifle
2.
5.
right forearm.
6.
7.
a step.
(See
fig.
106.)
If
tion.
(a)
Execu-
tion,
posi-
Figure
106.
butt stroke.
The parry is an
(1) Purpose.
blow to create an opening by beating
the opponent's bayonet out of the way. It is
made by a forward and lateral movement of
The lateral movement
great force and speed.
d.
Parries.
offensive
To parry
(a) Parry right.
from the position of guard, lunge forward
At the same
(See fig. 108.)
as in a long thrust.
time, thrust the piece diagonally forward and
forward.
to the right
The
(2) Execution.
right
right
Upon completion
position.
(6)
795287 50-
parallel to the
guard
348
by
is
(e)
Common
errors.
1.
Failure to use
suffi-
cient force
body.
2. Making
a wide sweeping movement,
without any forward movement of the piece.
3. Eyes not on the opponent's weapon.
thrust.
forearm.
movement
Limit
the
diagonal
forward
beating
the
movement.
(b)
execute
thrust,
above,
(See
fig.
parry, right.
(1) General.
Butt strokes and slashes.
butt strokes
use
not
does
fighter
The bayonet
possible
to use
it
is
when
and slashes in combat
advantageously
them
use
But he can
a thrust.
e.
in
many
situations,
particularly
in
close-in
Figure
109.
Straight parry,
when
in a general melee
lateral
Figure
movements
are
To make
upward
plexus, or chin.
body
into
the
blow.
(See
of the
fig.
110.)
whole
The
difficult target.
(b)
Smash.
If
Slash.
If
(See
fig.
111.)
slashing diagonally
110.
left.
restricted.
(2) Execution.
349
falls,
downward with
this point or
movement
vigorously.
(See
Horizontal
{(I)
series
close to
112.)
fig.
In
stroke
butt
series.-
rifle
this
and bayonet
is
Horizontal
1.
butt
stroke.
To
make
the
113)
same horizontal
If the
position.
smash
(e)
Slash.
Common
errors.
1.
at the opponent.
2.
The
force of the
in the
350
arm
is
of the
rifle
bent
and
bayonet.
3.
Figure
111.
Insufficient speed.
9-38
THE KNIFE.a.
is
palm and
around it
Notice that the
second, third, and fourth fingers will each be
wrapped around the grip more than the index
finger.
The thumb should press straight along
the handle and should point towards the blade.
Thumb and index finger will be just inside the
guard.
If the blade is single-edged, the blade
can face either inboard or outboard.
(See fig.
across the
'
114.)
Figure 112. The
(2)
The diagonal
grip
will
give
maximum
351
knife.
Stance.
The
recommended
stance
for
is
the individual.
balls of
slash.
d.
most
(See
fig.
Whereto
115.)
strike.
The
body
abdomen,
near the base) and the
(1)
parts of the
kidneys.
The thorax
is
because of the heart and lungs within. However, it is not quite as vulnerable to a thrust as
the aforementioned spots because of the possibility of the knife being deflected or stopped by
a rib. For any of the spots mentioned, a penetration of three inches is sufficient to cause a
fatal
wound.
R.D.
4443
^mi.
(2)
is
Slashes.
the throat.
It
is
must be severed as
region
is,
well.
of course, fatal.
352
an out-
hemorrhage.
e.
Knife
thrust.
rigid
and
let
the arm.
the knife be just an extension
Execute the thrust to the exposed vital spot
by shooting the arm out and driving the knife
of
from
its initial
waist straight to
its
mark.
An alternative is to
enlarged appreciably.
slash vigorously as the withdrawal is made.
Slashes can be made with
j. Knife slashes.
end of the blade or with a cuttingedge. The best type of slash to use depends
upon the knife, its weight and its cutting edges.
On
g. Taking down a sentry from behind.
either the tip
infiltration missions
down
it
may
be necessary to take
thumb and
forefinger
and
knee in
Have
his back,
drops his
rifle
in his hands.
(See
fig.
116.)
If
taken by sur-
Figure
116.
9-39
JUDO.a. General.Judo is of
Chinese origin and was adopted by the Japanese
as their own, late in the twelfth century. They
called
and
it
Jitsu
"Jiu Jitsu."
means
"art."
The
Jiu
means "gentle"
kill
him by
most
be
353
Crotch (see
first
in
fig.
vital areas to
Even
mind.
There are
many
and gouging.
The
eyes,
nose,
ears,
mouth,
many
others.
(See
fig.
119.)
In hand-to-hand
Figure
119.
Back of neck.
to
(1)
Hip
throw.
(a)
Grab
opponent's
R.D.
4443
Figure 118. Crotch blow.
left
away.
Grab his right arm underneath the elbow with
the left hand, pulling it toward the thrower.
354
With the
(c)
(still
1.
2.
and
Bear
leg
trip.
very quick,
simple,
effective take-down.
(a)
ably his
left side
clothing, prefer-
(note',
how
this
and
movement
leg
R D
444
stomach.)
crotch.
it is
(3)
Drop
kick.
Good
if
worked
fast before
crotch.
(In
practice
place
foot
gently
in
when
easier
355
Figure
Belt pull.
les trip
S*N^ "^
124.
With
right fist
3.
in
the stomach.
(b)
if
With
right
of his belt or
the right side into the opponent (thus protecting the throwers crotch) and land with all the
The
d.
R.D.
Come-alongs.
confined to actual
4443
Figure 123. Drop kick part
1.
hi
356
jPV' 1
IT"
J
S+ M
pull.
Thumb-catch
come-along.
^...
.:,
127.
,:,-
.,
...
.,
Move
arm
also.
(See
fig.
the left
1
i
r-Ti y
(2)
129.)
fig.
Handshake come-along.
Position
facing
opponent.
(a)
(b)
same time
(See
(c)
fig.
131.)
Position
(See
facing opponent.
(a)
1.
4443;
Figure
.,0.
130.)
Reach under
on the inside of
his
R.D.
4443^..
Figure
128.
2.
t.D.
Figure
R.o.
.D.
4443]
129.
4443hhhh^
Figure
130.
1.
4443,.-
R.D.
4443^-,
..
.,
Figure
3.
mam
Handshake come-alongpart
357
131.
..
.:......'
Handshake come-alongpart
...,,
,,,
i.
2.
3.
358
od.
1.
left rear
with
Have your
right
forward.
fig.
(See
Draw
slightly
133.)
and
slip
his left
(See
fig.
134.)
Bear up and
to the left,
2.
(b)
Side of
arm
come-along.
1.
Same
as in
Figure
135.
3.
136.)
'.
NOW
ft.D.
4443 *.'.!#,' ^i
Figure 133. Club come-alongunder arm part
ft JO...
1.
444
Ij
Figure
136.
l.
359
(See
fig.
*4
.R.D.
441Ate&
,.
-alratu
(c)
Crotch come-along.
1.
armpart
2.
At
the
same
R.D.
4443
Figure 138. Club come-along
crotch.
138.)
Section VIII
OPERATION ORDERS
Page
Par.
General
Scope of operation orders
Form of operation orders
Annexes to operation orders
Technique of preparing operation orders.
GENERAL.-Combat orders
9-40
pertaining to operations in
sified as
and
9-40
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
They
field.
360
360
361
361
362
are those
are clas-
letters of instruction.
.a
r,
j
Operation orders.
n
m
.
an operation
A
,!
the
..
r.
field.
An administrative
,
,.
-.
,.
it
voluminous
be embodied in the operations order.
Letters of instruction.
c.
are
spoken
are
notes
issued,
When
orders.
are
oral
made by
the
Dictated orders are recorded verbatim by the receiver and ft complete copy of
the order or noteg ig kept by
gtaff of
commander
issuing:
TTT -,,
-,
,,
..
letter of instruc-
-,
Administrative orders.
o.
both
that
orders
..
An
h Ur
recipients.
operation order is
,,
j
v
the order ot a commander to subordinate
com,
&
.i
3
t
manders to enect the coordinated execution oic
a.
arrangements,
and issue his orders prior to the
&
.1
,
, Al
f.
Set f r the be g mnmg of the action.
0ral and dictated orders are similar in
(2 )
^e.
c
Operation orders
complete or fragmentary.
-
(1)
An
order
is
essential aspects
may be
complete when
and phases
it
either
covers
all
of the operation.
to all sub-
tion deals
with the strategical phases of operations of large units and regulates operations over
mander's plan.
9-41
a.
Purpose.
(2)
Methods of issuance.
may be
oral,
dictated,
(1)
or
Operation orders
in
written form.
tribution.
An
its
its
destina-
Time
com-
in delivery
orders.
They
lays with written instructions thereon.
are concise but not at the expense of clarity or
omission of essential information. Instrucfragmentary orders may be
repeated in a complete operation order or in an
issued
tions
in
a.
ORDERS.
number
hour and
file
of the order,
map(s) used.
The body of the operation order
b. Body.
contains all necessary information and instructions for the accomplishment of the assigned
mission.
The body
Information.
Includes
appropi'iate
Refers
to
issued.
(b)
Friendly
force's.
intelligence
annex when
Missions or operations,
lines of departure,
zones
of
action,
(a)
etc.
Paragraph
Paragraph 3
units.
(x)
may
information.
and
traffic details
operation.
issued, reference
(5)
is
made
to that order.
communication.
employment
means
(a)
Orders for
communication
on use of communication facilities,
restrictions
of
of signal
Command
(b)
munication.
posts
command
post,
march
may be sent.
ending contains the signa-
Ending.
c.
The
if
any, distribution,
ORDERS.
ANNEXES
TO
General.
a.
OPERATION
Annexes
include:
Those accompanying an order for purposes of brevity, clarity, and simplicity, for example, maps and overlays.
(2) Those used to amplify an order when the
volume is too great for inclusion in the order
(1)
itself.
all
units
tained therein.
c.
Form.
(1)
are given.
in
(6) Except as indicated below, all instructions to any unit of the command having a
tactical mission should appear in the subparagraph of paragraph 3 pertaining to that unit.
(c) A final subparagraph of paragraph 3,
always lettered "x" contains instructions appli-
for the
If
Signal
evacuation,
as
in
tactical
be
necessary to assign one subparagraph to each
tactical unit or task force to which instructions
(a, b, c, etc.)
listed
in-
formation covering:
Composition, disposition, loca(a) Enemy.
tion, movements, strength, identification, capabilities.
and
graphs as follows:
(1)
is
date of issue,
361
and instructions
an annex thereto.
(2)
Maps
Maps,
sketches,
charts,
or
overlays.
as annexes:
situation maps,
operation maps,
Annexes
debarkations,
dealing
entraining,
with
embarkations,
entrucking,
march
362
tables,
in
tabular form.
accompany
Orders must be
clear, concise,
for
and
direct.
subordinate units
map
(2)
or overlay
Paragraphs
often used.
is
and
2 of an operation order
and
form of expression
is
In the
When
date
the
When
the hour
is
expressed,
it will
be in
Whenever
points
are preferable
to
the
Should right or
is assumed to be
facing the enemy or facing downstream if used
with reference to a river.
(10)
When
by
immediately
For example,
follow the last digit of the group.
0225Z will indicate 2:25 A. M., Greenwich
Civil Time.
(6) Dates include the day, month, and year,
thus: 6 Aug. 46. In stating a night, both dates
should be included, thus: night 4-5 Aug. 46.
(7) Boundaries limit zones of action or movement and areas of responsibility. These are
coordinates, or
tions in relation to
The
suitable
number
of
limiting
points.
first
or to the enemy,
is
(13)
(a)
own
troops.
Expressions similar
to the
which is not
only meaningless and verbose, but weakens the
force of subsequent orders in which the expression does not appear; "holding attack," "sec-
on the ground.
standings.
by
easily
distinguishable
This sequence
following
designated
Compass
to those concerned.
(4)
terclockwise,
order.
(3)
map
order.
find
served as follows:
with
on the
(9)
(8) Geographical names are written or printed in capital letters. This minimizes the
chance of error and makes the places mentioned
stand out prominently in the order. The
spelling in the order must be the same as that
it.
(1)
is
terrain
given, in the
(b)
combat orders
be avoided
if
is
(6)
363
hill
tion map.)
secondary.
Mahout Group
00990-46
In the Field
5.
SECRET
Example of
b.
(x)
Bn
(6)
Pyrotechnic Code:
Star Cluster Objective taken.
Green Star Cluster Mark front line.
Normal radio traffic will be maintained.
Special
Map,
Mahout,
Topographical
Engineer
1st
Battalion
(c)
Command
Scale
(a)
660.
One enemy
infantry
company defends
will
3 October, 1946.
2.
Battalion attacks, 1100, 3 October, cap660, envelops hostile left (east) flank,
hill
all
By order
Distribution:
Company E seize
Company F in capture of
(a)
hill
212,
assist
OFFICIAL
C
660.
(See
Lieutenant,
S-3
operation map.)
795287'
hill
-24
Commander A
Company E
Company F
Company G
Headquarters
Company
10
Journal
(See operation
map.)
of
Lieutenant Commander,
Executive Officer.
Annex A: Operation Map.
3.
junc-
POLYNESIAN CREEK.
E and F, abreast, Company F on the
UPSET CREEK.
trail
right.
companies:
established.
Companies
Posts: Battalion
(d)
ture
when
(b)
tion (48.20-66.05).
1:10,000.
hill
(a)
Red
Map:
east
USN
USN
Section IX
GENERAL.
Par.
Page
9-45
9-46
9-47
9-48
9-49
364
364
364
364
364
Supply and evacuA commander may delegate certain functions but the
responsibility of proper supply and evacuation
The commander is
is that of the commander.
also responsible for the supply and evacuation
9-45
ation
is
command
a.
responsibility.
of attached units.
b.
The impetus
commander's
of supply
point of consumption.
responsibility to
make known
his
by purchases or
of transportation
may
requisitions
be augmented
from civilian
sources.
TRANSPORTATION.Transporta-
9-48
tion of supplies
can be accomplished by several means depending upon the situation. Evacuation of casualties can be effected in return trips of transportation that brings
a.
By
boat.
up
supplies.
is
easiest
boat.
By
carrying parties.
Carrying parties
be organized to transport supplies and
evacuate casualties when the terrain is such
b.
may
is
when other
Local labor
not available.
transportation.
when
Civilian
obtainable and
may
be used
required
by the
vehicles
when
situation.
d.
Air.
The
transportation of supplies by
ation of casualties
by
air,
however, necessitates
9-49
duties
1,
Organization.
and
10
COMBAT PRINCIPLES
365
Chapter
10
COMBAT PRINCIPLES
Section
I.
General
Par.
Page
10-1
369
370
378
393
401
406
417
420
424
431
434
442
448
10-2
10-8
10-15
10-22
10-29
10-36
10-42
10-50
10-56
10-60
10-65
10-70
10-74
10-77
10-80
367
456
463
464
Section
GENERAL
Par.
10-1
General
Page
369
10-1 GENERAL. The combat principles contained in this chapter are applicable to a
naval landing party or naval emergency ground defense force organized and equipped in accordance
1.
369
Section II
Pi ge
'
t^
u Vof forces
Distribution
of attack
of offensive situations
Plan of attack
GENERAL.
10-2
,
,,
.
,
combat
a. Definition.
,,
372
373
373
375
striven
Offensive
/lX
(1)
to accomplish destruction of
Surprise.
d.
jj-j
'
vantages.
,_ N
, 1N
(1)
,,
Ad~
Offensive action allows the comand disadvantages.
Advantages
in
for
.*.-,,
Concealment
of the
,.
-p.
mlo
(o)
;
K
Avoidance
lo impose
7
his wiif
,,
.,
,.
upon the
enemy.
,,
-,
,.,,
oi stereotyped procedures.
Definition.
(1)
Recon-
.
,
n , 1
the directed effort in the nefd to
naissance
nm
Disadvantages. Offensive
A-
'
(c)
/^\
(2)
is
.K
Reconnaissance.
e.
...
/r.\
.,...,.,.
'."
should be
Surprise
(3)
(5)
essential element
operations.
all
(a)
an
Its effects
Screening of dispositions.
Rapidity of meneuver.
(2)
,
is
b.
Surprise
of a successful attack.
means at nana
the enemy armed
is
,7,
371
o
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
r r
Forms
Types
is
,,
"i
Enemy
< 3)
locatlon
hls
tl0n
information. -This
dispositions,
>
may
include
strength, orgamza-
'
ment sn
'
(4)
?>
and morale
battle positions,
(6)
body of troops.
Dominating terrain.
(c)
(d)
These include
of information.
(5)
actual observation of terrain or physical objects,
(a)
(3)
cover, concealment,
the objective
must
satisfy:
mission,
(6)
enemy
of
effort.
(7)
It
(e)
Its
must be
easily identified.
capture should
is
a re-
sible
aU
facilitate
that
their
fully
reconnaissance missions.
/.
Reserves. The naval landing party battalion holds out a reserve. The corresponding
element held out by a company or platoon is
.
contem-
All subordinate
promptly and
rity
(d)
Responsibility. Reconnaissance
of the
(c)
areas.
ground and air reconnaissance, and the examination and identification of inhabitants, prisoners, spies, documents, and air photographs.
Its capture
(6)
tion
and bivouac
Sources
The
initial
sions,
decision.
(3)
and
Initially
until
committed
to action
by
fire
of its
supporting weapons.
(4) During the attack a reserve may be
assigned missions to:
(a) Exploit a success of the attacking
echelon.
(b) Exploit any hostile weakness developed
by the attacking echelon.
(c) Protect a flank exposed by the advance
371
h.
(1)
commander.
Frontages.
(a)
The
lateral
distribution
of
troops
in
is
When
of the terrain.
maneu-
vers
in depth.
10-3
DISTRIBUTION OF FORCES.It
is
is
echelon
when
it
(/)
Meet
hostile counterattacks.
Certain
missions
weak
reserve.
strong reserves.
When
When
ment.
calls
for
flanks.
reserves
may
When
by envelopment
the situation
is
of the
clear,
is
Main
a.
advance or
such as
Main
render
to
possible force,
maximum
attack.
ted, or exhausted.
(5)
maximum
the
attacks.
and a secondary
assistance
(1)
Main
to
the main
Secondary
b.
attacks.
Secondary attacks
(1)
action.
Initially,
limited
objectives
will
be
enemy
him to commit
and at an indecisive
location, and to prevent him from reinforcing
the front of the main attack.
c. Direction oj the main attack.
(1) Terrain
the
in position, to force
372
employment
of
available supporting
arms
attack
is
influenced also
movement
before
is
attack.
(2)
for
main
main
the
launched.
10-4
tions
(a)
Enemy
(b)
Lack
Condi-
are:
of time to
make an
enveloping
maneuver.
(2)
(a)
basic
penetration.
main
(3)
an objective in
his rear.
(See
fig. 3.)
(4)
positions.
(b)
The
by opera-
flanks
created
forces
It
(6)
Surprise
(c)
ENEMY POSITION
enemy.
It is desirable that the directions of attack
(d)
of the
converge.
(e)
careful
of the enveloping
Figure
1.
An envelopment.
- ENEMY
Figure
2.
A double envelopment.
POSITION
attack.
373
may occupy
and flanks
strength,
of
these
The
posi-
extent,
positions
are
determine.
is
ENEMY
Figure
3.
POSITION
ing action.
A penetration.
defense.
Unit
of the
enemy.
10-5
TIONS.
a.
Meeting engagement.
ing engagement
is
neither of which
is
The
(1)
meet-
possibility of a
tween two
forces,
is
considerably remote,
the cause
Therefore,
of
the
failure
in
decision
the
of
ensuing
the
Employment
battle.
commander
action.
b.
The enemy
means
of reconnaissance to
determine
(2)
and disposition
of the
(3) The commander should give special attention to his supporting fires to insure the
success of his main effort.
10-6
SUCCESSIVE PHASES OF THE
OFFENSIVE. a. Genera*. Offensive combat,
in general, progresses through the following four
phases:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
is
command
374
naissance
is
by the
situation.
to
is
known
(c)
as the development.
it
long-range
(2)
fire.
Approach
march.
following: the
position,
(1)
attack
of fire
(a) The
by the positive action
and maneuver, combined and controlled
characterized
is
(a)
The approach
is
zone of long-range
cisive direction.
fire.
enemy long-range
guns.
fire,
fire
By
taking
full
advantage of cover
(c)
At a designated
first
objective.
fire
either ceases
Assault.-
(a)
in
to
The
attack.
assault
is
him
combat with
him out in
or drive
LANDING PARTY MANUAL
(c)
time
assault
is
launched.
(2)
375
Pursuit.
by the naval
the enemy is
position and
The object of
is given
landing party commander when
no longer able to maintain his
is
hostile forces.
means
(4)
at their disposal.
Pursuit by fire.-
(a)
at
Units
may
reorganization.
be disorganized, necessitating
Physical pursuit under these
and control
(b)
is
imperative.
by the enemy.
The consolidation phase. This phase includes the following: the immediate defense,
and
isolated
d.
terized
oj plan.
Immediate
all
available information,
decides
for control.
b.
defense.-
on
commander
how
best to
em-
ploy the elements of his unit in order to accomplish his mission promptly and with the fewest
casualties.
His final plan of attack must insure
maximum teamwork between the attacking rifle
elements and between the rifle elements and any
supporting aircraft and/or naval gunfire. It
consists of two main parts, the plan of maneuver
and the plan of supporting fires. In addition, it covers the administrative details of
supply and evacuation, and the establishment
of the signal communication system necessary
Based
the unit
of
Plan oj maneuver.
maneuver
employing
mission.
tives;
is
his
(1) General.
The plan
units
to
accomplish his
and employment
This reorganiza-
position, location,
cealed positions,
Tentative plans for the defense of the objective, when taken, should also
if
possible.
make
a visual
the following:
Continuation
oj the
attack.
When
combat power.
When
the attack
is
con-
is
and the
time of attack.
be made.
(2)
Objectives.
(a)
Suitable
objectives
for
facilitate flanking or
the
of reserves;
them.
the secondary
(b) Suitable objectives for
attack are hostile positions which prevent or
Objectives should
376
1.
2.
when
or
Suit-
the
main attack
directed to outflank
is
scribed
Otherwise,
each.
for
only a single
advance
whole
of the unit as a
dinarily prescribed.
is
or-
is
in yards.
objective).
is,
Secondary attack. Where the zone of acnarrow, the unit making the secondary
attack may be given all of the zone not allocated
to the main attack, in order to permit maneuver
of its elements.
In a wide zone a gap may be
(b)
tion
is
(4)
Direction of attack.
by magnetic
azimuth and, when practicable, by successive
landmarks. When the main attack and seconddesignates the direction of attack
ary attack
initially are
convergent
(for
example,
enemy
in the order
its
and
(c)
(d)
By assignment of a direction
By assignment of a definite
series of objectives to
(7)
rifle
Reserves.
strength
(a)
of attack.
objective or
be captured.
Initially, a portion of the
must be held
by the attack-
to capture
where
The
reserve
it is
observation,
is
flat-trajectory
mechanized attack.
rapidly
to
points
of
possible
fire,
and
air
It should be able to
main
or
move
emplojmient,
attack.
coming under
effective fire
The size
pends upon the
unit.
of
attack.
(b)
sures
Antiaircraft.
The
detailed.
(c)
must
unit
commander
in-
Command
post.
377
( f 0)
Time of attack. The time of attack is the
hour at which the attack is to be launched. If
a line of departure is prescribed, it is the hour
at which the line is to be crossed by the leadingelements of the attack. It is governed by the
time interval required for reconnaissance, preparation of plans, issuing of orders, and movement of troops into position.
Plan of supporting fires. The plan of supporting fires must be designed to support the
plan of maneuver and give maximum assistance
Therefore,
to the advance of the main attack.
the major portion of all available fire support is
directed initially against the targets most likely
to endanger the main attack, whether they are
in its zone of action or in adjacent zones.
The
c.
and
initial
fire
support ships.
Section III
Approach phase
Attack phase
Consolidation phase
Exploitation phase
Support squad
GENERAL. When
10-8
most
it
will
Par.
Page
10- 8
10- 9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
378
378
378
384
390
390
391
go through
all
or
CONTROL.The
the
signals.
Except
in
PHASE.a.
Route
an amphibious
assault,
first
usually
APPROACH
(1)
movement toward
the
enemy
is
in route
march.
or the
of
any
main body.
may
378
march (see
up the approach march, the squad
4) to take
V, or echelon.
are ex-
same column,
actly the
lon
is
10-9
When
fig.
yards.
(c)
The squad on
with
line,
maximum
more
difficult to control
ability,
but
front.
It
fire
teams as
skirmishers or in wedge,
fire
power
to
This formation
it is less
is
fires which
cannot be avoided. The width of a squad
line is normally 60 to 100 yards.
(d) The squad wedge, with fire teams in
wedge or column, is a formation which provides
security to both front and flanks, favors maneuver and control, and also provides flexibility in
meeting new tactical situations.
(e)
The squad
V, with fire
teams in wedge
(/)
is
formation with
fire
teams echeloned
to
379
ENEMY
FIRE FIGHT
Figure
4.
(2)
for-
pre-
march
prescribes
the
thereafter, the
initial
fire
team leaders
team formations;
are responsible for
its
it halts and
Guiding on the base
assigned objective,
-25
ROUTE MARCH
SQUAD
Figure
5.
rifle
**
_m
series of
(i.
e.,
mander.
(4) During the approach march the squad
or fire team must take every advantage of
cover and concealment provided along its
route by folds in the ground, brush, ravines,
reverse
features.
slopes,
380
mander
may
employed
commander.
com-
AREA FOR
REORGANIZATION
Figure
6.
to a predesignated location
the double.
If
the area
is
will
this
cross
to
move
man
are
(a) General.
Scouting fire teams.
When
a rifle platoon in the approach march is not
preceded by friendly troops within view, it
(6)
They
are
fire
The
scouting
fire
7.
(6)
The scouting
fire
team(s)
moves out
platoon.
or skirmishers formation.
The
fire
team leader
who
Figure
being interdicted
is
used.
commander.
The scouting
fire
team
takes
the platoon
terrain
At one
time,
another
it
it
may
Figure
8.
Scouting
fire
of objectives.
smoke.
limited visibility,
of
381
rifle
platoon.
is clear,
the
When
They
382
Figure
9.
5.
tanks, etc.).
enemy
the platoon
team
for information.
this information as
enemy
As soon as
time.
bunkers,
fire
c. Assembly area.
(1) Unless, the squad has
already become engaged with the enemy, it is
usually directed by the platoon commander to
halt briefly in a covered and concealed position
This position is
prior to launching an attack.
383
may
require his
men
to dig foxholes.
(3)
men
and
guards.
known
squad
disperses his
men
platoon commander.
squad leader
Whenever
men
by the
the
take advantage
possible,
fire.
area.
384
Figure
11.
He must
thing.
turn over
the senior
fire
to
of
10-11
which
attack
assists
mission.
most
cases,
ATTACK PHASE.a.
squad
will, in
(1)
in
When
it will,
General.
brief.
Preparations
accomplishing
the squad
be very
is
the
platoon
committed
in the
be assigned an objective
to
If
employ
his
fire
teams in accomplishing
his
mission.
(b) The squad leader must e-ive his attack
order before the squad crosses the line of departure.
The squad leader will give his order
Figure
12.
385
at a vantage point,
may
bat Techniques.)
This point
if possible.
be on the line of departure if the squad is
engaged in a fire light, or may be in rear of the
line of departure if the squad is in the assembly
area.
(c) If the situation permits, the squad leader
assembles the entire squad at the vantage point
and issues the order. In case the squad is in
contact with the enemy, it may be necessary to
issue the order to the fire team leaders individually; otherwise it may be practical to call the
fire team leaders together at the vantage point
and issue the order to them as a group. In
most attack situations, the order will be of
fragmentary nature.
(d)
Whether
(e)
Whenever
(See Ch.
possible
the
9,
Basic
squad
Com-
leader
(a) While
the rifle
(3) Supporting fires.
squads are in assembly areas, while they are
moving up
rifle
386
of fire.
During this phase, the squad adopts
formations that insure the best control and offer
the greatest degree of protection against enemy
fire.
If the ground is open, the squad may deploy fully. If there is a fair amount of cover,
the squad leader may adopt a wedge formation.
If the advance is through thick woods, the squad
may be in column.
(c)
The squad
leader
of casualties.
taking
full
advantage of supporting
fires
and
The
In order to
take advantage of supporting fires, the squad
leader must lead his men as closely as possible
down by friendly supportUnless the squad follows supporting fires closely and closes immediately with
the enemy when the fires have lifted, the surviving enemy will be able to man their weapons
with greater effect against the advancing troops.
b. Advance by fire and maneuver.
(1) The
squad leader should work his fire teams forward
as far as possible without firing.
Fire must be
withheld as long as effective enemy fire is
counteracted 'by friendly supporting fires and
use of covered approaches. When the squad
reaches a point where it can no longer advance
without sustaining excessive casualties, the
behind the
fires laid
ing weapons.
Figure
13.
A squad advancing by
fire
and maneuver.
ing a large
He
the attack.
in
rifle
the automatic
position
and target
He may
and
for
fire
rifle.
be used
fire to
movement of the
new position. Whenever
automatic
to a
rifle
Whenever
surprise
possible, the
fire.
He does
Techniques.)
this
by giving a
(See Ch.
9,
After receiving
fire
Basic
the
order
Combat
fire
order,
fire
causes
casualties
the enemy.
Once
the squad
fire
is
(a)
The element
sary in an advance
by
fire
and maneuver.
Due
to the limited
further
this
means.
The
sible.
fire
cease firing
fire,
when
maneuvering
successfully.
fire
(c)
amount of ammunition, riflemen cannot engage in a fire fight over a long period of time.
Success in the attack depends not only on a
sound plan but also on the speed of execution.
(b) In some situations, the entire squad may
advance as a unit by a series of squad rushes.
This will be possible only if complete fire
superiority is being maintained by numerous
his
advance?
on the
387
also consider:
a.
team
it
moves
fire effectively
to the
new
squad
on
my
fire
position?
in position to
main-
enemy while
388
Figure
C. Is
new
route to the
2.
14.
Upon
by
individual infiltration.
a. If
fire
and maneuver,
move.
The
new
The
distance to the
He
locks
and
loads his
falling point,
mences
position?
fire.
firing.
moving
the
fire
base of
in this
fire
individual
moving forward.
rushes.
(6) Positions
and
duties of leaders.
(a)
In
the
fire
teams.
He usually positions
Squad and
fire
team
They
(e)
and maneuver.
The squad
leader
enemy and
and
therefore, confire
team
posi-
is
commander;
team leader with the squad leader.
(/) In the absence of instructions from the
platoon commander, particularly during the
taining contact with the platoon
the
fire
discipline.
(c)
fire
389
squad leader
may
attack
The
(2)
assault
of the platoon
390
'
When
(3)
enemy
fire, it is
down
to inflict
fire
teams.
boulders,
as
vance
walls,
trees,
toward
rapidly
the
fire,
rapid
rate.
utilize
any
known
by the enemy.
lieved to be occupied
or be-
Riflemen
The
often he will
fire
(5)
In the
is
overrun.
the
assignment of locations
also
assists
greatly
control,
for
fire
He
reallocates
squad personnel,
in
view
team
(b)
(c)
(d)
leaders
if
necessary.
He redistributes ammunition.
He moves casualties to covered positions.
He informs the platoon commander,
by runner, of the situation,
and ammunition supply.
He disarms prisoners and sends them
either personally or
back
to
the
platoon
command
post.
He
post.
10-13
EXPLOITATION PHASE.a.
Con-
commander.
10-12
(a)
the squad
CONSOLIDATION PHASE.a.
mediate defense.
final
position
b. Reorganization.
(1; After establishing an
immediate defense, the squad leader, assisted
by the fire team leaders, reorganizes the squad
in short bursts
at a rapid rate.
enemy
(1)
Im-
That
is
Pursuit.
Upon
orders,
of a
This can be accomplished by means of aggressive, fast-moving combat patrols that follow,
keep contact with, and harass the enemy.
Approach-march formations may be taken up
and the advance is continued to new objectives,
pressing the enemy in such a manner as to
deny him opportunity to reorganize and prepare new defensive positions.
c.
all
Mopping up.
391
(1) If
not to be taken up, the squad may be employed to "mop up" remnants of enemy forces
remaining in the objective area.
is
Figure
16.
traps.
Unit
and security are maintained. Souvenir
hunting and sightseeing are not permitted.
The squad is kept in a constant state of readiness for new combat missions.
against
control
10-14
SUPPORT SQUAD.a.
Before the
informs his
of attack.
Support squad attacking enemy flank while other two squads act as a base of
fire.
">
392
To
(2)
(3)
(4)
by
To
To
To
fire
furnish flank
and rear
To
hostile
adjacent squads
(5) To furnish protection against counterattack during the reorganization of the attacking squads.
(6)
rapidly.
c.
security.
and maneuver.
echelon.
relieve
from an unexpected
direction.
Section IV
Par.
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
General
Control
Approach phase
Attack phase
Consolidation phase
Exploitation phase
Support platoon
10-15
GENERAL.When
393
393
393
394
398
399
399
the platoon as
10-16
or
by
oral orders
(See Ch.
signals.
Combat Techniques.)
company headquarters
9,
Basic
Communication with
is usually by messenger
or visual signals.
10-17
inarch.
first
APPROACH PHASE.a.
Except
in
an amphibious
is
Route
assault, the
usually
movement
march
of the squads.
Approach march.
march
(1)
When
to take
the platoon
up the approach
pany
platoon.
fied
makes
(4)
Movement
to successive objectives.
bat.
toon commander of the base platoon is responsible for the direction and rate of advance.
The
platoon commander makes minor deviations
from his assigned zone of advance to avoid
is
In the
assigned an
initial
mander. If there are key terrain features between the platoon and its objective, the platoon
commander may designate an intermediate
objective (s).
He takes full advantage of cover
and concealment in moving his platoon forward.
In the approach
(5) Zone of reconnaissance.
march, the company commander assigns each
leading rifle platoon a zone of reconnaissance.
This zone may be 300 yards or more in width.
The zone is covered by using scouting fire
teams or patrols. The platoon commander
regulates the movement of scouting fire teams
and patrols so as to insure security of the platoon against hostile fire from points within midrange (400-600 yards).
(6)
(See
par.
10-106.)
In the
(7) Position of platoon commander.
approach march, the platoon commander usually places himself between the leading scouting
fire teams and the remainder of the platoon.
Unless the platoon has
c. Assembly area.
already become engaged with the enemy, it
usually
is
prior to launching an
This position is known as an assembly
area and is designated by the company commander. Here, while the platoon commander
and higher commanders make their recon-
attack.
393
394
<
r- ^ ENEMY
POSITION
Figure
17.
naissance and issue orders, last-minute preparations are made for the attack.
Extra ammunition is passed out, equipment is checked, and
each man's physical fitness is ascertained.
10-18
ATTACK PHASE.a.
Preparations
395
PLATOON OBJECTIVE
INTERMEDIATE
OBJECTIVE,
PLATOON HALTS
TEMPORARILY,
REORGANIZES,
AND CONTINUES
THE ATTACK
II
800 YDS.
LINE OF DEPARTURE
Figure
(6)
When the
18.
Intermediate objective.
commander
50
-26
fears
an
he
inter-
mediate objective(s).
He
designates interven-
ing terrain features on which the platoon temporarily halts for reorganization before continuing
the attack. This enables the platoon commander to regain control of his unit and insures a
396
coordinated attack which
success of the assault.
(2)
is
most
Company commander's
essential to the
of
His reconnaissance
him and
is
company order.
so arranged as to permit
From
ods of attack and formulates a plan by determining how he can use his weapons and men to
the best advantage in order that he may accomplish his assigned mission with the least practicable delay and with the fewest casualties.
(a) Unless the platoon
(4) Methods of attack.
zone of action and the strength of the enemy
immediately in its front are so great that all the
platoon's
fire
power
is
the
(d)
permit,
(5)
and situation
terrain
will
it is
flank of the
on
may
may
When
or
receipt of the
mander
by
(a)
entire attacking
Having decided
commander
issues
his
order
the
at
previously
selected
company
scheme
objectives.
of
He
Platoon
objective.
The
company order
tives.
Supporting fires.
(See par. 10-7c.)
When a machine gun
(7) Attached weapons.section is attached to a rifle platoon, the platoon
(6)
commander employs
the platoon.
(8)
it
Movement
The movement of the platoon from the assembly area across the line of departure should
be conducted so as to preserve secrecy for the
Before arriving at the line of departure
platoon takes up its attack formation.
The squads, however, do not deploy until they
come under enemy small arms fire. Scouts
from the leading squads precede the platoon to
protect its advance.
attack.
the
Figure
19.
eral.
Advance by
(a)
forward.
When
fire
the
spots in the
by maneuvering
enemy flank.
or
When
397
fire
objective
is
progress on
The
(2) Location
of platoon commander.
platoon commander follows his attacking echelon closely.
He goes wherever he can best
observe developments and control the action of
his platoon.
c. Assault.
(1) The primary objective in
advancing the attack by fire and maneuver is
The
assault
may
commander or as a
by the com-
Frequently in
started
resistance.
initiative of a
fire
squad or even
is
of a
on the
few individuals.
(3)
398
,'* '^,
Figure
in order to keep it
under
fire
20.
his defense.
platoon in
Pursuit by
overrun
its
fire.
objective
After
it
Physical
the
company commander.
10-19
mediate defense.'
XL)
left flank.
commander:
(1)
Personnel
are
in order
platoon organization.
casualties,
(2)
Ammunition
(3)
Casualties are
(4)
is
reallocated,
to
maintain
in
view of
the
basic
redistributed.
personally or
by runner,
and ammunition
supply.
(5)
EXPLOITATION PHASE.a.
10-20
One
Con-
of the objects of
reorganization
reconnaissance,
after
giving
orders
for
re-
the platoon
may
squads
his
attack
is
forward.
Continuation
moving
of
the
commander.
b.
Pursuit.
Pursuit
orders of the
is taken up only on
company commander. The ac-
attack
phase.
Formations
are
changed
as
399
fire.
necessary to facilitate control and rapid advance, and to develop maximum fire power
when
the
enemy
resistance
stiffens.
Light
rifle
early phase of
mander usually
support.
(3) To furnish security to the flanks (connecting groups or flank combat patrols)
400
(4)
by
To
fire
(5)
and maneuver.
To
tacking echelon.
(6)
To
relieve
To mop up
echelon,
(7)
by
in
ployment
of the platoon.
Section
Par.
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
General
Missions
Control
Approach phase
Attack phase
Consolidation phase
Exploitation phase
10-22
GENERAL. The
401
401
401
401
402
404
404
toon
is
weapon.
10-23 MISSIONS.The machine gun platoon can effectively accomplish two missions
in an offensive situation:
Close fire support of infantry.
a.
ment
By careful
company
V
IN OFFENSIVE
COMBAT
CONTROL. Decisions
10-24
as
to
the
company
commander, who directs the employment of the
platoon to best promote the company plan of
tactical use of the platoon rest with the
action.
Centralized control.
by leaving
all
sections
commander.
commander
may
be evaluated by analyzing
such as: time available to reconnoiter
and issue orders; observation; ability to contact
platoon; speed and intensity of the action.
b. Attachments.
Conditions justifying centralized control will often not prevail, resulting
in the necessity of attaching (partially decentralized control) a section (s) to a rifle platoon (s).
A section attached to a rifle platoon is subject
to the orders of the rifle platoon commander.
timely decisions
factors,
c.
Conclusion.
Centralized
and a corresponding
fire will
coordination of
Attachments,
however, are justified when an assault platoon
can have machine gun support by no other
means.
b.
hostile
aimed
The assault
crease
in
fires
timely
fire
in-
effects.
APPROACH PHASE.a.
10-25
Route
In route march, the machine gun
platoon marches in the company column as
directed
organization.
rifle
platoons, due to
One
of the principal
means
such counterattacks
fire
power
therefore,
is
is
taken.
of protection against
march.
(2)
sion,
(1)
When
sections,
captured position.
the support.
401
402
the
company column.
Approach march.
b.
fire
(1)
an approach
In
ment
rifle
generally the
is
platoon.
same
(2) In an approach march that is not protected by friendly forces, elements of the machine gun platoon must be kept well forward
in a state of complete readiness for action.
Usually a section of guns should be attached
to each of the leading rifle platoons; the remaining section (s), under company control, is held
in the vicinity of the support rifle platoon.
(3) Approach march formations used by machine gun units should be approximately the
same as those used at the time by the rifle units.
(See Ch. 9, Basic Combat Techniques.)
The employment of the
c. Assembly area.
machine gun platoon depends on the mission
fires available.
2.
is
gun
in furtherance
of
decision
to
platoon.
He must, in addition, arrange for the
necessary details of coordination between machine gun and rifle units; i. e., time of opening
fire,
tion
inadequate
masked.
to
when
determine
the
fire
is
is
tion)
the
Attachments.
of
rifle
the
trolled.
Company
at-
and attachments.
Frequently, the plan for employing the machine gun platoon in support of an attack will
be a combination of company base of fire and
attachments. Such conditions arise, for example, when one assault platoon can and one
cannot be effectively supported from a company
base of fire. In such a situation two machine
gun sections will be employed in a company
base of fire, and the remaining section, for
those targets (hostile grouped personnel, machine guns, antitank guns, and lightly armored
of a
company
pany.
ATTACK PHASE.a.
10-26
(1)
(a)
possible,
Preparations
Methods of supporting
tralized control
(c)
base of fire
company attack
order.
whose destruc-
most
effectively sup-
this reconnaissance
he must:
(a)
each section.
Determine,
(6)
alternate
if
accordance
with the company attack order, for each section.
Select specific target (s),
in
(d)
all
safety limit
is
porting
is
shall be.
applicable, he
be available
ammunition and to
when not
firing.
When
gun
is
to fire.
if
give
signal.
may
be achieved by concealment
in the selection and occupation of firing positions and opening fire with all guns simulta(b)
Surprise
neously.
Surprise machine
gun
fire is
particu-
larly effective.
(4)
Platoon order.
(a)
it
primary
must
and
include:
alternate
2.
Routes to the
3.
4.
5.
Rate
leaders
(a)
practicable, cover
of
of
fire.
it
Whenever
be complete or fragmen-
6.
on the
The targets must be, and
targets assigned.
thf assault troops should be, visible from the
From
Designation
1.
com-
firing positions.
may
Though fragmentary,
tary.
with
Machine gun
mander's order
lateral
(3)
If
(allowance
to
fires
pany commander
limit
fire
(e)
commander
firing position.
(c)
403
open
move
fire
They
most
effec-
Safety
attack,
limits.-
(a)
At some point
fire
in the
will
be
of assault
troops)
(if
firing
(if
mander must
establish this
angle
when
it
is
applicable.
is
404
must be arranged by tbe company commander for supporting machine gun fires to
cease; the signal to be given by the assault
signal
platoons.
fire will
platoon commander should so notify the company commander, who will thereupon order the
platoon to displace. The displacement must be
(2) The machine gun platoon will take advantage of any gaps between assaulting units to
maintain fire on the hostile position. If no
gaps exist, machine gun fire may be shifted to
profitable targets deeper in the hostile position
or on the flanks.
section
should, by
echelon.
and
d.
Pursuit by
fire.
The
employment
of the
its employment
Machine guns may pursue
by
sections will move prior to occupation of subsequent firing positions; he must in addition
make arrangements for a signal on which the
mediate defense.
When the
covering section(s) will displace.
plan of displacement is formulated the platoon
commander issues a displacement order. This
order must include the following elements of
guns of the company are the chief source of protection during this time when the company is
lon.
4.
will displace.
(b) Upon completion of this order, the platoon commander will move forward to meet the
company commander to gain additional infor-
as pre-
for pursuit
selection of positions.
Rate of
(4)
fire
and
fire.
superiority
In
quickly,
the
machine
guns
Ammunition supply.
The
ammunition
fire.
suit practical.
10-27
At
(1)
times,
it is
necessary
and reorganize
before continuing the advance.
The machine
for the attacking echelon to halt
vulnerable
particularly
to
hostile
counter-
attack.
(2)
When
protection of
rifle
from posiby the machine guns prior to reorganization, prompt forward displacement is
Machine guns can most effectively
necessary.
cover a reorganization from positions on or near
the objective, from which interlocking bands of
grazing fire can be placed across the company
front and from which each section has a field of
fire to the front and flanks.
tions occupied
effected
affects
the
for protec-
10-28
fire in
by
EXPLOITATION PHASE.a.
Con-
par. 10-26.
b.
Pursuit.
gun platoon
of a
company ordered
is
generally the
to physically
same
as the
ping
march.
operations,
c.
will
Mopping
not
up.
The
normally
take
part
in
the
mop-
be
up.
405
Kather than aid in mopping up
the machine guns will normally
providing
attack.
protection
against
counter-
Section VI
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
General
Control
Approach phase
Attack phase
Consolidation phase
Exploitation phase
Reserve company
mander
406
406
406
408
414
414
415
company by
by oral or written orders sent by
messengers, or by visual signals.
(See Ch. 9,
mander
direct orders,
COMBAT
IN OFFENSIVE
Route
provision for
security.
Special
attention
is
When
(a)
the
of the
company
battalion
in route
deploys
for
the
march.
The rifle company nor(1) General.
mally moves as an element of the battalion in
route march until the battalion is deployed for
combat. The command group is usually
platoon.
He
406
commander.
In the event of a sudden emergency, when
(6)
the
initiative to
The
(6)
his
own
tives
may
be assigned.
company
(2) Company commander's
is left
proach march.
talion
to the
(a)
march, the chief duties of the company comconsist of coordinating the advance of
his units.
He must, in all cases, provide for
the security of his company and be constantly
mander
ever,
be
evaluating the terrain and estimating the situation, changing his formation if he deems it
split
(6)
talion
by
commander.
either a
rarely
(c)
map
by
The company commander
a visual reconnaissance.
is
responsible
company from
company.
and duties
(3) Position
of company
During
commander
the approach
o
o
o
o
407
o
SCOUTS
SCOUTS
ft
2A
IA
o
PATROL
o
o
PATROL
|^>*
*\
|^2j>J
MG'S
Figure
22.
ALTERNATE LOCATION
FOR MACHINE GUN PLATOON
^X^j
408
ENEMY
SCOUTS
ISI
(d)
PATROL
PATROL
o
A[^]
o
o
* *
MG.A
3A|^
ISI
(e)
o
.
(J)
(g)
CO.
trees.
guards.
ZONE OF ACTION
(i)
in approach march.
The checking
and equipment
decreased until adjacent units are visible. If
the woods are dense, connecting groups must be
but promptly
any erroneous formations taken by
corrects
company in
Connecting
company
files
(a) Contact.
contact.
a
column of platoons
(with at least 50 yards between platoons) facilitates control and enables the entire company to
use the route which provides maximum concealment and protection. If attack from one or both
flanks is possible, the rifle platoon (s) should be
echeloned toward the exposed flanks.
(6)
Formations.
hostile attack
c.
from a
Assembly area.
flank, a
(1)
Unless the
company
it
The
if
by
his im-
time permits.
men
are given
all
possible rest.
10-32
jor the
ATTACK PHASE.a.
Preparations
An
them.
(5)
(j)
of each individual
mediate superior,
all
attack.-
(1)
company
march.
the
to attack.
Hav-
leaders.
(6)
(c)
409
CONNECTING FILE
MG.C.
Figure
24.
maintained by connecting
Plan reconnaissance.
(e)
Make
(/)
Orient subordinates.
(g)
Issue order.
(h)
localities,
enemy's infantry which could otherwise effectively fire on individuals or elements that are
moving.
The
is
to
held by the
enemy.
delivered
by part
of the
file.
reconnaissance.
capture a locality, or
[><C
(d)
company,
especially
(b)
During
commander
company
possible location of
He
and
troops.
410
-**&
Figure
commander has
which
to choose:
(a)
25.
ENEMY
This formation
is
most
frequently used.
(6) A formation with one platoon in the
attacking echelon and two in support is frequently used when the company has a very
narrow zone of action, when it is operating on
a|^1
MG
2A
H><H
PLATOON SUPPORTS
ATTACK FROM POSITION
0N HIGH GROUND-
for
SUPPORT
flank, or
when
the
enemy
situation
obscure.
flanks.
is
CO.
an exposed
exceptional;
411
ENEMY
&
MCA
Scheme
company
>
"IS]
be
uniform.
Therefore,
CO.
Figuke 28.Platoon
795287 50
27
for
of a
an attack on a narrow
(a)
An
interior
front.
flanks
the
company com-
on
advancing a portion of his attacking echelon
through that part of the company zone which
ZONE OF ACTION
maneuver.
be assigned a zone of
action from 200 to 500 yards in width.
The
cover and concealment in its zone will seldom
|X|
of
will ordinarily
and
rear,
412
the
offers
which
Any
the
cover and
best
strikes the
enemy
concealment and
position at a
weak
spot.
actual
or
likely
hostile
dispositions
by
rifle
direction of attack,
and a
portant
within
terrain
feature
or
hostile
position
company objective is
The company commander may order
before
terrain,
the
reached
the platoons to take their initial objectives and
be prepared to continue the attack, or he may
direct the platoons to continue the attack after
the capture of the initial objective until the
company objective has been seized.
At the start of the attack the
(8) Support.
company commander should hold out a support for later use in accomplishing one or more
.
of the following:
(a) To envelop points
up the attacking echelon.
(b)
To
reinforce
of resistance holding
by
(c)
To
fire
(d)
and maneuver.
To
furnish
protection
to
flanks
and
attacking echelon.
(e)
To
echelon.
(/) To mop up a position overrun or bypassed by the attacking echelon.
(See Sec.
(9) Use oj machine-gun platoon.
V.)
(10) Security.
commanders,
may
be taken by higher
commander
company
the
is
flanks
The company
(11) Company attack order.
commander issues orders for the attack to his
platoon commanders and the second-in-command. In addition, when conditions permit,
the chief petty
officer,
1 2)
rifle
The command
company should not
post of an attacking
concealment from
Movement
to
line
fire,
and,
if
air observation.
of
departure.
The
movement
and observers.
b. Advance by fire and maneuver.
(1) The
approach march formation is maintained by the
leading platoons until they come under the fire
Ordinarily, fire is opened
of enemy small arms.
on order of the platoon commanders; the
fire.
by
surprise.
At the
opening
first
reserve to himself
fire in
firing
order to gain
position,
each
Support weapons
on
hostile
by
delivering
fire
of advancing elements
The movement
covered by the
is
fire
maneuvered
are
Every
fire
lull
in
of terrain
(c)
{d)
all,
zone of action.
situa-
He must
company
be easily accessible
communicate with
to readily
times.
all
(6)
the
company
Coordination.
Throughout
company commander
the
attack
movements
his
seeks to re-
Employment of support.
is
committed.
adjacent
units.
(a)
The
such assistance
will
facilitate
its
When
directed to do so
by the battalion
of
3. When, without orders, the company commander estimates that such assistance will
facilitate the
The support
mission.
(6)
commander
of that unit.
Assistance
effective
means
company's own
Assistance
usually
own
further progress.
Assault.
(1) When the attacking echelon
has progressed as close to the hostile position as
c.
(a)
to
When
2.
posts himself
commander.
(c)
the
own advance.
tion.
(5)
follow
to
1.
(6)
If
attacking echelon by
bounds, the company commander must insure
that it remains in supporting distance but does
not merge with the attacking echelon.
(6) The support should normally be used
only after the attacking platoons have committed their support. The support should not
be used piecemeal. It is used to strike a decisive blow or to renew the impetus of a stalled
In either case, it should be employed,
attack.
preferably for flank attack or envelopment,
where the attack has progressed against enemy
weakness rather than against his strong resistIt can be employed in an adjacent zone
ance.
only when such employment does not interfere
with the action of the unit in that zone and
when the adjacent unit commander is fully in-
rected
adjacent units.
(a)
close
to permit
counterattack.
must be
413
414
can get without masking
supporting fires,
If
is launched.
necessary, the company commander causes the
lifting of supporting fires hy giving a prearranged
signal or estimates when the attacking units will
be ready to assault and arranges for these fires
to lift at that time.
When supporting fires
it
these
fires lift
its
captured.
is
is
responsible
by subordinate
is
launched
company
or command,
and noncom-
commander
orders it by a signal
repeated by all officers
missioned officers.
(3) Following a successful assault, the company commander moves his support platoon
and machine-gun platoon forward to secure
advantageous positions from which to support
continuation of the attack, and, if necessary,
to protect reorganization.
After the objective has
d. Pursuit by fire.
been taken, troops immediately take up firing
positions and fire on any of the enemy that
may be withdrawing. Physical pursuit is not
which
is
commenced
ordered
until
by the
battalion
commander.
10-33
mediate defense.
Reorganization.
plete reorganization
to protect reorganization.
is
(1) If it is possible,
com-
final
objective of the
tion
whenever
prevents
disorganization
permits, the
rifle
platoons
positions to reorganize.
its
If hostile fire
move
to defiladed
Security elements
are
tion.
of the
his
direction.
When
is
units
partial reorganization
is
made.
must
If the
oners
are
sent
collecting points.
10-34
tinuation
company
(3)
front.
If the
company support
is still
ordered,
intact at
may
effect a
passage of lines and take the mission of the
assault echelon in the pursuit.
is
it
Mopping
c.
forces that
task.
RESERVE COMPANY.a.
10-35
ment to
initial
The
company as
position.
(1)
Move-
made only
Battalion commander.
the
position
reserve
initial
and
the
company commander
the
thereto,
routes
issues
his
order.
ing points:
(a)
and friendly
troops.
(6)
The
(c)
Instruction for
structions.
new
movement
missions:
company commander
company to the initial
reserve position, arranging the movement so as
not to interfere with other units moving to
In moving to and while
their attack positions.
occupying the reserve positions, the company
the
all
disclose
To
by the attacking
(c)
to
(e)
as not
position.
takes advantage of
cannot effectively
should
b.
(d)
If practicable,
He
it
panies.
groups.
so
to the battalion
to initial re-
(4)
the company commander of the reserve company considers likely avenues of advance from
(a)
battalion
is
battalion
The
415
The company
as to facilitate
Local security
is
posted
is
To repel counterattacks.
To assist the progress of adjacent
To take over the role of all or part
units.
of the
of
the
commander must
left
and
right
dis-
bound-
The
groups make their reports as to the whereabouts of the adjacent units directly to the
All personnel should
battalion command post.
be informed of the location of the initial and
probable future locations of the battalion
command
post.
By
panies.
(4)
By
mander or
at the battalion
command
post, or
company
company
is
in the attack.
Section VII
Par.
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-40
10-41
General
Control
Approach phase
Attack phase
Consolidation phase
Exploitation phase
417
417
417
417
419
419
9,
the
PHASE.a.
Route
enemy
march, in general,
in route
to that of the
company.
is
similar
Approach march.
tially
front.
battalion
is
by
distant hos-
fires.
The
commander ordinarily initiates the
approach march upon receipt of orders from
higher authority when the battalion is acting
However, when
as part of a larger force.
tile
fires
or
the
threat
of
such
battalion
commander promptly
development
of his battalion.
initiates the
battalion
is
usually
given a zone of
(2) The
advance by higher authority. The companies
range
fire,
the battalion
are assigned
march
The
battalion
commander
is
responsible
Assembly area.
When
tical situation
COMBAT
commander
for
prepared
and
issued,
10-39
for
ATTACK PHASE.a.
attack.
Preparations
the attack.-
(1)
Techniques.)
APPROACH
10-38.
march.
Combat
Basic
IN OFFENSIVE
attacking
assault
echelon,
companies,
is
418
the
attack,
attack
assigned
a
attacks this objective with
is
terrain
all
objective
and
the means at
its
may
be given the
mission of supporting the main attack by fire
alone.
In attack orders, the battalion commander does not distinguish between nor use
the terms "main attack" and "secondary
disposal.
attack."
Exceptionally,
it
The two
(2) Forms
of attack maneuver.
forms of attack maneuver are envelopment and
in the attack.
penetration.
what
is
essentially
it
frontal
When
makes
assault
which
the
usually
The penetration
effect-
secures
419
commander quickly
of hostile elements
is
still resisting.
Plan
of two main parts: the plan of maneuver and
of attack.
(3)
Formation. Most frequently the battalcommander will place one rifle company
the main attack, one in the secondary
(4)
in
attack,
and one
narrow, one
reserve.
in
the zone
If
company may be
rifle
and maneuver.
fire
(1)
The
are the
same
as for the
rifle
company.
(See
Sec. VI.)
(2)
Security.
c.
the battalion
higher
is
issued,
At
reconnaissance
If
commander
is
commander
tion
won
10-41
is
assigned the
Advance by
main and secondary attack with two companies in reserve. Rarely, will all three comb.
essential.
is
the battalion
to be achieved.
ion
speed
this time,
up
Company commanders
approach march.
allowed
maximum
commander's
initiative.
orders,
The
are
battalion
When
is
intact at
by the
by a
new
reserve
then constituted.
is
During the
pursuit,
making a
stand.
even at night.
mediate defense.
its
final
objective,
patrols forward.
is
the battalion
commander
Contact
maintained by pushing small
An immediate defense insures
Upon
by the enemy
(See Sec.
XIV.)
Reorganization.
(3)
Mopping
advance
remnants of enemy are
by-passed and isolated. These enemy elements
Units from the
are sought out and destroyed.
c.
up.
reserve
company
Section VIII
10-42
10-43
10-44
10-45
10-46
10-47
10-48
10-49
Purpose
Advantages and disadvantages
Defensive tactics
Types
Types
of defense
of positions
Selection of positions
Page
420
420
420
420
421
422
422
423
10-42
To
b.
To economize
forces
point.
on one front
to
fensive tactics
10-43
a.
Advantages.
usually
mum
power
of his
wea-
(4)
favorable
main
main
and the
and
to counterattack,
10-45
The
time
TYPES OF DEFENSE.-^.
defense
available
General.
according to the
for reconnaissance, planning,
is
classified
The
accordingly,
may
(hasty)
fortified posi-
tion (deliberate).
(3)
pons.
of
the organization of a
is
(1)
TAGES.
battle position
all
it is
"deliberate" are
difficult to indicate
The
both types
field fortifications.
disadvantages of the
defense often counterbalance the advantages.
(1) The defender loses the initiative, and the
attacker conversely gains the initiative and
can decide when, where, and how the attack
will be launched.
(2) As a result of the loss of initiative, the
(5)
Disadvantages.
420
will
The
or
the
enemy
is
enemy
imminent.
The
first
defense
is
is
the defense
is
ized
on the objec-
Deliberate defense.
(1)
battle position
permitting an
adequate organization of the ground appropriate
to the assigned mission, usually while out of
contact with the enemy, is classified as a
There is reasonable assurdeliberate defense.
ance that the defender will have a definite
period of time in which to select and organize
his defensive position.
This allows time for
an adequate reconnaissance of the position
to be defended, coordination of the fire of all
weapons, and the organization of the ground
under
conditions
TYPES OF POSITIONS.a.
The imestablished by a
reconnaissance.
established
no time
may
form of hasty
after taking
in contact
It
10-46
(1)
defense.
consist of a
tions
mediate defense
enemy attack.
(3) The deliberate defense may
local security,
Immediate
421
according
classified
Primary
(firing)
position
is
Posi-
mission.
the
to
weapon
as the best
most im-
(2)
position
(firing)
is
the firing
weapon
for firing
Supplementary
(3)
firing
position is the
a unit or weapon for
(firing)
Positions
with
classified
regard
to
the
Forward slope. Defensive positions located on the forward slope (toward the
enemy) of elevations usually, but not always,
possess the best observation and fields of fire.
Forward slope positions are located either on
the military crest of the elevation or on the
low ground forward of the elevation, depending
on the fields of fire available.
ground.
(2)
(1)
Reverse
slope.
(a)
Defensive
positions
is
the
tion located on the forward slope of the elevation immediately behind a reverse slope.
positions
The
are
(See Sec.
: :
422
SELECTION OF POSITIONS.
reaching
10-47
a.
Terrain
mander
factors.
(1)
terrain with
selects
Observation.
(a)
(b)
Fields of
(c)
(d)
fire.
emy's advance.
Good
(e)
routes
of
communication and
supply.
The most
(2)
Limitations.
The
fire.
position chosen,
how-
must:
ever,
mission.
Conform
(2)
of both friendly
and activity
to the dispositions
and enemy
Be appropriate
(3)
forces.
in size to the
number
of
10-48
FENSE.
General.
After
b.
defense
his
Tactical
organization.-
principles of depth,
and
defense
the
(1)
is
The
tactical
main
The main
security.
battle
position
the
tions of the
main
main
battle position
is
called the
(MLR).
Only portions
resistance are occupied by
line of resistance
main line of
troops and weapons, but the enemy
of the
The
enemy; pre-
is
c.
Organization
prevented
of fire.
is
ordinate
(3)
organizes
security.
The
(2)
or-
tactically,
commander
fire of his
Local security sent out from the comon the main line of resistance and
located within 400 yards of that line.
(b) A combat outpost located from 400 to
2,000 yards forward of the main line of resistance and manned by troops from the reserve
company. (See Ch. 8, Marches, Security on
panies
(c)
ganizes
(1)
it.
Reserve units organize defensive positions in depth behind the main battle position,
from which they can limit penetrations of the
main line of resistance. Reserve units may
also be held mobile in covered, concealed
assembly areas ready to counterattack or to
occupy prepared positions.
(5) Covering forces and security for the
(4)
coordination,
of
The
(1)
organiza-
and
mutual
support.
(2)
Weapons
assigned
so
as
fire missions
accomplish the following
missions
(a) Fires are planned to support the withdrawal of the covering forces.
(b)
Weapons
are
assigned
the
mission
of
(c)
The
planned to
main
line of resistance so as to
of
the
line
of
resistance.
These prearranged
423
are covered
by observation and
daylight hours.
fires.
fire
only during
ance.
(e) Fires are planned to support the counterattack in case of enemy penetration of the main
adjacent units.
10-49
CONDUCT
battle position.
a.
(d)
main
line of resist-
OF THE DEFENSE.-
position
creased
is:
e.
Unlimited
visibility.
In daylight, key
ter-
rain features such as hills and woods are occupied by defending troops and weapons, while
the open ground between the key terrain features is covered by observation and fire only.
At night,
(1) Darkness.
/. Limited visibility.
surprise.
nated
fires of
the defense.
If the
enemy
suc-
fires,
forced to withdraw
the
main
The
by
fire,
battle position
or be thrown out of
by a counterattack.
attacking.
Section IX
Fortification technique
Entrenchments
Emplacements
Obstacles
Camouflage
10-50
424
424
425
427
429
430
Definition.
(1)
Field
fortifications
are
Hasty
Classes.
(a)
Hasty
field fortifications.
those constructed
fire,
foxholes
personnel,
flage.
(b)
Deliberate
from hasty
fortifications.
They
(2)
cipline
all
include delib-
mand
months
up
disguises set
ment and
personnel.
FORTIFICATION TECHNIQUE.
10-51
a.
emplacement.
principles
Do
(1)
must be observed:
not disclose position by excessive or
careless clearing.
(2)
clearing near
main
matic weapons.
Remove
(6)
(7)
as buildings
enemy
Drag away cut brush
will
disclose
Camouflage
Camouflage.
(1) Definition.
is the disguising of a place, thing, or person to
mislead or deceive the enemy.
b.
424
where
it
(9)
the position.
Before clearing
fields of fire
how much
manual.
protection.
to points
this
never
field of
fire.
estimate as to
Delib-
It is
or years and include such permanent installaerate fortifications are not discussed further in
and work
line of resistance
sonnel mine
en-
trenchments, emplacements, and obstacles constructed in the field to increase the natural
defensive strength of the terrain.
(2)
Page
Par.
10-50
10-51
10-52
10-53
10-54
10-55
General
b.
Camouflage.
c.
Drainage.
See
Lack
make
a careful
paragraph 10-55.
of
lines are
when
avoided,
face
425
locating the fortifications.
Sur-
deflecting
it
ORIGINAL
TERRAIN
ENTRENCHMENTS.a.
10-52
General.
to cover a selected
area with
in
hereinafter described.
positions.
CLEARING
fields of fire.
b. Foxholes.
Foxholes are en(1) General.
trenchments normally dug for individual protection when contact with the enemy is imminent or in progress. They provide protection
against small arms fire, artillery shell fragments
CLEARING,
ENEMY WILL
DEBRIS
AVOID.
426
(2)
size
following
1.
minimum
target to
enemy
It
may
against
fire.
consists
type,
2.
4.
It
is
It is at least 4 feet
able to
fire.
the
foxholes.
it
foxhole
essentially of
Since
offers
bombing, and
c.
soil
(3)
Trenches.
it is
less
shelling.
observation posts,
command
dug between
posts,
emplace-
crushing
action
of
tanks,
provided the
below the
feet
^i
ivOmmiJ^
ii
V..
427
Observation posts.
10-53
EMPLACEMENTS.a.
An emplacement
SPOIL BEING REMOVED
CORRECTLY
is
General.
Emplacements
M1919A4(1)
the
machine
for
gun,
Horseshoe type. (a) The gun
is
action.
The emplacement
is
completed by dig-
CORRECTLY
spoil.
gun platform.
The
PARAPET
GROUND
LINE
4 to 5 FEET
DEPENDING ON
HEIGHT OF MAN
795287 50-
spoil is
around the emplacement to form a parapet at least 3 feet thick and low enough to
permit all-around fire.
piled
foxhole.
428
*
Figure 36. Two-man
(c)
This
against small-arms
ments.
BERM ABOUT
sides.
(2)
Two-foxhole
gun
position.
scratched
type.
This
consists of
on
direction of
To
close to the
lay
the
fire.
emplacement
On
it
mark
is
PLAN
Figure
37.-
M1919A4.
429
advantage
and emplacements
full
force
1.
may
use are:
Abatis.
4.
Barbed
when
wire,
a. Protective
wire.
Four
strand
fence
or
FOXHOLES
ONE-MAN TYPE
b.
10-54
stacle
is
for the
machine gun,
OBSTACLES.a. GeneralAn
any barrier that stops or slows
ob-
down
an enemy advance.
Types.
b.
Obstacles
general types:
(1)
are
Natural obstacles.
mountains,
deserts,
rivers, lakes,
swamps,
Tactical wire.
Natural obstacles
cliffs,
canals, etc.
thick
forests,
In selecting
fence, four
Reinforcement for
abatis.
Barbed
wire
explosive charges,
(a)
Double-apron
soldier.
430
ENEMY
>>
GUN
^ MACHINE
EMPLACEMENT
(vU
SUPPLEMENTARY
.
L~
FOXHOLES
COMMUNICATION
'
TRENCHES
PROTECTIVE
nSAXSO.
WIRE
TACTICAL WIRE
x x x x
ANTI- PERSONAL
OBSTACLES
Figure
c.
Protection of obstacles.
39.
However,
when covered by
defensive
fire.
rivers, cliffs,
swamps,
etc.,
if
screening.
(2)
Blending.
Making
tinguishable from
its
an
object
indis-
surroundings by breaking
its
ouflage material.
(2)
Good camouflage
discipline.
rials are of
two
classes:
Natural materials. Natural materials include vegetation and debris natural to shell-torn
(1)
up
importance, are:
Proper
choice
of position to take advan(1)
tage of natural concealment and natural cam-
listed in order of
materials.
Artificial materials
Camou-
It has
It conceals the
of the
object camouflaged.
(3)
sonnel.
Section
Conduct
IN DEFENSIVE
Page
Par.
10-56
10-57
10-58
10-59
General
431
431
431
432
10-58
GENERAL. a. The
squad defends as part of the rifle platoon or as an independent unit and usually acts as an outpost.
In both situations, the squad organizes and
10-56
conducts
manner.
b.
its
defense
in
rifle
the same
basically
Squad
When
commander
(1)
assigns the
of fire to the
fire of
etc.
assigns a sector
adjacent squads.
10-57
FENSE.
reconnais-
organization.
Tactical
(1)
The
formation of the squad is three fire teams generally abreast but with the squad flanks drawn
and
rifle
COMBAT
for each
automatic
greatest natural
rifle
defensive
fire
team
fire
fire
at
the
teams to carry
mission.
The squad
(2)
The squad
commander.
(6) Assigning one man to observe the enemy
from the squad position during daylight in
open terrain.
(c) Ordering one man in each fire team to
observe and listen for the enemy during darkness and in heavy woods (day and night)
(d) Kelieving men on security watches at
intervals of two hours or less.
(3) The squad leader's position (foxhole),
when
defense.
b. Contacts adjacent squad leaders to coordinate his fire with theirs, and contacts the
squad leaders of any machine guns located in
or near the rifle squad position to determine
their fire missions and the measures necessary
to protect the machine guns.
c. Issues his order to his squad, or to his
fire-team leaders only, if circumstances so
require; first orienting his men by pointing out
the expected direction of enemy attack, the
location of adjacent squads, the location of any
enemy
(4)
is
Squad
fire
plan.
(1)
The squad
leader
teams
in
432
of the
squad
is
covered by
The
fire.
fire-team
fire
team, including
themselves.
his
squads.
He
of adjacent
and/or autoacross the front of adjacent
assigns
some
fire
rifles
men
positions
are
allows.
a.
The squad
(2)
of
alternate
fire,
Supplementary and
to clear fields of
Figure
40.
Squad
in defense of the
main
commence
fire is
surprise fire
is
given.
Thus,
realized.
position occupied.
squad
This
move
is
433
by envelopment
threat.
ordered by the
leader.
accompany
who accompany
If there
is
by antitank grenadiers.
If the enemy reaches the area covered by
fires,
riflemen
fire to
Figure
41.
if
adjacent squad
is
overrun.
Section
GENERAL.a.
10-60
area.
The
(1)
battalion
The forward
rifle
434
434
436
439
439
Platoon
defense
commander
assigns
rifle
companies.
company commander
in turn
Frontages.
The
maximum
frontage as-
platoon on the main line of resistance in open terrain with good fields of fire
In wooded or brush covered
is 500 yards.
with
poor
fields of fire the maximum
terrain
frontage assigned a forward rifle platoon should
not exceed 250 yards. The frontage physically
occupied by a rifle platoon will not usually
exceed 300 yards. Area will normally include
signed a
rifle
The
Depth.
fense area
may
rifle
c.
commander.
The
(1)
By
the
company
company commander
will
by
These positions
the forward
434
rifle
platoons.
COMBAT
a portion of the main line of resistance which has been designated by battalion.
For instance, the company commander might
order the forward platoon commander to occupy
the forward slope of a hill within the platoon
defense area and across which runs the main
line of resistance.
By
(2)
the platoon
commander
commander.
The platoon
be occupied
As the position has been outlined by the company commander, the platoon
commander is left only a limited choice of squad
positions.
For instance, if the company commander indicated a position on the forward
slope of a certain hill, the platoon commander
by
his squads.
commander
main
The enemy
forces,
line of resistance.
of the terrain
have been
considered by the battalion and company commanders in assigning the platoon its defense
However, the
pla-
five terrain
mission.
10-61
eral.
Sec. VIII.)
(See
commander
IN DEFENSIVE
will include
10-60
10-61
10-62
10-63
10-64
General
XI
point.
Troop leading
After
steps.
receiving
(1)
the
the other
Select a vantage
company
order,
435
ENEMY
MG
SECTION
MAXIMUM WIDTH
IN WOODS
IN OPEN
-250 YDS.
500 YDS.
H
O
1-
<
300 YDS.
USUAL DEPTH
150
Q.
Figure
42.
Forward
rifle
line of resistance.
his
reconnaissance.
of the
main
and
situation
will
walk
and
position
point of view.
enemy
line of resistance
the platoon
point and to
the
If
its
He
436
decides
upon the
fire
plan,
missions, etc.
After
completing his reconnaissance, the platoon commander returns to his vantage point and orients
his squad leaders. The platoon guide may be
left at the vantage point to orient the squad
leaders or may accompany the platoon commander on his reconnaissance. In any event,
the squad leaders are shown the expected direc(5)
Orient subordinate
leaders.
10-62
FENSE.
Tactical
a.
tribution of squads.
organization.
The formation
(1)
Dis-
of the pla-
Supplementary positions.
In
order
to
position,
location of adjacent
locations
area from a
tion of
enemy
The
platoon
commander is now ready to issue his defense
order. The order should be as complete as is
practical. The more his men know of the situation the better the platoon's chances of success.
(See Ch. 9, Basic Combat Techniques.)
(6)
Issue
the
defense
order.
must
fire.
He
erly prepared,
platoon
main
line
resistance
much
observe as
position
command
of
and
as possible
of his
platoon
main
desirable.
Often,
when
the platoon
commander
mentary command
(6)
post.
In addition to the
platoon
commander
command
will select,
if
post, the
necessary, a
437
DISTRIBUTION OF SQUADS
MLR
MLR
r^
SUPPLEMENTARY
POSITIONS
I.
MLR
PLATOON COMMAND
POST
Figure
43.
438
evacuated.
(4) Security.
company
the
commander
will
Normally,
direct
that
plan for his platoon. He is primarily concerned with covering by fire the entire area in
his platoon's sector immediately forward of the
main
line of resistance.
ping sectors of
commander
assures
The
By
fire to his
assigning overlap-
that
this
coverage
is
obtained.
no company security
commander must
establish one or more outguards of his own,
At any
usually, of fire-team strength or less.
interval,
platoon's flanks
and the
main
is
line of resistance.
provided,
the
If
platoon
fire.
flank squads'
if
sectors
of
fire
flanks of adjacent
units.
(2)
Mutual support.
In addition to covering
fire
should,
if
possible,
w^
AUTOMATIC RIFLE
LIGHT MACHINE GUN
SECTION
SQUAD POSITION
8 SECTOR OF FIRE
fire
plan.
by
fire,
those
enemy
preferably automatic
fire,
particularly
grazing
fire of
machine guns.
lines,
is
in
rifle
by company.
d.
The
clearing fields of
constructing protective
fire,
wire around the platoon position, and camouflaging the entire position.
may
combat.
Close
c.
of approach
Ditches, gulleys,
439
-If
enemy
the
succeeds
at
grenades.
all costs.
enemy
-Due
fire falling
to
on the
However,
if
the
enemy penetrates
the
the platoon
etc.
Initial
contact.
OF THE DEFENSE.
The
first
direct
contact
10-64 SUPPORT
PLATOON.a. GenUsually the company commander places
two rifle platoons on the main line of resistance
and the third rifle platoon in depth behind the
main line of resistance. This platoon located
in depth is called the support platoon of the
commander
company.
when
the attacking
yards of
normally have received warning of the enemy's
approach from the outpost positions and is
notifies the
The platoon
company commander of
eral.
b.
Selection of positions.
toon position
selected
fires,
the
fires.
When the order
given to bring down the
final protective fires, the platoon commander
ascertains that his squads are covering their
assigned sectors of fire, that automatic rifles are
carrying out their missions of covering avenues
is
mander
of
in
selected
is
more
the forward
is
The
specific detail
rifle
support pla-
platoons.
The
position
the
may be
company
defense
area
from which
the
440
rifle
platoons.
generally in the
forward
rifle
same manner
(1)
The
de-
organized
is
as that of the
platoons.
(3)
fire
plan
is
generally
the same as that of the forward platoons: overlapping sectors of fire for the rifle squads,
dangerous avenues of approach into the company rear area covered by automatic rifle fire,
and machine guns near the platoon position
protected by rifle and automatic rifle fires.
However,
it is
forward
rifle
platoons.
The
To
fire in
overhead
(2)
To
main
line of resistance,
and by
fire.
by covering avenues
the company rear area by fire.
resistance
of
main
line of
approach into
To
penetration.
Figure
45.
441
Section XII
Page
10-65
10-66
10-67
10-68
10-69
Selection of positions
Conduct
of the defense
Fire control
GENERAL.a.
Machine guns
the defense and their
10-65
442
442
443
443
446
arc
the backbone of
fire,
combined and coordinated with that of other
weapons, is employed to stop the enemy
regardless of the direction of his attack.
The
most
hands of
defensive
weapon
the
in
the infantry
Large
(1)
volume
of
which can be
fire,
readily applied.
The
(2)
narrow beaten
(4)
fixed
mount which
effectively at night
enables
it to fire
ance
less of
same mission.
10-66 MISSIONS.Machine guns are employed throughout the defensive position. Various missions may be assigned to the machine-
gun platoon:
a.
Final protective
practicable, the
line.
(1)
machine guns
As nearly
as
of the front-line
fires.
line mission
sector of
fire, if
of a sector practicable.
(1)
When
main
company
are placed in
position.
In no event
ment
by the
of close
The
main
many
The employment
on
assign-
support- of the
of the reserve
company.
company guns
generally the same
of the reserve
main
Machine guns
line of resistance
plementary
positions
penetrations of the
c.
of visibility.
b.
General
Missions
COMBAT
IN DEFENSIVE
Provide depth
mam line
to
of resistance.
e.
is
Support counterattacks.
If
a penetration
constitute
support.
The
for
employing ma-
same
Machine
Gun
reduced.
443
ammunition supply
d.
of a section should
be at
and
artillery foe.
ENEMY
MLR
MLR
-*
__^-ty-
.:
Figure
79528750
29
CO.
46.
DEFENSE AREA
[ANUAL
444
promptly make and execute a plan of immediate
defense for holding the position.
The
principal
commander must immediately have the machine guns displace to a firing position on or
near the objective. From these firing positions,
the entire company front and flanks are covered
by machine gun fire by the assignment of
overlapping sectors of
The
fire
to
and missions
by the platoon commander in accord-
assigned
each section.
The
chine guns, as
of at least
shown
in figure 46,
is
the
pany
front
grazing
(4)
is
fire.
DEFENSE AREA
?
47.
com-
ENEMY
Figuhe
ma-
the ability
Coordinated machine-gun fire plan covering company front with interlocking bands of grazing
fire.
gun platoon
in
(a)
445
Time may be
naissance by
(b)
to
The
all
available
for
a recon-
commanders.
battalion
assume control
commander may be
of all
machine guns.
able
The
company boundaries.
in
weak points
employment
at
of the
the
company.
more formida-
of
(c)
position.
(d)
to
formulate plans
The
Figure 48
plan, illustrated by
by a system of intergrazing fire and a mutual ex-
battalion
is
fire
characterized
locking bands of
xxxWIRE
Figure
48.
fire
plan.
446
companies
of fire
tance,
of the reserve
port of the main line of resistance and the reserve company guns should have prepared supplementary positions from which to protect the
flanks
is
and
rear.
The
lines.
firing positions
of missions
(a)
Primary
firing positions.
(b)
(c)
Sectors of
(d)
on a
adjust the
The
fire
gun upon the target, regufire, shift fire from one target
fire of his
to another,
b.
target.
and cease
firing.
fire
fire
control results in
c.
not be masked by
rifle
and vice
units
versa.
Arrangements must likewise be made to prorifle protection for the machine gun sec-
vide
tions.
d.
The
fire
Once
by the
arm and hand
lines.
leader
is
fire.
Elements of
fire control.
(e)
clearing fields of
(5)
Tactical
and protective
wire.
(a)
If avail-
is
it is
generally parallel
Protective wire
the
FIRE CONTROL. a.
Fire control
machine guns includes all operations connected with preparation and actual application
of
and
prearranged
signals
(pyrotechnics
for
example).
e.
sion
A
is
may
engage
on the
The
must be ordered, or standard
section leader
mission
is
so
important to a successful
fire,
/.
(1)
fires
are usually
whose
During periods
(2)
rifle
of
During periods
company commander
be engaged is
open fire on all
targets of opportunity and will depend upon
cover, concealment, and frequent movement to
alternate positions to keep the guns from being
500 yards.
good
the
fire.
and duration
of
or battalion
commander
447
These guns
will
destroyed or neutralized by
enemy
fire.
The
specifies the rate and duration of fire.
lines
final
protective
usual rate of section fire on
is rapid for two minutes (125 rounds per minute)
Movement of guns to supplementary positions will be made on direct orders from the
platoon commander who may get instructions
followed by
firing at
a slower rate of
fire
and
firing alternat-
ing bursts.
Dead
(3)
on perfectly
flat terrain.
is
company
or battalion.
Guns
enemy
initiative
main
line of
on targets of opportunity
of section leaders.
The maxi-
on the
observers.
h.
avoid destruction.
j. Disabled guns are replaced from rear to
front; i. e., final protective line guns are replaced by guns in close support of the main line
of resistance, and close support guns are replaced by reserve guns
k. For conduct of section fire, see Chapter 9,
Basic Combat Techniques.
For range cards, see Chapter 9, Basic
I.
Combat Techniques.
Section XIII
Par.
10-70
10-71
10-72
10-73
General
Organization of the defense
Conduct of the defense
Reserve company
GENERAL.
10-70
448
448
453
454
either
on the main
company) or
company
the forward
rifle
COMBAT
avenues of approach to a
The
(b)
intersections of the
with the
aries
mam
line of resistance
in
depth behind
defense areas
company).
(reserve
d.
commander
rifle
c.
company
Front
as
of the battalion.
company
line
defense
areas.
slopes of
(1)
of both.
or on a combination
(a) The
(2) Boundaries and limiting points
width of the front line company defense area is
defined
defense
area
The boundary
from those
of
adjacent units.
tactical localities
such as
hills,
woods,
etc., in
boundavenues of
Also,
General.
commander
may
may
company
(2)
defense area.
steps.
The troop leading
company commander are the same
the platoon commander in defense.
Troop leading
steps of the
as those of
10-71
FENSE.
Tactical
a.
tribution of platoons.
mander
organization.
(a)
(1)
Dis-
When
(unprotected),
the
is
company commander
(See
approach into the battalion main line of resistance such as valleys, draws, etc., thus assign-
situation of
support, the
448
company bound-
Company
front line
specific
company.
Company as part of
company usually defends
a.
company
IN DEFENSIVE
(2)
fig.
50.)
open
dis-
open
company commander
divides the
company
tion.
instance,
would be assigned a
relatively
narrow
maximum
front-
designates the
area
is
The
is
the normal
all
has
selected.
(c)
of
fig.
50.)
rear
area from
the
main
line
of
resistance.
assists,
on the
fire.
open
flank.
(/)
is
sepa-
platoons.
similar
to
However,
defensive
the
area
covered
by
front line
(4)
rifle
platoons.
Security.
(a)
by
Therefore, a position
delivering overhead
area.
positions
company
company
rated, each
located
(g)
(See
is
line of resistance.
platoon, however,
its
main
The support
no closer than 150 yards to the rearmost elements of the front line platoons to avoid enemy
fire directed at the main line of resistance and
to give depth to the company position.
the
(d) 1. Another important mission of
support platoon is to protect the rear and flanks
of the company.
Whenever possible, this mission is accomplished from the original defensive
However, if the terrain makes this
position.
physically occupy
449
450
and
warn
to
his
men
of the presence of
company commander
(a)
Figure
49.
In the well dug-in and concealed observation post, the company commander has all
available means of communications for contact
with the rifle platoons and the battalion commander. Although good observation is the
prime factor in the selection of the position,
concealment and covered routes of communication are extremely desirable.
(b) The company commander selects a position for the company command post.
This
position possesses cover, concealment, and
covered routes of communication. It is located
no closer that 150 yards to positions on the main
line of resistance in order to avoid enemy fire.
By locating the company command post behind
or within the support platoon position, advantage is taken of rifle protection. The command
fense.
post
is
fire,
when company's
company communica-
and
usually
controlled
by the company
plan.
b. Company
The
(1) General.
fire
company commander decides upon a company
fire plan.
all
three
This
rifle
fire
platoons.
(2)
Front
line
platoons.
The
fire
plan for
main
451
tion of the
well covered
an open flank.
Support platoon.
(a) The support platoon must be able to cover by fire dangerous
avenues of approach leading into the company
to cover
(3)
rear
When
main
line
of
resistance.
ENEMY
MLR
LOCAL SECURITY
OUTPOSTS AND
*
PATROLS
SUPPLEMENTARY
POSITIONS
i
\
;
/v. _.
>.
Figure
50.
fire,
when one
of the
company's flanks
is
open.
452
company commander
of
The
ground organization,
if
(d)
is:
Clearing
fields of fire.
required.
(2)
at the position
position
(3)
d.
is
occupied.
slope
defense.
When
main
the
manner
as
when
the
forward slope
siderations
is
occupied.
must be borne
in
by the company
night are:
in gaps
(2)
(4)
tion
and
(2)
fire
Draw
main
and increase the number of
line of resistance,
outguards and
patrols
security.
MAIN LINE OF
RESISTANCE
FORWARD COMBAT
GROUPS (SECURITY)
SUPPORT
PLATOON
COUNTER SLOPE
SLOPE
Figure
51.
FORWARD
SLOPE
(cross section).
(3)
Use
(4)
trip
wires,
tin
(5)
enemy rather
enemy
actually
unless
use
under
attack.
10-72
a.
sparingly
also,
General.
In
successfully,
company commander
the
first
Warning
b.
of
enemy
attack.
The
company
front, or
open
flank, the
company commander
notifies battalion
size,
force.
used.
d. Once the enemy has advanced within 500
yards of the main line of resistance, the com-
pany commander
and
automatic riflemen on the main line of resistance and from the support platoon, where
The
possible, open fire at profitable targets.
depth machine guns in the company area and
certain specified machine guns in close support
of the main line of resistance also open fire
when
e.
enemy
suitable
Close-in
defensive
in force
the
If,
in
enemy continues
to
spite
of
advance
company commander
main
fire
wherever possible to
on the main
line of resistance.
The company
weapons are
firing that
major
by communicating
weapon or unit concerned.
As soon as the enemy attack has been repulsed,
the company commander orders the final protective fires to cease.
Other company weapons
will continue to fire on targets of opportunity
faults in the firing
Enemy
heavy
fire.
penetrations.
final protective
-If,
fires,
in spite of the
the
enemy con-
situation.
g.
Support of counterattack.
If the enemy
targets appear.
defensive fires.
fires,
453
by
is
fire
454
h.
the
(1) If
this
enemy
jacent
unit
company's
flank, the
and
threatens
the
company commander
receives permission
he
If possible,
reserve
rear
jacent
the
company flanks.
company located by the battalion commander within the reserve company area, by
which means penetrations into the battalion
b.
of
area
are
Such
checked or prevented.
coordination also assures protection of the machine guns within the company area by riflemen
of the reserve company.
The
company
is
also called
battalion.
upon
to pro-
the forward
rifle
open
new
in
force.
i.
uation during the enemy attack. By ascertaining that large amounts of all types of am-
10-73
RESERVE COMPANY.a.
Mission
Just as the
of increasing depth of battalion area.
support platoon organizes positions extending
the depth of the
company
rifle
organizes
company,
positions
so the reserve
extending
the
will
rifle
When
there
the reserve
company
takes particular
company may remain mobile, prepared to assume either position, depending on which is threatened first by
the enemy. Such a mobile status, however,
would have, as a prerequisite, a covered, conflank positions, the reserve
Enemy
Mission of counterattacking.
serve company may be employed
c.
the reserve
difficult.
(1)
The
re-
in counter-
The preparation of these counterattack plans for the battalion is the function of
the reserve company commander.
(2) The reserve company should have covered routes of approach to the line of departure
In executing a
for each counterattack plan.
are made.
company
will usually
by
fire,
line of
resistance.
(4)
The
reserve
fire
machine gun
The
necessary.
object of such
purpose will be
the check-
fires is
enemy reinforcement
offering
of
less
possibility
and
endangering
of
weapons, to the battalion commander for apWhen the plans are approved, the forproval.
ward companies are given the details of the
plans, and if time permits, a rehearsal is carried
out.
(5)
The
following information
is
included in
(a)
455
prior to
(6)
(c)
(d)
of departure.
(e)
Objective of counterattack.
Scheme
of maneuver.
Preparatory
fires of supporting weapons.
(g)
(h) Signal to lift preparatory fires.
(i) Subsequent supporting fires.
more than one counterattack is
(6) If
planned, they are given appropriate distinguishing designations, such as Plan Able or Plan
Baker, and put into execution upon order of the
(/)
battalion commander.
The battalion commander does not ordinarily commit his reserve
company until efforts at reducing the penetration by fire from the remaining weapons sur-
execution,
detailed
planning,
counterattack.
d.
For
8.
details of
Section
XIV
Par.
10-74
10-75
10-76
General
Organization of the defense
Conduct
of the defense
456
456
458
The main
line
The
Battalion
defense
and location of the deupon the mission of the battalion, the terrain, the situation of enemy forces,
and the situation of friendly forces. Only porarea.
(1)
size
in
positions, in
advantage of
GENERAL.a.
10-74
his rifle
resistance,
of
The main
(b)
should be an
line of resistance
However, deep
its trace.
fires
and
to conceal
salients or reentrants
should be avoided.
The
entire
(c)
ance
may run
hills,
both.
(d)
1.
When
the battalion
is
operating alone
the main line
1,400 yards.
(2)
b.
Battalion
commander's
reconnaissance.
FENSE.
tion of the
a.
Tactical organization.
main
line of resistance.
(a)
Selec-
(1)
The
fires of
talion
of resistance completely
and
all directions.
55.)
(See
figs.
Distribution of companies.
(a) The tactical organization of a front-line battalion in de(2)
company
defense
may
distribute its
the bat-
not be
will
line of re-
is
commander,
456
ward primary
basis
sistance
main
its flanks,
most
direction.
(See
fig. 55.)
is
maximum
by the fields
company position.
dictated largely
frontage
company under
company
a forward
assigned
The depth
rifle
of the front
maximum
effective range of
rifle fire.
defense of key
terrain
features
and
critical
avenues
of
(4)
talion
main
tions of the
line of resistance
company
and
to sup-
defense areas
by
all
company.
mander
selects
command
no reserve
in effect,
is,
attack, the
is
main
battalion
the
aid
post,
The
and
stations,
battalion
observation
com-
posts,
dump.
Observation posts.
commander
talion
Location.
1.
selects
is
when
visibility of
A rear or second-
limited.
main
line of resistance.
position
is
by camouflage
carefully concealed
is
or natural
maximum
defense with
The
of fire
457
Use.
2.
Communication
imminent.
facilities
the
battalion
are
is
in-
through which
with his subordinate units. From the observation post the battalion commander controls the
reserve company.
fire
fire.
tion,
The key
if
by the
The reserve company posi-
range of
rifle
fire
maximum effective
companies. It
should be no less than 150 yards to the supporting elements of the forward rifle companies,
thus giving the reserve protection from enemy
fire falling on the forward areas and giving
depth to the defense.
(6) When one or both of the battalion flanks
is open, some elements of the reserve company
are assigned positions protecting the open flank
or flanks. In addition, supplementary positions are chosen for the remaining elements of
the reserve company (elements which have
primary positions supporting the forward rifle
companies) further protecting the exposed flank
or flanks.
(c)
53 and 54.)
the battalion adopts an all-around
(See
When
rifle
and maneuver
of his troops
Battalion
command
post,
and weapons
The
command
post.
whenever
possible, is located in
battalion
Conceal-
the
within
the
reserve
command
post
administration,
is
company
communications,
and supply.
(c)
station
is
position.
The
is
casualties
figs.
(d)
is
Battalion
458
command
tion,
Security.
Combat
(a)
outpost.
commander
is
the
The
commander
battalion
posts.)
(6)
Local security.
commander
fire
plan.
by
the battalion
fire
plan.
The
commander
object of
is
the
fire
the battalion
battalion
by a dense band
immediately in front
any penetration
of
fires,
and eject him from the position by a combination of prearranged fire and counterattack.
(2)
The
battalion
fire
(a)
On the main line
machine guns located on
the main fine of resistance (usually two or
more sections from each forward rifle company)
are so placed by the battalion commander that,
if possible,
their final protective fires form
interlocking bands of grazing fire forward of
the battalion main line of resistance.
(b) Support.Support machine guns are
placed in depth behind the main fine of resistance so as to limit penetrations of the main line
of resistance and if possible to assist by fire in
the defense of the main line of resistance. In
addition, these guns may protect the flanks and
rear of the battalion and the forward company
of resistance.
guns.-
The
defense areas.
guns
is
rifle
(4)
battalion in defense.
Organization
c.
ity.
In
of
(See Sec.
commander
is
-(1)
Priorthe
XV.)
ground.-
the
battalion
clearing fields of
fire,
(2)
fire
Machine
(3)
Battalion
d.
from the
if)
In
talion
approximate
(d)
in the
(c)
Basic
10-76
a.
defense
order.
See
Chapter
9,
Combat Techniques.
Action
makes direct contact with an attackenemy forward of the combat outpost. The
combat outpost opens fire at long range. When
practicable it is supported by naval gunfire.
The combat outpost withdraws along predetermined routes to the main line of resistance before
the enemy can assault the outpost position.
b. Enemy approaches the main line of resistance.
As the enemy comes within 500 yards
of the main line of resistance, rifles, automatic
force first
ing
rifles,
targets
ENEMY
Figure
available,
may
continue to
52.
fire,
controlled from
line of resistance.
main
fine of resistance.
d. Penetration.
795287 50
If,
30
in
LOCAL SECURITY
OUTPOSTS AND PATROLS
of the
459
advance, he
troops
is
enemy continues
the
to
on the main
line
of resistance.
No
further reinforcement.
The penetration
is
con-
tained.
e.
Counterattack.
be driven back by
If the
fire
penetration cannot
alone,
the battalion
460
ENEMY
LOCAL SECURITY
OUTPOSTS AND
PATROLS
SUPPLEMENTARY
POSITION
Figure
fire is falling in
63.
in order to counterattack,
fires
/.
of
Enemy
enemy advances
When
so as to threaten the
the
open
resistance.
talion
is
open.
enemy's maneuver
will
come from
local security
supplementary
flanking
When the
g. Conduct of perimeter defense.
battalion has adopted a perimeter defense with
all
is
main
line
conducted as out-
initially.
attack
is
reserve.
461
ENEMY
7\
MLR
MLK
of
\^
'
LOCAL SECURITY
#
OUTPOSTS AND
/ i
PATROLS
of the enemy
companies when both battalion flanks are open and the location
is
known.
462
of
companies when both battalion flanks are open and the enemy situation
is
unknown
(perimeter defense).
Section
XV
Par.
The
c.
10-77
10-78
10-79
General
Control
10-77
GENERAL.Naval
463
463
463
gunfire support
Neutralization or destruction of
enemy
in the
forces
b.
objective area.
the
ordinate commanders.
(1)
is
The
fire
er's
also spot
fire
is
control
10-79
QUESTS.
Warning
Location of target.
c.
Nature of
d.
Classification of
e.
Method
order.
target.
fire.
of fire.
missions to be executed
/.
Ammunition.
g.
Fuze.
h.
Control.
fire
normally delegated to
party originating the
request.
the
They
gunfire.
b.
request preliminary
gunfire
as follows:
a.
gunfire support.
b.
support
463
Section
XVI
AVIATION
Page
Par.
10-80
10-81
10-82
General
Control
Air support requests
GENERAL.Aviation may
10-80
464
464
464
be used
c.
d.
Reduce
e.
Attack
ground
targets
throughout
the
battle area.
(2)
air
support
to
include
troop
quest.
and
tactical
tion.
CONTROL.a. The
10-81
support
(1)
is
An
control of air
(1)
Priority of target.
(2)
Nature
(4)
(5)
command.
(6)
(2)
cated in Chapter
in the event air
b.
The
1,
is
as
follows:
(1)
and
directs
464
of target.
Location of target.
Desired time limits for the attack.
Types of attack desired.
Location of nearest friendly front lines.
Target can or cannot be marked.
Tactical air control party can or cannot
(3)
organized as follows:
air
echelon of
air
for
10-82
Provide
j.
(7)
(8)
observe.
b.
of
friendly
troops
Whatever
(2)
Smoke
(3)
rivers,
11
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
465
Chapter
11
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Par.
Section
I.
II.
General
Night Combat
III.
Patrolling
IV.
Retrograde Movements
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
Raids
11-1
11-2
11-18
11-28
11-33
11-37
11-64
11-78
11-88
467
Page
469
470
477
481
484
487
499
504
508
Section I
GENERAL
Par
11-1
General
11-1
Special
GENERAL.
469
operations,
in
as fire
duty require special planning and organizaand indoctrination in individual conduct, and much more preparation
and skill on the part of unit leaders. This
chapter will cover night combat, patrolling,
retrograde movements, raids, street fighting,
military police functions, riot duty, and national
riot
disasters.
of units concerned.
469
Section
II
NIGHT COMBAT
Par.
General
Offense at night
Company order
Reconnaissance and
other
actions
Rate of advance
Formations
Secrecy
Identification
Maneuver
Signal communications
Conduct
of night attack
Defense at night
Night marches
11-2
470
470
470
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
1 1-9
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-17
471
preparatory
Time
11-2
11-3
1 1-4
472
472
472
473
473
474
474
474
474
474
475
476
GENERAL. a.
may
operations
by
overcome the
and to exploit the advantages. Night
difficulties
unit in defense.
b.
Night
combat
is
characterized
by
and
by a corresponding increase in the importance
of close combat and the fire of fixed weapons
laid on definite targets or areas by day.
It is
further characterized by the following difficulties: Movement, troop leading, maintenance
of direction, contact, and signal communication; and by a more highly sensitive morale of
fire
maintenance of control and direction necessitates limited objectives which may be approached by well-defined routes. The more
sensitive morale of the troops increases the
effect of surprise obtained by the offense and
the importance of security measures on the
part of the defense.
d.
As a
fire
rule,
all
Simplicity of plan,
and cohesion
control,
in
In night combat,
commanders on
ished.
their troops
is
greatly dimin-
of
combat
exercise
greater
Surprise
is
night operation.
troops.
g.
The
with the
fore, are
difficulties of
command.
NIGHT.In
spite of
attack
11-4
COMPANY ORDER. a.
pany order
The commuch
by day.
the troops.
c.
Provision
is
made
for
every even-
The
be included
in
below).
Direction of attack.
Boundaries
zone
area,
of action.
of attack.
when
applicable:
Point
or area of departure.
at daylight.
units
if
not
Means
Means
of identification.
to maintain secrecy.
Method
of advance.
advance if applicable.
* Special measures for control and coordination.
Action when hostile security measures are ento deploy as skirmishers or line of squad
restrict
rifle
is
reconnaissance
the
of
subordinate
leaders and give specific orders for night patrolling prior to the attack
and
of the objective.
d.
When
rifle
company
constitutes
the
mander
commander
aerial photo-
graphs.
(2)
Prompt
all
issuance
of
warning
order
tion of troops.
(4)
objective.
(5)
for
which
usually
columns.
to load rifles.
Reorganization on the objective.
When
is
to be released
When
c.
friendly troops
countered.
talion
daylight, reconnaissance of
by
of
When
Dming
darkness.
giving
Security measures.
Rate
In
by the battalion commander, daylight reconnaissance by the company commander and his subordinates is essential and is supplemented by additional reconnaissance at dusk and during the hours of
(1)
fires.
Direction of attack.
Objective.
Limit of advance.
Reorganization on the objective.
Platoon mission on capture of the objective and
x.
Time
made by
be
Objective.
Assembly
to
of attack.
Formation.
*Base unit. (For use of asterisk, see
Unless prescribed by
higher authority, he decides whether the attack
fires; if
company
of the
is
471
commander may
pre-
In any
situation, he states the objective, the mission
attack.
(6) Reconnaissance and marking of the route
from the assembly area to the point where
is
of departure.
(8) Designation and reconnaissance of the
route of advance for each platoon beyond the
Reconnaissance is performed
line of departure.
by platoon
leaders,
of
(See a above.)
472
(When
departure.
the battalion
commander
or platoons.)
(10) Selection
by observation,
if
practicable,
(11)
phone
lines, or
tele-
and
control.
(12)
issuance of the
time to
Final detheir reconnaissances before dark.
are
usually
issued after
tails of the attack order
reconnaissances are completed.
(13) Arrangements for serving a hot meal
prior to the attack and obtaining maximum
possible rest for the troops.
11-6
PLAN OF ATTACK.GeneralThe
No
method can be
maintaining direction, control, and contact vary directly with the
degree of visibility existing at the time of the
attack, and the methods used must be varied
accordingly. To plan the attack, the company
commander's information of hostile forces (size,
composition, and night dispositions), the contemplated action of friendly troops, and the terrain to be traversed, must be as complete and
preparation
followed.
is
The
essential.
set
difficulties of
detailed as possible.
a.
(2)
(3)
when
(4)
From
By
By
By
c.
remains to justify
Selection
of
open
terrain
favoring
the
advance.
Employment
rear
of,
follow.
j.
vals.
sufficient daylight
k.
d.
company order in
permit subordinate leaders to make
The
c.
often be
it.
his subordinates.
objective.
(5)
By
By
of the
by each
platoon after capturing the objective.
(Platoon leaders assign squad objectives, definitely
indicating the flanks.)
11-8 TIME OF ATTACK.The time of
detailed mission to be accomplished
attack
is
commander
473
increased.
dination.
may
It
may
also anticipate
on the part
of the
enemy.
b.
tion to die
down.
11-9
made
hour.
Beyond
if
mile per
ticable, the
it
regu-
to the
11-10
columns
FORMATIONS.a.
is
line of departure.
objective
Line of platoon
is
tance and
If
visibility is sufficient
some
to
dis-
permit
it may be desirable to
squad columns before reaching the locality where deployment as skirmishers is to be made.
If the distance from the line
of departure to the objective is only a few
hundred yards, it may be desirable to cross the
line of departure in line of squad columns.
Whether in line of platoon columns or line of
control to be maintained,
change into
line of
men armed
and bayonet are useful in the
assault, a deployed rifle squad can usually
cover about 20 yards. All men not armed with
the bayonet are placed at the rear of their
with the
rifle
avail-
act as guides.
light),
the platoon
element of the attacking echelon, with a connecting group following the prescribed element
initial assault.
When
the terrain
is
favorable
signal.
474
e.
the advance.
11-11 SECRECY.a.
tinctive
marks
for
noncommissioned
officers are
desirable.
c. The battalion commander prescribes the
countersign and the identifying marks to be
worn by subordinate commanders, security
The term
(when
word
Prohibit
The
challenge, is a
cation.
secret.
counter-
secret), the
to
cause an
equipment.
unless
assault
fixed be-
(Battlefield
of firing rifles
Darken
faces
line of
11-12
IDENTIFICATION.a. Means
must be
of
means
of identifica-
tion.
b.
Distinctive
marks
"When
practicable,
must be
special
dis-
to
the
advance
although
front,
permitted.
conflict
between
SIGNAL COMMUNICATIONS.
11-14
or lifting supporting
pre-
prescribed.
MANEUVER. Platoons
11-13
available substance.
/.
secret.
dirt or other
The
b.
be
well
down
fires.
understood:
objective
taken;
protective
fires.
and
put
lift
Advance.
ATTACK
(1)
The advance
is
made
in
and contact.
Each column leader is preceded at the
of visibility by scouts or a small patrol.
of direction
(3)
limit
reestablish
Contact
is
contact,
made by
intervals,
and
direction.
designated personnel
mov-
The advance
resumed on the
company commander's order, transmitted by
messengers or by special signals. If a hostile
vice versa.
is
members
of the
It
may
column may
own
objectives.
Assault.
Deployment may be forced by
enemy opening fire at close range; it may
be executed upon arrival at a prescribed terrain
feature or on the order of the company comb.
launch the
by
475
Aggressive leadership
final assault.
and
officers
noncommissioned
officers
is
essential.
as the objective
tion
will
begins.
All
place
them
in position.
men
daylight)
to
during
leaders,
darkness,
(just prior
separated from
their
units
When
hostile
the attack
counterattacks
is
at
daylight.
tion posts.
At dawn they
select
and occupy
better locations.
DEFENSE AT NIGHT.a. A
11-16
must be prepared
in defense
at night or
unit
under
groups from
Consideration
into
the position.
by daylight
firing,
to
alternate or
the
defensive
essential.
The advance
70528750
31
fires.
b.
476
supplementary positions are dug and camouflaged. Elements of the battalion reserve
may be placed to protect an exposed flank.
When, during
sistance
is
daylight, the
main
line of re-
to escape effect of
enemy
fire,
the strength of
is
increased at night.
An
attacking force that succeeds in gaining a foothold within the position during the
night can best be ejected by a counterattack
launched by the reserve during the half-light
of early dawn and before the hostile force has
c.
soon as
groups which
may have
to
mop up
hostile
d.
to night.
The strength
of
For night
patrols,
the counterattack.
Section III
PATROLLING
Page
Par.
11-18
11-19
11-20
Combat patrols
11-21
Importance of patrolling
11-22
Factors influencing the size of patrols
11-23
Requirements of a patrol formation
Factors influencing patrol formations-- 11-24
11-25
Control
11-26
Security
11-27
Movements
General
Reconnaissance patrols
GENERAL.A
11-18
ment
patrol
is
477
477
477
477
478
478
478
478
479
480
a detach-
connaissance
and
combat
either
of
which
might have a mission of security. The classification is derived from the mission assigned a
They
are
fighting
patrols.
Combat
patrols
enemy and
the terrain.
c.
A combat patrol
the mission
of:
patrol.
(1)
Capturing prisoners.
(2)
(3)
by
sion
stealth.
vancing unit.
feature.
to
to obtain
be of value
(5)
to the
commander who
for it
(6)
(7)
able combat.
desires
11-21
it.
c.
dis-
patched:
(1)
To
locate
To
enemy
Seizing
(4)
to prevent
reconnoiter a route of
march
for
larger force.
IMPORTANCE
OF
PATROL-
LING.
of
locality.
agencies.
a.
the
most
effective
478
may
consist of 2
tactical unit.
men, a
The
fire
team, or a larger
positions depending
size of a
combat or recon-
patrol
is
on
make
full
each
use of
wedge
1 ). For
becomes reby woods or broken terrain, the column
is
larger patrols or
when
visibility
the mission.
stricted
made up
requirements.
6. The size of a patrol depends upon the
lowing influencing factors:
(1) Mission.
(2) Terrain and visibility.
(3) Distance from friendly troops.
(4)
Time
(5)
Number
of messages
Whether
it will
fol-
FACTORS INFLUENCING
PATROL FORMATIONS. a.
In general, the
following factors will influence and change a
patrol formation:
be out.
it
may have
to send
back.
(6)
and
sent back.
Mission.
(1)
(2)
Terrain.
(3)
Visibility.
(4)
Security.
combat or
(5)
Enemy
(6)
Control.
(7)
Size of patrol.
c.
minimum number
men
situation.
b.
11-25
CONTROL.a.
The
patrol
leader
required to exe-
squad in
the
size.
of
is
at
will
in
minimum number
down
of
men
at only
and
visibility.
The
will follow.
move anywhere
b.
The
patrol leader
is
assisted in controlling
command. In
com-
mand
been
lost
and
stealth
and
silent
move-
known
to all
members
of the patrol.
At
this
479
advance of the
to cover the
patrol.
slightly
The
The point
(3)
is
Flanks.
(1)
man on either side who moves as diby the patrol leader. In special instances
two-man groups may be necessary. Such a
group operates by having the inside man place
using one
rected
view at
all
times.
maximum
distance
The man
man
20 to 25 yards
In open terrain the flankers should invesany cover within 100 yards of the general
route of march of the patrol. In moving
through dense woods or jungle, the use of
flankers may become impracticable because of
reduced visibility. In such cases the men normally assigned to flank protection move with
the patrol itself, but maintain close observation
(2)
tigate
will
by constantly observing
get-away
man
to the rear.
He
is
also
ambushed.
He
to the
Usually
it
is
480
dispersed,
in case
it is
enemy
attack.
it.
In this way the patrol leader
can be absolutely sure that each individual
member of the patrol is thoroughly familiar
with the location of the assembly point.
c. Members
of a dispersed patrol try to
reach the designated assembly point with all
possible speed in order to facilitate resumption
of the mission.
If the patrol leader does not
show up within a reasonable period of time, the
second in command reorganizes the patrol and
carries out the mission.
moves beyond
ambushed, or surprised by
POINT
PATROL FORMATIONS
<b
FLANK
SECURITY
FLANK
SECURITY
TEAM PATROL
WEDGE FORMATION
FIRE
Figtjbe
<D
1.
<b
POINT
O
FLANK
SECURITY
FLANK
SECURITY
<b
<D
<b
(E>
REAR
POINT
RIFLEMAN
CD
FTL
BAR
d>
ASST BAR
<g>SQD LDR
SQUAD PATROL
COLUMN FORMATION
ORlfr-EMAN
<DASST. BAR
FIRE
TEAM LEADER
6
6
<b
BAR
PLT.
COMDR.
PLT.
PLT.
GUIDE
patrol,
column formation."
<b
'
PO
REAR
MESSENGER
SQD LEADER
Fiqure 2. "Squad
Figure
3.
POINT
Section IV
RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS
General
11-28
GENERAL. A
Par.
Page
11-28
1 1-29
481
481
11-30
11-31
11-32
481
483
483
retrograde move-
ment
is
11-29
MENTS.a. Types
movements
of retrograde
move
(1)
(2)
To
To
follows:
To draw
the
enemy
favorable to him.
(4)
To conform
to
the
movements
of the
other troops.
(5) To gain time without fighting a decisive
engagement.
(6) To permit a portion of the command to
be employed elsewhere.
11-30 WITHDRAWALS.a. A withdrawal
from action is that operation of breaking off
combat with a hostile force. The general pur-
(6)
the
company commander
had
left its
is
it
disorgan-
behind a strong
covering force, enables the withdrawing force
to leave its defensive position unobserved and
ized.
night withdrawal,
will:
reconnaisance.
He
deter-
The withdrawal
(3)
when
his reconnaissance,
(b)
enemy may
Make
(a)
command.
units are
ercised
fire
last to
through.
include:
and
as a covering
withdrawn
command
force.
(a)
position.
(3)
Night withdrawals.
(1) Characteristics of
a night withdrawal are:
(a) Small units withdraw as a whole and
simultaneously, leaving approximately one-
(c)
(1) Withdrawals.
(2) Delaying actions.
(3) Retirements.
b. Reasons for conducting retrograde move-
c.
are as follows:
ments are as
to the rear to
(c)
(d)
This
order.-
order will
(4)
481
482
covering force
squad leaders at the latters' positions. Individual men withdraw straight to the rear to the
squad assembly area. The BAR man is usually
the last man of the fire team to withdraw.
After the squad has reached its assembly area,
it will withdraw as a unit (minus the covering
force) to the platoon assembly area over the
routes already designated. The squad leader
will withdraw with his last fire team.
When
all squads have reached the platoon assembly
(2) Employment.
(a) One squad will normally be left to cover the area formerly occu-
the
to
commander moves
company assembly
Daylight
(a)
withdrawals.
area.
(1)
fire of
difficult
(a) As
company commander
(2)
makes a reconnaissance
areas.
He
He
tains secrecy.
As
in night withdrawals,
the
This
is
larger force
machine gun
place of a
section.
attached to the
(b)
Characteris-
men is left in
He
by a rifle platoon.
a skeleton crew of 2 or 3
pied
are
just prior
the platoon
accom-
is
front as possible.
Daylight withdrawals
commander
He assumes command
tive officer.
redistributes his
much
of the company
must be gaps in the
between squads and not
If there
they should
line,
commander
fall
to patrol the
company
Its mission
company area.
At night, the covering force deceives the
enemy by simulating normal activity along the
company front and covers the withdrawal of the
main body to its objective. To do this, the
mortars, machine guns, and BAR's fire at a very
the
(d)
whole front
physically occupied.
the covering force has completed
is still
When
(e)
its mission, it
If the
unit.
too will
fall
way
back,
it will
Under
it
rejoins
its
unit.
The mission
if)
time
all
is
night.
is
may
enemy
disengage
rear.
drawing.
The covering
positions to
the rear,
The
drawing platoons by a
(g)
The covering
force
for
company
is
It occupies posi-
which allow it to cover the routes of withdrawal of the forward platoon and also the
assembly areas.
tions
11-31
DELAYING ACTIONS.a. A
de-
em-
laying action
is
and observation.
Automatic weapons, as well as riflemen,
commence firing at the extreme ranges of 800
range
fire
(2)
to
By
1,200 yards.
doing, the
so
enemy
is
the time-con-
(3)
The
before the
enemy
is
close
down by
enough
to
and
launch an
fire
assault.
(4)
The withdrawal
of
combat
march columns
are formed.
483
so, a
only when all
possibilities
of accomplishing the assigned
mission have been exhausted and a continuation
of the battle wall lead either to excessive losses
d.
decision to retire
is
justified
or to a decisive defeat.
e. No commander is authorized to order a
retirement on his own initiative simply because
of local misfortune or reverses suffered by an
adjacent unit.
/.
and security
main body and the enemy
between
forces
and
his
to regain his
g.
As
freedom of action.
assembly
formed into small columns and
motion to the
set in
rear.
meet
to
fied
existing
visibility, intensity of
enemy combat
ments
i.
conditions
enemy
fire,
of
terrain,
activity of
aviation,
for control
increases,
small
columns.
j.
made
rear, constant
from the
enemy. This will necessitate forced marches,
night and day, while still providing effective
security measures to protect the rear and the
flanks, and to delay the enemy.
effort is
k.
may
assist
Smoke
their
attack.
By
battle,
r
Section
RAIDS
Par.
11-33
11-34
1 1-35
11-36
General
Supported raids
Unsupported raids
Duties of raiding party commanders
11-33
made
GENERAL.
a.
Purpose.
Page
484
485
485
485
Raids are
size of the
and
its
landing party,
armament.
its
state of training,
Raids
the
Initiation.
naval
landing
of the raid.
d.
The area to
The
size of the
minimum
As the
the
size of the
difficulties
execution.
parties.
reactions, to take
in a similar
manner
by withdrawal
is
ac-
complished.
(1)
Routes.
Unlike
when
possible
for
surprise.
Flank
and
advance
Whenever
(2)
call of
fires
must be accu-
and
training.
raid
UNSUPPORTED RAIDS.a.
11-36
Un-
DUTIES
COMMANDER. a.
OF RAIDING
Reconnaissance.
PARTY
The
re-
will assist
a plan.
b. Plan.
(1)
in the order.
11-35
lifting fires.
485
486
terrain
and
In drawing up a plan,
situation.
(d)
sidered in
is
to
be con-
the use of
patrols.
outguards.
must be
number required
to
Intricate
night raids.
(2)
issued.
combat order
detail.
is
is
but should be
It should be preceded
in greater
by a warning
c. Organization.
The raiding force is subdivided into smaller groups, each organized and
equipped to accomplish a specific purpose.
Groups
may
to
provide
security
the
for
assault
each
situation.
Tactical unity
with
maintained
each party
varies
is
prescribed.
(2) Measures are taken to make the appearance of the troops blend with the terrain.
White cloth may be worn over the uniform to
match snow; at other times, both the clothing
At
least
one daylight
Section VI
COMBAT
Defense, general
Defensive plan
Defensive position
Civilian control
Supply
Communication
Distribution of troops
Battalion headquarters company
Distribution of rifle companies
Tactical employment, rifle platoon
Defense of buildings
Rifle squad and individual
IN BUILT-UP AREAS
Par.
Page
11-37
11-38
11-39
11-40
11-41
11-42
11-43
1 1-44
11-45
11-46
11-47
1 1-48
487
487
487
488
488
489
489
489
489
489
490
490
11-57
Rifle company
Supporting units and special equipment- _ 1 1-58
11-59
Rifle platoon
11-60
Conduct of attack
11-61
Rifle squad
11-62
Attacking a building
11-63
Miscellaneous
490
492
492
492
493
494
494
494
496
496
496
496
496
497
498
bombardment
debris.
11-38
nu-
ployment of security
by the em-
GENERAL.
11-37 DEFENSE,
a. A
thorough knowledge of the principles applicable
to the defense of cities is essential to the formulation of sound plans for the conduct of the
The
lages.
tactics
The purpose of
Cities, towns,
and
villages constructed of
little
protection.
of
a strong defense.
The
patrols.
plan.
The defense may
be assigned to a single tactical unit, and subsectors assigned to subordinate tactical units so
stationed as to be mutually supporting. Divided responsibility results in uncertainty and
indecision.
In any event, the whole defensive
operation should rest with a single commander.
11-39 DEFENSIVE POSITION.a. The
is comparable to the
defense of any battle position in that the plan
for the defense must insure covering the front
and flanks by
fire,
488
support,
all
weapon support.
b. The main line
maximum
may
be either
is never
along a clearly defined edge. The nearer edge
of a built-up area is a convenient registration
point for artillery and is likely to be subjected
In the usual
to the most concentrated fire.
situation, the main line of resistance may best
be located in suburban districts so as to command avenues of hostile approach and take full
advantage of observation, fields of fire, and opportunities for flanking fire against attacking
The holding garrison consists of a
forces.
series of unit defense areas with supporting
weapons attached, each occupying a separate
of resistance
tactical
blocks
locality
of
(one
buildings),
or
more buildings or
permitting
small-unit
defense of
Usually, however,
order.
it
will
be necessary
porting
detachments.
h. Plans to provide for counterattack under
any
tions.
c.
initial
of
defender.
likely
be provided.
11-40 CIVILIAN
CONTROL. Defense
effort.
friendly
inhabitants
superior military
Such barriers
elements.
e.
Where
should be
incorporated into defensive forces, because such
individuals usually have the will to resist and,
if placed in a good position, can stop forces of
practicable,
of
It also neces-
for
training,
particularly
when
Brassards or other
forms of identification must be provided.
comes
isolated.
Ammunition,
food, water,
and
nel and fire fighting may become a major problem because of contamination or destruction of
be found
Civilians
telephone.
may be expected
members
enemy
Landing party battalion. A battalion occupying a defense area will usually be assigned a
frontage of four to eight city blocks, depending
to
city
six
The
of the locality.
may
The
vary from
battalion
is
assigned
area
and
all
installations
of
the
rifle
commander usually
companies on the main line of
battalion
c.
company
Battalion
organizes
its
The
reserve
make
the
equpiment available.
prepared.
be
maximum use of
All men available
ally
two
post.
11-45
a.
(1)
Usu-
rifle
on the main
company
(2)
control.
resist-
The depth of
company area may vary from two to three
the
city
blocks.
(3)
Each
centralize
front
line
supply
its
ample quantities of
plans
all critical
items to each
defense area.
reserve.
posts
places
signal
on the main
The
The
established so as to
DISTRIBUTION OF TROOPS.
shelling
to report
a.
enemy
PANIES.
11-43
effect of
soldiers.
two
The probable
purpose.
alternate
b.
intelligence personnel
a system of protected observation
posts from which the front and flanks of the
battalion area may be observed.
Advantage
should be taken of high buildings for this
battalion
three
COMPANY. Battalion
will establish
than the
489
usually
HEADQUARTERS
of a built-up area, a
guns attached,
and defend a
line
area,
of
or
may
the
be employed to organize
tactical
resistance,
in
rifle
in
on the main
company support
locality
the
battalion
reserve
area.
It
an
490
locations
ment
all-around defense
is
fully
manned.
Sentries
(2)
should
be
posted
outside
fended,
the
specific
area
obstacles
of
be constructed, a
and general
automatic rifleman.
of fire of
to
responsibility,
members
The
of the
of individuals to reliefs
b. Position of squad.
During an alert the
squad defenses are manned by all available
personnel and weapons. At other times, the
squad is divided into two reliefs with one relief
on duty while the other relief is resting.
enemy
the
They should be on
way down.
and supplementary
loopholes for riflemen and for all weapons should
be prepared, reinforced, and camouflaged.
roof
if
From
the latter
accessible to the
enemy.
11-47
DEFENSE OF BUILDINGS.In
construction of obstacles.
Machine guns
as-
are usually
UAL.
a.
General.
The
platoon commander's
is
Primary,
alternate,
>
491
TANK OBSTACLE
ANTI-TANK S ANTI- PERSONNEL MINES
BARBED WIRE
G ANTI-TANK
LIGHT MACHINE GUN
S SNIPER
AUTOMATIC RIFLE
Figuke
4.
Defense
area of
rifle
GRENADIER
schematic diagram.
and avoid
The
One
exit should
walls of interior
concealed places,
Doors
492
the opening to
passage.
that the
some
the
minimum
necessary for
cases
it
may
Phase
a.
1.
The capture of an
initial posi-
which
of
opening.
11-50
tac-
The purpose
involving
the
attack
of
towns,
cities
and
villages.
(2)
(3)
(4)
c.
(3)
organized
mopping-up of
of force
is
hostile
11-52
to rear.
is
Some
of the
and property.
are:
to ac-
An
show
pre-
resistance.
life
reaching
determined objectives.
Village fighting
siderable
upon
or
periodically
either
suppress disorder.
the protection of
fire,
units.
units,
To
To
To
of
surprise.
non-existent
when
units
are
committed
to
command
the
of their
same unit
another.
difficulties
own
leaders.
Members
of
among buildings.
b. The plan of
based on precise,
The plan
of the city should be known.
Often it is more
difficult to find out where these strong points
attack
is
493
a.
mal
than
are,
it
intelligence channels.
(3) Information from local inhabitants regarding hostile activities and dispositions, and
recent changes that have occurred in structures
within the area of interest.
(4) Aerial reconnaissance, aerial photographs,
and maps.
Aggressive reconnaissance, including es-
(5)
secure
specific
information
or
employed
capture
to
Prisoners.
it
automatic weapons
firing
zone
fires.
and
Back
town,
/.
fire.
if
possible.
No movement
This
is
is
made without
covering
disposition, strength,
(3)
The
may
If the attackers
plan to
use the town, they will want to seize the power
station, radio station, telephone exchange, the
gas works, and the fire stations early in the
attack to prevent their destruction by the
defenders.
(4) The time available for the attack must
be considered.
(5) The construction of the buildings must
be taken into consideration, as the reduction of
reinforced concrete or stone buildings presents
11-61.
g.
to
prisoners.
(6)
11-53
is
by
Adherence
made of wood.
The
weather
is
an
important factor since
(6)
fog, heavy rain, or snow will hamper the enemy's
in attacking buildings
systematically, section
section.
An
494
taining
units.
made
for
main-
Use
which
and wait for
of intermediate objectives at
each unit
further orders
before continuing
the attack.
may
be cross
near edge of
a park, or any other easily designated landmark.
b.
Time
c.
Visual signals.
d.
zone.
Depth
(d)
of
advance required.
(See
schedule.
combination of methods.
11-55
BATTALION.Plan of attack.
a.
Formation.
The formation to be
(1)
adopted and the zones of advance of companies
in the attack are determined by:
(a) Strength of enemy resistance expected.
(6) Width of the battalion zone.
(c) Density and size of buildings within the
fig. 5.)
assigned
When
(3)
Normally, a
rifle
company
is
not
blocks.
towns or
and
their
capture
responsibility of a single
buildings
is
ing
rifle
line
advance.
objective
11-56
talion
is
reached.
BATTALION RESERVE.The
reserve
is
bat-
a block-by-block reduction
is
Figure
6.
495
Disposition of attacking platoons, supports, and reserves of a battalion attacking in a built-up area, where a block-by-block attack
required only in the zone of the
companyschematic diagram.
is
left
496
RIFLE
11-57
COMPANY.Plan
of
at-
split
tack.
a. In attacking through a built-up area,
the formation adopted by the rifle company
will depend upon the number of blocks in its
advance.
by the battalion
when strong
order, or,
resist-
is
expected,
objective.
11-58
CIAL
company commander
attacking platoons to
is
mop
up bypassed enemy
11-60
CONDUCT OF ATTACK.a.
The
The
After the
supplies covering
When
mander uses
commander
company commander,
notifies the
if
necessary,
and pre-
may
be used
initially to
and
cleared,
organized platoon.
platoons.
11-59
RIFLE
PLATOON.Plan
of
at-
tack.
a.
Objective.
rifle
and directed
on order.
on the objec-
immediately reports
tive.
b.
Formation.
its arrival
Suitable formations
squad
is
The
third
sault squads.
is
usually
in
an attacking echelon
In many situations, squads and
is difficult.
fire teams will operate independently in their
street fighting, control of
for a pla-
is
Methods of
attack.
(1)
When
must
fight
the
enemy
of a built-up
fire positions,
from house to
house.
(2) When scattered groups of enemy are
present in a built-up area, the "mopping up"
method of attack is employed. Using this
Covering
c.
fire.
Covering
fire is laid
down
fire.
initial
fire
searching party
tional
If the building is
team
to search,
may
an addi-
be used.
When
operating in
is
The covering
party,
usually
two
fire
11-62
down through
It
is
a building than
easier to
it is
it is
than
it is
b.
down
to pitch it up.
Killing zones.
by lanes of automatic
from automatic weapons,
off
work
up
to climb
fire.
Lanes of fire
around a
placed
497
make
all
movement
that building a
side of a building
or doors.
held
man on
is,
The
498
systematically.
Once the attack
e. Attack
has penetrated a building held by the enemy,
it should be continued systematically.
After
reaching the top of the building, the search
should be conducted room by room down
through the entire building. The search includes the roof and basement.
(1) The men in the
/. Searching a building.
searching fire team are paired into two teams.
One team
is
composed
of
ing that
is
cleared of the
friendly.
not
fire
at
movement
within
the
team.
When
one
man
man
(2)
covers him.
Technique
number
men
of
of
searching.
building.
minimum
sufficient to
Security
building
security
is
of captured
buildings.
must be
effected,
and an immediate
Once
Marking captured
buildings.
Each build-
in the building.
MISCELLANEOUS.a.
11-63
Built-up
areas
looting.
The
many
offer
Looting.
opportunities for
acquisition of loot
likely
is
to
a unit
disciplined
Regardless of
may
be,
how
unless pre-
must
All leaders
looting
are
is
support
Chalk marks
or rags can be
placed on the side of the building away from
the enemy so that adjacent units and troops
as
control.
The problem of conand administering the civilian inhabitants will normally be encountered, and may be
complicated by a flow of refugees into built-up
areas.
The degree of assistance and cooperation that may be expected from the civilian
inhabitants will vary greatly. Within an
Civilian
b.
trolling
enemy country
itself,
evitably be hostile.
assistance or co-
may
it.
Bombing tends
to drive the
them
c.
may
drive
in again.
Prisoners.
The
handling of prisoners of
Section VII
POLICE FUNCTIONS
Page
Par.
11-64
General
11-65
Mission
11-66
Functions
11-67
Ordinances enforced
General nature of military police activity
11-68
in occupied territory
1 1-69
Forces of disorder
11-70
Security
11-71
Subversive activity
11-72
Reprisals
11-73
Use of firearms
11-74
Supervision of civil police
11-75
Prisoners of war, general
11-76
Capture
1 1-77
Traffic control, general
GENERAL.a.
11-64
Personnel
499
499
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
501
501
50
501
502
to
They
As
The
jurisdiction of the U.
S.
Navy
and
shore patrol
S.
Navy
of disaster.
b.
The establishment
of martial
law or
mili-
the
isolated
islands
of
military
c.
d.
e.
and
Seize
pilfering.
installations as
petent authority.
/. Act as a security force against attack
by
hostile troops.
g.
area.
k.
i.
Administer
jails
and
prisons.
police system.
j.
Investigate
crimes
committed
by
and
I.
civil
and
military.
m. Exercise such control over public and private transportation as may be directed by
competent authority.
n.
disasters.
Wipe out
resistance.
c.
d.
will:
be
They should
mission of military
under martial law or in occupied territory, is to maintain law, order, and good discipline, to protect the property and inhabitants
of the area to which they are assigned, and to
enforce the ordinances of the naval commander.
MISSION.The
11-65
police,
who
column
activities.
and
local inhabitants
and feeding
when
of refugees
required.
499
500
q.
Work
affairs
in
close
cooperation
with
civil
officers.
11-66
FUNCTIONS. The
functions
of
individual situation.
is
police,
direct,
and
b.
The employment
of the
be
interpreted
as
minimum amount
and timely
strength,
action,
discourage
ORDINANCES ENFORCED.The
11-71
SUBVERSIVE ACTIVITY.a.
ers of subversive
ical
and the
strategic
and
tactical situation.
confronted with
many
situations
which vary so
The
military policeman
fall
(3)
ability
leaders.
leaders
made to realize fully that concealment of information is a punishable offense; and every
precaution must be taken not to expose the
informers to terrorism or acts of reprisal by the
subversive element.
d. Communication of information
to the
enemy must be severely and promptly dealt
with.
e.
Strong measures must be taken against
outbreaks of sabotage.
11-72 REPRISALS. It is the duty of the
military police to maintain order in an occupied
area, and not to avenge the wrongful acts of
the inhabitants. A policy of reprisals is always
The
is
likely to result.
Inability on the
to be defenseless civilians.
part of the military to give them adequate proIf
tection will discredit the occupation forces.
reprisals are
into
To
proved
e.
disperse rioters
ineffective.
To
protect their
own
lives
when
seriously
endangered by attack.
11-74
POLICE.
SUPERVISION OF CIVIL
a.
Economy
of effort
by military
police
to
is
duty as
the
continue
may
performance
be permitted to
of
their
normal
states
of
War Convention
or corps
(b)
"Measures
(c)
and public
of reprisal against
(2)
have
their person
Women
shall
due their
sex.
(b)
11-76
CAPTURE.a.
"prisoners of
for concealed
b.
civil status."
Disarming.Imme-
diately
The term
them are
Article 3
(a)
nation of captivity.
curiosity.
prohibited."
pro-
a.
world.
The Prisoners
d.
police
is
ERAL.
functions.
b.
501
weapons.
Segregation.
Immediately
after capture,
enemy
officers,
502
manner
that
to
point.
c.
Interrogation.
When
(1)
interrogation
from
team personnel.
stances of capture.
When
(2)
troops
Information.
d.
Prisoners
of
war
are
(2)
number.
Coercion.
Coercion
will
Prisoners or others
or country.
who
refuse to
may
not be threatened,
insulted, or unnecessarily exposed to unpleasant
treatment of any kind. The examination of
prisoners or others is not prohibited and provisions will always be made for such examination.
j.
Personal
effects.
The
personal effects of
circum-
all
discarding or
(3) Prevent prisoners from
destroying any document or insignia.
(4) Prevent anyone other than authorized
interrogators from talking to the prisoners.
(5)
(6)
all
times.
(7)
Collect
(8)
Documents
Routes
evacuation for
war usually follow the lines of evacuation of wounded. Prisoners of war not
wounded may be used as litter bearers for their
i.
Evacuation.
of
prisoners of
slightly
11-77
a.
movement and
and
c.
the
prisoners.
not be used on
prisoners or other personnel to obtain informae.
are
These
times.
possible,
Prevent escapes.
Maintain segregation of prisoners at
(1)
whenever
units
will:
reserve
number,
lation systems
The
enemy
per-
Red
traffic
prisoner.
identifying
Escorts.
is
plan involves
The manner
many
specific functions.
control in effect.
primary duty
cordance with
is
to
tactical requirements,
to act quickly
and
The
ability
effectively in emergencies
of prime importance.
e.
and
is
success of a
traffic-circulation
plan
Enforcing
(3)
Patrolling routes.
(4)
Furnishing information.
Rerouting of traffic when necessary.
(5)
(6
which
(7)
in
control plan
gaged in
its
It
of every
man
en-
must be remem-
police
police
/.
is
often necessary.
traffic
Regulating
traffic
Handling
Clearing
traffic
traffic accidents.
traffic
jams.
publications;
at points of actual or
(2)
rests directly
503
FM
War Department
and
Section VIII
RIOT DUTY
Par.
11-78
Definitions of crowds and mobs
1 179
11-80
Crowd tactics
11-81
Mob tactics
11-82
Formations
Platoon triangular formation for riot duty- 11-83
1 1-84
Segregation of affected areas
11-85
Intelligence
11-86
Planning
11-87
Civil disputes
General
Page
504
504
504
505
505
506
507
507
507
507
No
exact rules
mum
of violence
11-79
MOBS.
and bloodshed.
danger.
b.
504
commit
itself
to a course of un-
have
punished.
assaults
will excite it
(2)
single
piece
of
audacious
it
be
violence
(3)
stored.
d.
groups which
may
or
as a last resort.
b.
For psychological
effect,
is
should
it
be
a commander,
ever force
(1)
hesitates to
restrained violence.
crowd
is
to use what-
necessary.
Normally, the
is
this time,
the military
commander
or,
in his
commanding
officer of troops at
the scene will call upon members of the assemblage, in the name of the President of the
it is
neces-
it
arrested.
to understand that
must be courteous,
d.
MOB
absolutely necessary.
fired.
e. Blank cartridges should not be used when
combating a mob bent on violence, nor should
a volley be fired over the heads of rioters even
if there is little danger of hurting persons in
rear.
Such action will be regarded as an admission of weakness, or as an attempt to bluff,
and may do much more harm than good.
/. Bayonets are effective when used against
rioters who are able to retreat, but they should
not be used against men who are prevented by
those behind from retreating even if they
wished to do so. The appearance of fixed
bayonets has a psychological value against
not be overlooked.
employed by military
grenades
g. Tear gas
masks are a most
with
gas
equipped
forces
dispersing
a mob. Tear gas
method
of
effective
grenades should be projected to the windward
and
flank,
of its superior
and personnel
of the
armed
upon the
depending
it.
When
direction
it
is
fire
is
i.
resorted to,
the aim
11-82
When
desired to drive
d.
of
all it
dared.
A mob
hand-to-hand clashes
c.
from
marksmen should be
and above
If there is firing
commander who
505
come necessary
it,
to charge a
be-
will
mob.
506
b.
(1)
of
mob
mob.
Figure
In
in front
mob
7.
will
be driven directly
the flanks.
(2) Marching in parallel columns with the
columns in echelon as indicated:
employment
of a regular
combat formation.
Figure
t
8.
BASE
"SQUAD
O O
direction
d)
<s>
<d
R|GHT
REAR
o *""'
SQUAD
d)
d>
<k
MSGRS
<t>
fcSQDLDR
LEFT
REAR O
"" D
<
(J)
SQDLDR<X>
<X>SQDLDR
indicated:
6
PLT.
O
G>
6 o
PLT GUIDE
PO
<b
(D
o
Figure
Figure
9.
10.
RESERVE
FT
members
Men
of the
in the
mob who
may
507
information.
must be
may
b.
carefully
develop into
riots.
agencies
are
usually
most dependable
Records and knowledge
the
sources of information.
butt strokes
to the
as a club.
11-84
AREAS.
SEGREGATION OF AFFECTED
a.
If
the disorder
is
confined to a
must
against.
authority.
11-85
organizations,
maximum.
11-87
opposing factions
(as
in labor disputes),
The
INTELLIGENCE.a. An intelligence
and not
is
to reestablish
to
their duties
difficulties,
mestic disorders.
its
79528750-
-33
all
needed
the
must be one
destruction.
Fires
possessed
severest tests.
It
Section
IX
NATIONAL DISASTERS
Page
Par.
11-8
National disasters.
508
NATIONAL DISASTERS. a. A
11-88
local
Circumstances will
and
indicate the form of assistance to be rendered.
b. Depending on the extent of the disaster,
the military may be called upon to take complete control or merely to assist local authority.
In cases of disaster, the express order of the
President of the United States is not necessary
to secure the aid of the military, and in such
cases the military is subordinate to the local
authorities
citizens.
by the commander
The
military forces
relief organizations.
In the event of foreign disasters, the situabe handled by our own forces present,
or by those of a combination of friendly nations
until taken over by the forces of the nation
c.
tion
may
concerned.
members
All
relief of
e.
succor the
into
districts
and each
district
If
will
be the principal
Ch.
I.
sanitation
is
articles required.
<
Proper
of vital importance.
(See
7.)
Issuing
stations
for
rations
should
be
assigned to an organization.
/. All possible civilian organizations such as
established.
church, business, veteran, and fraternal organizations, should be contacted and put on a
it is
working basis under their own leaders. Unorganized civilians should be grouped under these
organizations and put to work.
g. Among the first steps to be taken are the
508
Civil-
camp
duties.
be
guarding of federal buildings, the banking district, and the prevention of looting.
Ghouls
and looters should be dealt with summarily.
In the event of a threatened food shortage,
guards should be placed over food supplies in
warehouses, wharves, railroad yards, and in
transit through the city.
h. Working parties should be organized to
to civilians depends
upon the
situation.
Past
As soon as
large quantities by "repeating."
opportunity permits, establish means for keep-
'
509
or meals
(5)
"Shelter."
(6)
"Approved water."
"Food center."
all
stores
When
insure a conservation of food supplies.
reopened,
arrangements
are
restaurants
civilian
can be made to issue meal tickets at a low cost
or
free
of
charge.
Ration-issuing
made
to reestablish outside
commercial
(8)
"Information center."
(9)
stations
effort
(7)
(10)
"First-aid station."
An
pitals
to deceased
Relief
forces
(1)
"Dangerous area."
(2)
"Restricted area."
(3)
"Relief station."
(4)
"Latrines."
strictly enforced.
12
PHYSICAL DRILL
511
Chapter
12
PHYSICAL DRILL
Par.
Section
I.
General
Formations
III. Physical Drill Without Arms
IV. Physical Drill With Arms
II.
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
513
515
516
517
518
Section
GENERAL
Par.
General.
12-1
Page
515
may
rope climbing,
etc.
be adjusted and
adapted to the space and facilities available.
Physical drill should be conducted by an individual of good voice and physique, who will
execute all exercises correctly, vigorously, and
in are set forth as a guide, to
enthusiastically.
515
f
Section II
FORMATIONS
Par.
12-2
Formations.
leg sideward,
516
lighting
FORMATIONS. a.
The formation
conduct of physical drill
is simple and compact, yet flexible enough to
be adapted to most space limitations.
6.
Without arms.
(1) The unit or group to
be drilled is formed in columns of twos, threes,
or fours, depending on the space available.
12-2
recommended
for the
1.
take interval
(2) At the command:
to the left, 2. MARCH, the right squad
man
stands
fast,
ward (shoulder
each
height),
in the
normal distance.
(4)
at the
Men
(5)
To
516
files
MARCH;
2.
all
men
return to
on the double.
drilled is
(D.)
(2)
At the command:
to the left,
2.
take interval
1.
MARCH,
arms sideward
hand holding the rifle,
left hand palm down fingers extended and
joined.
The center and left squads (files)
(file)
stands
extends
fast,
(carrying the
rifle
left,
and face
arms sideward
hand holding the rifle,
hand palm down, in a manner similar to
to the front, extend
between
conduct the
to
assemble,
1.
between
now formed
are
exercise.
MOVE,
2.
right,
moves
on
To lower
files,
and
Section III
Physical
drill
12-3
without arms
12-3
drill,
physical
drill
Page
517
Manual
517
Section IV
12- 4
Come
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
to ready
12
Front sweeps
Overhead twists
Side twists
GENERAL. a. With
12-4
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-14
Forward lunges
518
518
518
519
520
520
520
520
520
521
521
the exception of
come
to
four times.
b.
The
mand,
exercises
may
be executed by com-
ready
Figure
will
1.
End
mand:
4.
COME TO READY,
1.
2.
ONE,
the com3.
TWO,
THREE.
ONE Raise
grasp
right
finger
it
TWOLower
body
of first count.
Figure 2. Come
to ready.
the
Keep the
well back.
with arms.
12-6
(See
movements
in physical drill
fig. 3.)
be assumed.
Come to ready.
518
COME TO READY.At
12-5
General
End
of second count.
Figure 3. Come
to ready.
End
exer-
of third count.
cise the
At the command:
ONE,
3.
TWO,
4.
ONE From
2.
519
ONE From
zontally forward.
(See
fig. 5.)
TWOBack to ready.
THREE Push
(See
fig. 4.)
TWOBack to ready.
THREE Push
ward.
(See
fig. 5.)
FOUR Back
Figure
4.
to ready.
End
of first count.
Figure
Figure
12-7
5.
End
6.
End of third
count.
of third count.
exercise
ONE,
3.
TWO,
4.
THREE
5.
FOUR.
Figure 7. Up and
shoulders.
End
of
second count.
520
head,
(See
extended
fig. 6.)
FOURBack to
12-8
ready.
UP AND SHOULDERS.To
exercise
up and shoulders,
4.
THREE,
5.
ONE From
2.
ONE,
TWO,
3,
FOUR.
ready, push the piece hori-
zontally overhead.
TWO-Lower
(See
fig. 6.)
(See
fig. 7.)
12-9
SIDE PUSHES.To exercise the
rotary muscles of the body, thighs, and the
loin.
At the command: 1. side pushes, 2.
ONE,
3.
TWO,
ONE From
THREE,
4.
5.
FOUR.
ready, push the piece horizontally to right side, twisting the body,
keeping the eyes on the piece, and keeping the
heels firmly on the ground.
(See fig. 8.)
Back to ready.
TWO
THREE Push
in
ONE above.
FOUR Back
exercise
At the
TWO,
4.
1.
Diagonal lunges.
Knd
of first count.
ONE
to ready.
DIAGONAL LUNGES.To
command:
9.
left side, as
12-10
Figure
diagonal lunges,
THREE,
5.
2.
ONE,
3.
piece.
flat.
(See
TWOBack to ready.
FOUR.
THREELunge
left foot, as in
ONE
fig. 9.)
on the
above.
exercise
THREE
FOUR.
ONE From
TWO
ONE above.
FOUR Back to ready.
12-12 FRONT SWEEPS.To
as in
exercise all
End
of first count.
ONE,
3.
TWO,
4.
THREE,
5.
FOUR,
521
ONE,
FOUR Lower
above).
End
of
second count.
OVERHEAD TWISTS. To
12-13
exercise
THREE,
6.
FOUR.
BUTT front:
10.
Forward lunges.
ONE From
End of first
same time
twist
(See
piece horizontal.
fig. 13.)
TWO Twist
it
Keep the
directly forward.
count.
Hold the
movement
TWO Lower
(See
fig. 6.)
to the
upper part
of the body.
THREE Twist
arms straight
back
(See
fig.
14.)
directly forward.
to
ready,
at the
twist
TWOTwist
it
until
(See
the muzzle
fig. 14.)
(See
fig.
13.)
FOUR Lower
SIDE TWISTS. a. To
12-14
exercise the
and emphasizing
11 and 12.)
THREE Raise
11.
Front sweeps.
the
out-reach.
2.
(See
figs.
ONE,
3.
TWO,
ONE From
4.
THREE,
5.
FOUR.
TWO
522
(See
fig. 16.)
At the end
of this exercise
come
to
arms.
Figuke
13.
Overhead twist.
Butt
front.
twist.
End
of second count.
Side twist.
End
of fourth count.
Figure
14.
Overhead twist.
Muzzle
front.
smartly to the
directly
Figure
16.
order
13
SMALL-ARMS MARKSMANSHIP
523
79528750
34
IIM^
Chapter
13
I.
II.
III.
IV. Positions
V. Trigger Squeeze
VI. Kapid Fire
VII. Elevation and Windage; Safety Precautions; Examination on
Preparatory Exercises
VIII. Courses Qualifications and Expert Medals
IX. Eange Procedure
X. Care and Cleaning Ml Rifle
XL The Pistol
XII. Miscellaneous Weapons
XIII. Competition Rules; Trophies,
Par.
Page
13-1
527
534
538
542
547
549
13-10
13-24
13-31
13-42
13-47
13-53
13-61
13-69
13-82
13-89
131
13-117
13-132
13-139
553
556
562
567
570
577
578
586
592
Section
Par.
13-1
Object
Scope
Ships and stations that fire
Training stationsPersonnel to be trained
Methods to be followed
527
527
527
527
527
528
528
528
528
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
Marines
Small-arms year
Arms
13-3
THAT
FIRE.
All
vessels in a
by type commanders.
arms
exercises as prescribed
13-1
OBJECT. The
prescribed herein
most
is
to prepare the
effective use in
war
Navy
for the
may
be accom-
small arms.
plished
it
is
habits
of
Men in the
No
officers.
must be kept
details
of
in
mind by
organization
which do not
or
all
of
assist
13-2
SCOPE.The
herein.
in scope is
Collective firing, or
and for this reason cannot be profitably employed until after the invision of the instructor,
It
is
Advantage
commissioned
by the time
commandavailable.
13-4
at
marksmanship
training.
This instruc-
PERSONNEL TO BE TRAINED.
13-5
sufficient
nition
(1) All cadet, new officer, and officer candidate training should include a thorough course
in rifle
(2)
and
pistol
marksmanship.
courses
when
rifle
and
pistol
once a year. In addition, all officers and enlisted men should fire an annual practice with
the weapon with which normally armed.
(3) All enlisted men first entering the service
should be given a thorough course in rifle marks-
527
528
manship during
opportunity thereafter.
All
enlisted
duties as
members
(4)
is
sults
when properly
operating condition.
officers
demands of
methods of
more
than one
uniform.
Where
training be
equally
methods
be
method is used, even if these
effort
will be
and
good, a great loss of time
method
to the
caused by transfers from one
other.
For this reason the prescribed methods
is
the service, it
are
is
regulations
and
enlisted
men
Navy
available
medals
courses only
for
courses.
Navy
is
not
Navy
courses.
SMALL-ARMS YEAR.The
arms year
13-9
Marine Corps
facilities are
will
qualification in
13-8
when
from
small-
July to 30 June.
ARMS. Unless
otherwise stated,
all
incumbent on
all
not violated.
.30,
This
commonly called the "Ml".
Use. Ship's landing
NEGDF,
rifle is
parties,
drill
(b)
Operation
ated,
loaded,
clip
air
cooled.
Caliber
0.30 inches.
Over-all length
43.6 inches.
Clip capacity
8 rounds.
Weight
Muzzle velocity
2,600
10.3
pounds
(w/sling).
ft./sec.
(Ml
ball
Muzzle velocity
2,800
ft./sec.
(M2
ball
ammo.).
Practical rate of aimed fire*- 12 shots per/min.
Maximum
effective range.
Dependent on
500 yards.
existing circumstances.
(c)
Reference:
(1)
War Department
S. Rifle,
Caliber
.30,
War Department
Technical Manual,
Ordnance Maintenance, U. S. Rifle, Caliber .30,
9-1275, c. 1.
Ml,
(2)
TM
Ml and M1A1.
.30,
This weapon
(a) Use.
weapon or in lieu of the pistol.
It is the basic arm of construction battalions,
and used as a security weapon aboard ships
and in the NEGDF at shore stations.
is
used
as a replacement
(b)
General data:
Operation
gas
Semiautomatic,
operated, magazine,
Ordnance.
Length
Over-all length
Magazine capacity
18 inches.
35.5 inches.
15 rounds.
ammo.)
U.
MARINES. Officers
is
It is
for the
designed
its
made mandatory.
13-7
and men
re-
Having due
carried out.
be repairs.
to
METHODS
tested
considered
are
of barrel
5.25 pounds.
Maximum
aimed
fire*
effective range
Dependent on
existing circumstances.
2,000 ft./sec.
193 grains.
10 shots per/min.
300 yards.
Figure
1 The U.
Figure 2. The U.
(c)
Ml.
Reference:
Caliber
0.45 inches.
War Department
Over-all length
31.9 inches.
20 rounds.
10 pounds.
802 ft. /sec.
234 grains.
TM
.45,
for ships
(6)
Ml.
S. rifle .30,
529
MlAl
(a)
in special instances
General data:
Operation
Bullet weight
Practical rate of aimed
fire:
Automatic
Semiautomatic
Maximum
effective range:
Slow fire
Automatic
Note. The
1928A1,
the
200 yards.
25 yards.
Ml, and the MlAl are
issued
inter-
changeably.
automatic or semiautomatic.
Figure
3.
(c)
Reference:
(1)
War Department
.45,
MlAl.
530
1.
(a)
Use.
Security
.45
weapon
M3
War Department
c 1, 2. 3,
Department Technical
(2) War
Ordnance Maintenance TM 9-1217.
BROWNING AUTOMATIC
IBER
Manual,
RIFLE, CAL-
.30,
landing
ment
Air cooled, blowback
operated, magazine
for
NEGDF.
General data:
(b)
Gas operated,
Caliber
0.45 inches.
cooled,
Over-all length
29.8 inches.
fed,
air
magazine
and automatic
or
semiautomatic.
Operation
fed.
Magazine capacity
Muzzle velocity
30 rounds.
900 ft. /sec.
Maximum effective range
200 yards.
Cyclic rate of fire
450 shots per/min
Overall weight (full magazine) __ 10.25 pounds.
Note. This weapon
may
fire
fires full
General data:
Operation
Reference:
and
in special
(c)
Caliber
0.30 inches.
Over-all length
47 inches.
20 rounds.
19.4 pounds.
40 shots per/min.
600 yards.
Magazine capacity
Weight (complete)
Practical rate of aimed
Maximum
sileng rounds.
fire
effective range
c
Figure
4.
rifle,
.45,
caliber
M3A1.
.30,
M1918A2.
Figure
(c)
Reference:
(1)
War Department
M1918A2
with bipod
type.
Automatic
Browning
C Shotgun, riot
531
Rifle,
(FM
23-15) c
1, 2.
Manual,
Ordnance Maintenance, Browning Automatic
Department
"War
(2)
Technical
weapons
in special instances
a.
6.
Reference:
Department Technical
(1) "War
Ordnance Maintenance, Shotguns,
(TM
Manual,
all
types
9-1285).
and
arm
It
officers.
is
for officers
It
is
used
a defensive weapon.
General data:
(b)
Operation
semiauto-
Recoil,
matic.
Caliber
Length
Figure
0.45 inches.
5. 03
of barrel
inches.
Over-all length
8.6 inches.
2.437 pounds.
802 ft./sec.
230 grains.
Bullet weight.. __
Practical rate of
Maximum
aimed
effective range
standard side
(b)
General data:
Manual,
Operation
(c)
Reference:
(1)
War Department
(FM
(2)
.45,
(TM
Basic Field
War Department
Ordnance Maintenance,
9-1295).
single
double action.
Manual
Caliber
.45.
REVOLVER, SMITH & WESSON, CALIBER .38. (a) Use. This revolver was adopted
as a substitute
10 shots per/min.
50 yards.
fire
7.
Technical
Pistols,
c 1, 2.
Manual,
and Revolvers
0.38 inches.
Caliber
Length
4.0 inches.
of barrel
9.125 inches.
29 ounces.
Over-all length
Weight
Muzzle velocity
847 ft./sec.
158 grains.
Bullet weight
Practical rate of
Maximum
aimed
fire
effective range
6 shots per/min.
50 yards.
or
532
(c)
Reference:
No government manual
weapon but the
is
published on this
War Department
M1917, and
Revolver, Smith & Wesson, Caliber .45, M1917,
Revolver,
c
1, 2.
Caliber
Colt,
(FM
.45,
(TM
9-1295).
manship
training.
General data:
(b)
(The characteristics of
23-36).
this
weapon, except
U. S. Automatic
a.
Figure 9. The
Ace.
(a)
.22.
ship training.
(b)
caliber .22,
"Mossberg," U.
S. 44)
Operation
Bolt,
repeating,
magazine
Length
Weight
of barrel
Maximum
Short,
iC
100 yards.
effective range
Magazine capacity
Note.
fed.
40 inches.
26 inches.
8 pounds.
Over-all length
7 rounds.
rounds
may
be
fired,
but the
latter
are preferred.
(c)
Reference:
b.
Figure
8.
.38.
types
(TM
Manual,
Rifles, all
9-280).
mSmm
"-'nw>iiH.ra-mu'>fci
Figure 10 The U.
caliber .30,
H.
B.,
533
M1919A4, ground.
(6)
Operation
Caliber
0.30 inches.
Weight
Gun
31.5 pounds.
41.11 inches.
Over-all length
Muzzle velocity
ammo.)
Muzzle velocity
ammo.)
Cy cli c
(c)
rate of
16.5 pounds.
24 inches.
(M-2
ball
(M-l
ball
2800
ft./sec.
2600 ft./sec.
450-625 rounds per/
min.
fire
Reference:
(TM
9-1205) c
1.
FiCTjp.E 12.
A. Cartridge, carbine,
cal. .30.
B. Cartridge, revolver,
cal. .38.
C. Cartridge,
D. Cartridge,
F. Shell, shotgun.
F. Shell, shotgun,
G. Cartridge,
riot.
Section II
preparatory exercises
in small-arms instruction
in
Thorough training
essential
Method
of instruction
\534
oa
13-11
13-12
13-13
534
534
535
535
535
coe
53o
535
536
536
536
536
537
537
1.3-14
T
\ n
fo
13-10
._
. .
13-15
io
ie
13-16
13-17
13-18
13-19
13-20
.13-21
13-22
13-23
own
m itted
,
operations.
to proceed
j.
13-10
is taken up in
taught to align their
sights correctly.
As soon as their education
has reached a point where they do this, without
the operation absorbing their whole attention,
they are taught the proper method of holding,
and to combine holding with aiming. When
they can aim and hold, without having to give
these combined operations then whole attention, they are taught the proper method of
squeezing the trigger, and to combine this
operation with aiming and holding. Each operation is thus added to what has gone before.
During the first step the men are taught to aim
During the second step they are
correctly.
taught to hold while aiming. During the third
step they are taught to squeeze the trigger while
aiming and holding. During the fourth step
men are taught to manipulate the piece so as to
order.
The men
are
first
enable them to repeat the three essential operations without loss of time between shots.
The
men under
in-
.-,
book
and use
of the score
be given, at times within the discretion of tlie j ns truc tor, prior to the examination.
will
gTEps
crnniT^mmv tIn
STRUCTION.
instruction
OSES.In
is
N SMALL ARMS
.
teaching
men
IN .
to shoot, the
Preparatory exercises.
Range
firing.
is
commenced.
535
Even
be found insufficient
for a considerable percentage of the men under
instruction. Habits once formed, however, are
tenacious and will remain active over long
periods of time without further practice. Training which stops short of habit formation is very
largely wasted, and the effects of such incomplete training will almost entirely disappear
within the space of a few months. When the
amount
training
is
of practice will
little
13-13
DURATION OF INSTRUCTION
PERIODS. The length of the practice period
is
limited
by the
training period
and that
if
each day.
Where the
training period extends over the weekend, at
least one practice period should be held on
Saturday. A training period which is to extend
over the parts of two weeks should be started
on Monday, as otherwise the smaller amount of
training received before the weekend combined
tice
periods be held
training.
13-15
CONTINUITY OF TRAINING.
the range
immediately after the completion
of the preparatory exercises. While the manner
of correct performance of the essential operations has been taught during the preparatory
exercises, the habit of correct performance of
these operations does not become fixed until
after a week or more of practice in range firing.
The training being incomplete at the end of the
period of preparatory exercises, a break in the
firing follow
in preparatory exercises
largely wasted
if
ately followed
by the range
13-16
thus
firing.
arm
is
fire
mechanical operations:
(1) Aligning the sights with each other and
with the point of aim.
(2) Holding the weapon so that the sights
remain in correct alignment while the trigger
is being squeezed.
(3) Squeezing the trigger in such a manner
as not to disturb the sight alignment before the
piece
is fired.
fire
the shot.
It
is
preferable to
aim
is
13-17
QUIRED.
AMOUNT OF PRACTICE
From
RE-
22 to 30 hours' preparatory
cal. firing,
concen-
week and
fol-
536
The
alternation of duties so
faulty habits
an opportunity to
caused by faulty performance
and better enables him to avoid such mistakes.
(4) It tends to develop the ability of the
(3)
men
much
men would
season.
of qualifications.
QUALITY OF INSTRUCTION.
13-18
The
No pains
men under
highest.
ing the
manner.
reflect
Men
under
instruction
inevitably
he
If
of interest
and
to
No
de-
13-19
is
COACH-AND-PUPIL METHOD.
For purposes
of instruction the
gether in pairs.
men work
"firer,"
to-
performs
men
will, at
the direc-
he who was
vice versa.
in this
of the training,
fatigue.
(2)
see the
cations.
of interest
brought about
bad
effects
as instructors.
13-20
The work
ing
is
Nothand attention
more destructive
to interest
to do.
He must have
a good teacher.
is
first
that he be
the ability to
narily follow
men
to accept
them without
question.
This
however, makes
it all
who
IN-
STRUCTION.The
and
is
backward
13-23
cases.
METHOD OF INSTRUCTION.
The schedule
of instruction for
each step
is
as
follows
(1)
men under
in the step.
is
going to say.
It
must
written lecture.
and confined
to the step
under immediate
consideration.
sity
for exactness
operations
must be
in
the performance of
all
stressed.
man
is
what he
instruction.
(2)
exactly
OFFICER IN CHARGE OF
13-22
know
537
officer
giving
it will
Section III
Blackening sights
Par.
Page
13-24
13-25
13-26
13-27
13-28
13-29
13-30
538
538
539
540
540
540
541
rifle.
The use
putting over the subject of nomenclature. Assembly and disassembly by groups under instruction are excellent methods of teaching
nomenclature simultaneously.
Disassembly of the U. S. Rifle, cal. .30 Ml is
broken down in three main groups; i. e. (1)
Stock Group, (2) Barrel and Receiver Group,
and (3) Trigger Housing Group. To disassemble the three main groups proceed as follows:
THE RIFLE
and
forefinger
GROUPS:
2,
3.
13-25
DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN
538
14.
Butt plate.
of the rifle.
ing
GROUPS. Grasp
it
with the
drift or
in
Grasp bullet guide, follower ann, and operating rod catch assembly
and pull to the left until these parts are disenside with left hand.
<
hammer.
Do
from
lower
539
To remove
out of
its
trigger housing.
slide.
Figure
Figure
15.
Hold
16.
This
will
thumb on
trigger,
back on
firm support,
thumb
trigger pin
finger, gradually
permitting
hammer
spring to
-35
trigger housing
right
safety,
Swing
trigger guard to
hand.
Slide trigger
hammer
trigger guard.
thumb on
13-26
AIMING.
540
memory
so that
any
error of alignment
is in-
stantly recognized.
b.
sight
The
sight.
17.
Receiver.
firing.
rargj
a.
is
shown
in figure 19.
It will
at the target.
rect
method
of sighting
is
easily learned
Open
sight.
Peep
sight.
and
ING.
Keeping the
AIMING.
sights
or distortion.
The appearance
is
of the properly
impressed on the
of
explained and
diagrams and the
is
Device.
The use
of
is
illustrated
by the use
Instructional
the
sighting
Sighting
device
is
541
first
preparatory
Sights,
Figure 19A.
and aiming.
Figure
20.
Section IV
POSITIONS
Use
of the sling
all
Prone position
Sitting position
Standing position
Kneeling position. _
13-31
13-32
13-33
13-34
13-35
_
positions. 13-36
13-37
13-38
13-39
13-40
13-41
13-31
55
542
542
542
543
543
544
544
544
545
546
sling
is
rifle,
no discomfort.
Untrained men, however, always believe that the
adjusted
sling
causes
This is
properly adjusted sling is too tight.
due to the fact that they have not learned to
relax properly
that there
surprisingly
is
little
ent builds.
left
is
elbow
by men
of differ-
is
prohibited.
542
difference in the
USE OF
in the use
-,
arm
Each
Subsequent instruction
with
the
methods
instruction
of
in
positions
and the
assuming them,
13-33
MENT. To
so that
With the
upper arm.
held approximately hori-
left
rifle
hand
band.
13-34
TION.
it will
IMPORTANCE OF GOOD
good position
best results in
rifle
POSI-
a requisite to the
shooting.
The better the
is
the
easier
it
is
to hold,
and conse-
quently the
less
peculiarities.
practice.
The
the untrained
assuming these
will disappear with
in
initial difficulties
men produce
experienced by
a tendency to depart
in
some
cases
543
in
position.
These tendencies should be
immediately checked and all men required to
use the standard positions. A good position
with adequate training is preferable to a better
position with less training.
by the body
the involuntary
movements
these
sights, it will
the target.
conscious effort
is
required to
When
what
some-
is
The
when
the attention
is
relaxed.
then correct only when the desired aiming point lies well within the area on
position
is
is
re-
laxed.
of the target
on which the
yards.
d.
The
firer's
The
rifle
at
all
arms
times.
544
(2) He can reload with
major change of position.
During the
i.
final
and the
in
sling
adjustment
is
strain.
g.
instruction
followed
/.
The
without any
facility
the
men
The correct
method of doing this is to:
(1) Take an ordinary breath.
(2) Let out somewhat less than half of it.
(3) Hold the rest by closing the throat and
not by muscular effort. The muscles of the diaphragm should be relaxed.
13-37
INSTRUCTION IN POSITION.
a. The officer in charge of instruction starts
13-33.
method
differs
services,
but
it is
wooden
on which
it is
desired to
(2)
(3)
sling.
(4)
The method
of
tion.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
through
(3)
The
(4)
and second
through (3), and
first
at the
(5)
man
left
same time
Throw
slide
both
(6)
Bring
right elbow
b.
rifle
to
on the ground.
Description.
This
is
the
most steady
is
member
In
no
13-39
of his
same operations.
It should be remembered that the amount of
training will depend on the number of times
is
of all
used.
left-
on the bent
toes.
Requiring each man of a pair to repeatedly perform the various operations in the
Requiring each
Place
elbow and
(8).
(1)
(2)
position.
sling
line of fire.
are
dug
into
the bottoms of
The
heels
The
545
front sight
is
hand takes up
As far as practicable
muscles are relaxed. The breath is held as
scribed in paragraph 13-36 (i). The right
the
the
up
deeye
is now closed for a few seconds and then opened.
The point on the target at which the sights are
directed is noted when the eye opens. If this
point is not the desired point of aim, the
23.
Sitting position.
The body
is
Figure
The
24.
Sitting position
to
the
line
of fire
(alternate).
fortable extent
Figure
25.
Standing position.
546
rifle
is
seconds and
when opened
is
The
relaxed.
13-33.
to the right
b.
The
front sight
is
The
13-41
sling
noted.
is
position
is
and dropping
left foreleg is
left
The
left
elbow
body
b.
is
inclined forward.
On assuming
front sight
is
are relaxed.
As
slack
Proper breathing
is
(i).
necessary as
The
right
eye
the point on the target at which the sights are
directed is noted. If this point is not the point
is
of
Figure 26. Kneeling
position.
aim
shift the
body
up
Section
TRIGGER SQUEEZE
Importance
of trigger squeeze
13-42
Page
547
547
547
547
548
IMPORTANCE OF TRIGGER
SQUEEZE.
most
Par.
13-42
13-43
13-44
13-45
13-46
is
the
Men who
of flinching
due
is
anticipated.
of
is
the
is fired,
Flinching
natural
reaction.
All
men
is
unless
will,
The impulse
it.
habitual
that
to flinch
men who
is
so natural
flinch
and
so
seldom
are
aware of the fact that they do so. The movement due to the recoil ordinarily masks the
movement due to the flinch which immediately
other position.
difficult to
make good
13-43
SQUEEZE.
The mechanical
The
is
operation of the
is
applied straight
an unbalanced
a sidewise deflection
The pressure on the trigger is
pressure,
which
of the shot.
will cause
the
sear.
Sudden,
it is
jerky
sufficient to re-
make
increases
it
of
impossible
precedes
c.
it.
Flinching demonstrated.
make men
It
sometimes
is
This
until they
is difficult,
cation that he
13-45
is
flinching.
METHODS OF PREVENTING
FLINCHING.
Careful
instruction
is
neces-
548
man
to fire
difficult for
him
indication that he
are
The muscles
a.
d.
If
relaxed.-
released, it
is
It
however, very
is,
is
fall of
difficult to
keep
and be able
tion,
to
assume
easily, before
it
In order
given.
is
b.
The
firer is
He
fired.
is
The persistent
up
applied
is
straight
back in a line
there is no un-
is
is
effort
to the
the
pressure
gradually.
When
the
is
flinching.
the
first
the
firer
The purpose
aims.
how
of this is to
show
is
firer
properly
to
squeezed.
The
firer,
instructor
takes
wrist with
right
The
thumb
the
is
trigger
with a
and
forefinger.
the
instructor
it is
an
13-46
INSTRUCTION IN TRIGGER
SQUEEZE.
The instructor explains the importance of the trigger squeeze and the correct
method of performing it. He then selects one
pair from the men to be instructed and demonstrates the method of detecting flinching by
watching the firer's eye, and the method in
which the coach squeezes the trigger while the
firer aims.
The "firers" and "coaches" are
then required to assume their correct positions,
and the instructor assures himself that these
positions are correct before the individual instruction is allowed to proceed.
Succeeding
periods are begun in a similar manner with an
explanation and a demonstration. During the
second period the instruction should be confined to the prone position only.
In subsequent
periods the first instruction is given in the prone
position followed by instruction in the sitting,
kneeling, and standing positions.
Section VI
RAPID FIRE
Page
Par.
13-47
13^48
13-49
13-50
13-51
13-52
Rapid fire
Cadence exercises
Second rapid-fire exercises
Reloading the rifle
Third rapid-fire exercise
Instruction steps
13-47
fire is
549
550
551
551
551
552
the un-
no
in place.
The
position rapidly
is
doing
it
by the numbers
in
five counts:
Being at the ready with loop sling adhand just below the stock ferrule
swivel and the right hand at the heel of the
butt, bend both knees to the ground and lean
back slightly.
(1)
(2)
rifle
on
Place the
(3)
left
right
Sitting.
Mark and
27.
Sit
down
To get in
in the spot
marked
for
the
Kneeling position.
ing position.
Mark
550
To assume
(1)
its
marked
place.
(2)
Put the
(3)
With the
left
arm
in position.
hand on the
position.
After several practices of assuming the posiby the numbers, the pupils then
assume the positions individually until they
tions rapidly
hammer
falls.
The
instructor
Figure
28.
Figure
29.
conducted
551
Figure
30.
and
sitting positions.
if
more
easily
and
latch.
bolt
may
The
closing
often be aided
hand.
RIGHT.
them
beside
exercises.
practiced for
all
Figure
31.
Reloading in sitting
fire.
Notes
1. In sitting and kneeling rapid fire, 60 seconds are
allowed for firing 16 rounds. This allows 3 seconds
per shot, 7 seconds for assuming the position, and 5
seconds for reloading.
2. In prone rapid fire 65 seconds are allowed for
firing 16 rounds.
This allows 3 seconds per shot, 10
seconds for assuming the position, and 7 seconds for
reloading.
3. Although 3 seconds per round are allowed in
actual firing, 4 seconds per shot are allowed in dry
firing to compensate for the manual operation of the
Figure
32.-
and prone
positions.
552
use of
reloading.
rapid
'
(1)
The
(2)
command
When
same
fire.
of the in-
TARGETS.
command lock
load he inserts first clip
cartridges
ready on the firing
'
dummy
and
when he
receives the
(3)
squeezes
off
dummy
cartridges
in
firing.
(4)
The
clip is
properly loaded.
'
(2)
(3)
air.
Section VII
Scales
Elevation rule
Wind-gage
Wind
Wind
rule
clock
correction
Examination
13-53
changes
knob
Page
13-53
13-54
13-55
13-56
1 3-57
553
553
553
553
553
13 58
13-59
13-60
554
554
how
fast
travels.
it
The
Range
flags
are often
velocity of
554
be
made by
i.
e.,
rule states
one inch on
13-55
13-56
Figure
the range
it is
33.
breeze
13-57
is
Range
Xwind velocity
IF"
= Number of clicks
(in
hundreds)
if
12-mile wind at 3
o'clock
horizontal
used in describing the direction
of the wind.
Visualize the shooter standing
in the center of a huge clock facing north.
A
wind from the south would be a 6 o'clock wind,
from the west a 9 o'clock wind, etc. The
velocity of the wind is described in miles per
hour. Velocity may be determined by throwing up dry grass, paper, dust, etc., and watching
wind clock
3X12
3.6 or 4 clicks
10
is
is
is
moved
right, the
554
13-58
of a
rifle
is
zero
rear sight
(300 yards
is
The
After arriving
and
the
set
i.
e.,
the clicks
TORY EXERCISES.
to
line
with a loaded
ON PREPARA-
where
The whole
b.
Q.
A.
Positions.
How
Take
Q.
To
rifle
When
it,
rest
of the
trigger?
A.
As soon
as I
by the instructor.)
Q. Assume the prone position, the sitting
position, the kneeling, and the standing position.
(Verified by the instructor.)
make
13-59
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.Safety
On
it
open.
loaded.
keep
Trigger squeeze.
How
know
bull's-eye.
rifle
goes off?
On
it
c.
A.
(5)
Q.
(Verified
the firing
line, if
the
rifle is
loaded,
<C
How
Q.
in rapid
Q.
A.
fire?
A. In the same
Do you have
Q.
way
as in slow
fire.
Q.
in rapid fire?
A. No.
Rapid fire.
d.
Q.
rapid
fire;
by the
e.
Q.
/.
(Verified
Q.
g.
How
it.
first
rifle?
Q.
Safety precautions.
How
do you know
that
the
rifle
is
unloaded?
A. I look in the chamber and in the magazine
as soon as I pick it up.
Q.
How
rifle
when not on
The range
move
when
by the
effect
would blow
Care.
A. I
moved.
sights to
What
3 o'clock
by moving the
A. One inch
a 5 o'clock wind?
15 on my starboard quarter
instructor.)
is
A wind
Sight setting.
What
am
555
instructor.)
79528750-
-36
Q.
Change your
At what
things do
A. I point the
(Verified
I
want
to shoot.
rifle
rifle?
Section VIII
Par.
Those who
fire
Courses to be fired
Course K, .22 cal. rifle
Course L, .22 cal. pistol
Course A, rifle marksman
Course B, rifle expert
Course C, carbine
Course D, pistol marksman
Course E, pistol expert
Course F, revolver expert
Course G, submachine gun
Course H, ground machine gun
Course I, automatic rifle
Course J, boat machine gun
Proficiency
Qualification for expert medals
Duration of qualification
13-61
THOSE
13-61
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-62
13-63
13-64
13-64
13-65
13-66
13-67
13-68
men
to
Time
(feet)
No
limit
seconds
.do
40 seconds
8 shots.
45
shots _
COURSES TO BE FIRED.a.
the
whom
Target
Position
Sling
Standing
Hasty.
Sitting
Loop
or hasty.
Do.
Kneeling
Prone
Sitting from standing
Kneeling from standing
Prone from standing
Loop.
Loop
or hasty.
Do.
Loop.
Note.
This
68
136
course
is
Course
Range
Kind
(feet)
L.
in miniature.
.22-caliber pistol
Time
of fire
None
50
Position
limit
Standing.
do
Total shots
Maximum
score
Qualifying score.
556
In-
man
SB-A-2
SB-A-2
SB-A-2
SB-A-2
SB-D-2
SB-D-2
SB-D-2
.-.do
13-62
struction practice.
qualified as ex-
limit
_--_do
.--.do
rifle
Officers
Shots
the
fire
561
Coursb K.
fire
marksman's course. With this exception, officers and men who satisfactorily complete the
Range
556
556
556
556
557
557
557
558
558
558
558
559
559
559
550
560
Target
B-2
B-3
Shots
20
40
400
220
Time
(yards)
200
Rifle
marksman
Position
Target
Shots
limit
A.
557
Sling
None
Standing
Hasty.
....do
....do
....do
30 seconds.
35 seconds
Sitting
Loop or
Do.
Kneeling
Prone
Sitting from standing.
Prone from standing-
hasty.
Loop.
Loop
or hasty.
Loop.
36
180
130
Maximum
score
-.-
Note. This course may be fired once for practice and the second time for record,
a preliminary course prior to firing the expert course (Course B).
Course
Range
Time
(yards)
4
4
16
16
16
A
A
A
D
D
D
200
do
do
do
300
500
intended as
Rifle ex-pert
Target
Shots
limit
B.
It is only
Position
Sling
Standing.
Sitting
Kneeling.
Sitting from standing
Kneeling from standing..
Prone from standing .
Prone _ _
.
Do.
Do.
Do.
_.
.
Loop.
Loop.
Maximum
score
68
340
306
292
268
Marksman
Note.
firer is
Time
(yards)
100
200
Instruction
Range
Time
5
5
5
do
do
.do.
Range
Time
(sec-
Shots
onds)
(yards)
40
40
40
40
40
100
100
200
200
200
8 (2 magazines, 4 each)
do
-do
A
A
B
B
B
Position
Standing.
Target
Maximum
B
B
B
B
5
5
C.
Do.
A
A
A
5
5
_.
..do....
Course
until
Position
Target
Shots
limit
_.do
_
"Ready"
practice
..do....
.
.
A
B
10
10
do
(yards)
100
100
100
200
200
200
200
Target
Shots
Instruction
at the
practice
limit
Carbine
rifle
Position
Fire 4 rounds standing; reload, take sitting position and fire 4 rounds.
Fire 4 rounds standing; reload, take kneeling position and fire 4 rounds.
Fire 4 rounds standing; reload, take sitting position and fire 4 rounds.
Standing to prone,
fire 4
rounds, reload,
fire
more rounds.
170
40
200
Qualifying score:
180
165
140
Marksman
Note.
The
sling is not
used for
firing.
558
Course D.
Range
Type
(yards)
marksman
Time
of fire
Slow
25
25
15
Pistol
limit
Target
None
Timed
20 seconds 5 shots
10 seconds 5 shots
Rapid
Shots
10
10
do
do.
10
Possible score
300
Qualifying score
165
Course
Range
Type
(yards)
25
25
15
25
Time
of fire
E.
Slow
None
20 seconds 5 shots
10 seconds 5 shots
do
Target
limit
Timed
Rapid
Position
-_
__
10
10
do
do
do
do
Shots
do
do
do
10
10
Total
40
400
300
280
220
Possible score
Marksman
Course
Range
Type
(yards)
25
25
15
25
Time
of fire
F.
Slow.
None
20 seconds 5 shots
10 seconds 5 shots
do
Target
limit
Timed
do.
Position
.....
....
Standing
do
do
do..
do
.
..do.
do._
Shots
...
10
10
10
10
Total
40
400
320
300
280
Possible score
Marksman
To fire a marksman
Notes
tional
Course F above.
fire
and
increase
the qualifying
13-63
score to 200.
2.
If
The
Range
Kind
(yards)
of fire
Time
limit
for record.
Submachine gun
Shots
Position
Target
Slow
200
100
25
will
instruction
Course G.
medal
A
23A
13
Automatic
10 seconds.
10
10
Standing to sitting.
Standing; gun at hip until
commence
firing
15
35
A, 10 feet apart. No hit outside the 4 ring is scored. Fire should be distributed; deduct
In applying penalty, no score shall be less than zero at any one range.
Three targets, rifle, A, 5 feet apart. Same scoring and penalties as above.
Three
targets, rifle,
10 points for
any
the 4 ring.
2
13-64
AUTOMATIC RIFLE
practice
0
-
---
is
COURSES.Instruction
jj5
^to
10
559
[Record practice]
Range
Kind
(yards)
Time
of fire
Target
limit
None
200
200
200
500
500
500
do
do
do
do
do
...
35 seconds...
20 seconds
--
...
None
40seconds
20seconds
-.____
...
-..
Shots
B
B
B
B
B
10
20
20
10
20
20
--
Total shots
Maximum
100
500
200
score
Qualifying score
Course
Automatic
I.
rifle
[Record practice]
Range
Kind
(yards)
Time
of fire
200
200
200
500
500
do
Single shots..
....
Sitting..
rest
..
Prone
do
None.
Target
Position
limit
minute, 20 seconds
Shots
B
B
B
B
B
10.
10.
10.
40.
Total shots
Maximum
score
______
Qualifying score
13-65
and
.30
caliber
.50
training
Type
(yards)
Bursts of
1,000-800
800-600
No
400-200
200 to beach
Target.
...
automatic
Target
A-B-O-D
Time
(sec-
distributed...
B-C
distributed--.
The
shown
consist of a strip of
30
30
30
30
20
50
50
50
50
50
strips 2
inches wide.
25 yds.
B-l B
Shots
onds)
do
do
reports,
2 yds.'
manipulation of
of fire
do
do
do
do
600^00-
in the
prescribed
the course.
Range
by
machine guns.
J.
and instruction
Course
100
500
300
This course is designed as an instruction practice for gunners of machine guns mounted in
landing craft. It is appropriate for both
caliber
._
B-2
C-l
100 yds.
C C-2
560
until
officer or enlisted
for individual
commanding
the
the service or
file
number
for
The Chief of Naval Personnel will issue the medal to those who have
earned the award. Medals should not be
request for medals.
requested for
previous qualification.
Scoring.
In order to
be painted a
Bullets fired in
Medals
will
Navy
a Marine Corps
pistol
rifle
.45) course
(caliber
fulfills
the
(1)
which, under
as
Each
is awarded by the
Marine personnel for expert
(2)
Marine Corps
to
Navy
personnel
fire
fire
following formula:
or inconvenient to
1, 2,
(A, B, C,
and
and D)
3.
10 points
according
to
graded in
proficiency
rifle
attained
and
pistol,
in
record
marksmen,
13-67.
them by
be awarded
received
stage.
Stages
whom
MEDALS a.
One
Navy
It is desired that
it is
impractical
Navy courses.
Corps commanding officers may apply
Marine
fire
for
Navy
One
expert
pistol
man who
pistol
qualifies as
expert course
an expert by
(.45
calibre
firing the
automatic)
and attains the proficiency required in paragraph 13-62 above. The procedure and provisions of subparagraph above also apply to
the award of the expert pistol shot medal.
TION.
DURATION OF QUALIFI-
The
561
an individual,
medal
is
ever awarded
Section
IX
RANGE PROCEDURE
Par.
Nature
of range firing
Range officer
Permanent details
Temporary details
Responsibility of officers
General rules
Procedure in the pits for rapid and timed
fire
Procedure on the
timedfire
Telephones
Record firing
Scoring
Ammunition
13-69
13-70
13-71
13-72
13-73
13-74
13-75
Page
562
562
562
563
563
563
563
13-76
564
13-77
13-78
13-79
13-80
13-81
565
565
565
565
566
and
of men by the number of targets availFrom four to six relays can be readily
number
able.
13-69
Range
follows
Employment
torily.
Eight
and more
satisfac-
is
and should be
well
rendered extremely difficult. The instruction during range firing is progressive, starting
with the shortest ranges and the most steady
positions.
Firing is continued under the least
difficult conditions until the men under instruction are capable of making good groups under
those conditions. Especial care is required at
this first stage of the range firing in order to
overcome the natural tendency to flinch when
squeezing the trigger. "When the men under
instruction are capable of making good groups
under one set of conditions they are advanced
to the next in the order of difficulty.
Men who
show a tendency to flinch should be returned to
firing under the least difficult conditions until
this tendency has been corrected.
Once the
habit of flinching has been definitely overcome,
progress will be rapid and qualification assured.
13-70 ORGANIZATION FOR RANGE INSTRUCTION.a. Range instruction shall not
and
pencils.
The
well
ahead of time.
ress
562
pasters,
spotters,
extra
filled
scorers
canteens.
is
whom
assigned.
in firing at
this record.
and
permanent
telephone service,
of all materials
such as disks,
<r
fire.
He
not be
will
supervision
general
of
the
will
have
He
will
firing.
563
The
party.
leading
man
march them to
and supervise their work in
in charge of each to
pits
the pits.
RESPONSIBILITY OF OFFI-
13 74
etc.; for
general assist
to secure
CERS.
and instruction
and for
of their units;
They
efficient
carrying
of
(1)
PERMANENT DETAILS.Such
officer
sees
fit.
These
details
that
precautions.
by an
officer
In slow
from the
fire
if
the target
is
withdrawn
be
fired.
(4)
firer as
misses.
is
permanent telephone
detail is essential.
13-73
manding
officers
temporary
the firing.
Upon
the
officer
in
coaches.
may
fully
occupied.
Officers
who
are
firing
on
except
when
all hits
will
officer,
The man
fire,
and men
in
When
firing
safety
firing.
commanding
the
in progress.
13-72
out
will
fired
by
him.
(6)
men
In
all
record
The value
firing,
and not
in pairs.
be indicated to
with a white
disk; a four, with a red disk; a three, with a
black and white disk; a two, with a black disk;
a miss by waving the danger flag across the
(7)
of a shot will
and danger
hits shall
(8)
flag at the
five,
be scored as misses.
shot hole, the leaded edge of which
564
(9)
at about the
fire if
same
two shots
is
given
will verify
awarded
markers.
marked
1 five,
which he
is
6 fours,
two, 2 twos,
miss.
competitor.
(19) If at rapid fire a
he
will
fires
man
fails to fire
any
at
If
all,
he
If the rifle
fire,
begins.
(13) In all slow firing, spotters will be used.
They
will
timed
fire.
and location
(14)
each shot.
to
after
it is
fire
apply.
(11)
In slow
(16)
(10)
firing point,
of the hits.
When
man
mence a new
string-.
charge of the
firing line fires for record, his performance must
be observed and score marked by another
these duties.
If the officer in
officer.
fire
the time
is
are
fully
flag
is
being fully
exposed
The
for
the
They
firing.
13-77
As soon
as a set of targets
in charge
As soon
withdrawn
unload. All
unfired cartridges are removed from the piece
and the bolts or slides are left open. Men
remain in position on the firing line until they
shots.
13-78
by the
officer in charge.
TELEPHONES.One
telephone to
a group of from 10 to 15 targets is sufficient.
In general, overhead wiring is more satisfactory,
since trouble can be located and corrected better
than with the underground system. Messages
to the pits should be brief and explicit.
If a
target is to be pulled and marked, say "Mark
"
No.
If it is to be pulled and reexamined, having been pulled once, say
" When a hit is to be
"Reexamine No.
disked or disked a second time without pulling
"
the target, say "Disk" or "Redisk No.
Irritating messages to the pits only result in
poorer service.
If a certain target gives
565
is
down
fire
in this section.
An
or
officer
man may
for qualification
marksman
qualify as
but
fails to
by
The
illness.
twofold:
to
first,
firer
is
incapacitated
a measure
of
is
the
and, second, to
13-80
on
Arms Sheet
As soon
2.
as
records,
investigates
the
records
pit
the range.
When
he has recorded the results from the blackboards, he indicates this fact by drawing a
The
through the recorded portion.
line
record of shots, except the total for that stage,
may then be erased. The record of the scores
for the small-arms year shall be retained
commanding
officers,
Navy Department,
ing small-arms
by
year.
See
Section
XIV
for
score of 270,
566
instructions
detailed
relative
to
manner
of
number
of lots
for target
that each
kind and
practice.
ness can
and makes
of
ammunition issued
The standard
training allowances of
marksmanship are
tion for
Rounds
Course A
Rifle
rifle
Pistol
tracer)
500
150
60
the above.
ances.
is
400
300
ments
that there
105
ball,
tracer)
the
state
rifle.
rifle
arms
to
400
210
200
240
ball,
ammuni-
as follows:
under each
of
<c
Section
13-82
13-83
13-84
13-85
1386
13-87
13-88
Page
3.
567
567
567
568
568
569
569
4.
Cocking cam on
Contact surface
bolt.
of barrel
and operat-
ing rod.
5.
6.
7.
receiver.
rod.
13-84
firing.
instructor.
Materials.
clean the
No
abrasives
The
rifle.
necessary
materials
preserve the
will
be used to
clean,
lubricate,
and
rifle:
Patches.
Soap.
Water.
Cleaner,
rifle
bore.
Grade
II,
Oil, Neat's-foot.
Grease,
rifle.
(a)
(c)
nition.
(d)
Apply a
following parts:
1.
2.
Bolt lugs.
Bolt guides.
567
568
the patch covered tool in the chamber and revolve slowly several times. Dry the chamber
as described above, using successive dry patches.
Inspect the chamber visuaUy and by testing
Remove
(plug)
It should
oil.
13-85
TIONS. The
watched
following
points
should
be
carefully.
dirt,
mud
bore.
fire
rifle
snow
or
b.
conclusion of
a.
2.
The
4.
firing,
dirt.
oil
c.
d.
the
of
bolt
remedy.
e. Use
ton head.
Both types.
c.
13-83.
If firing to continue
rifle
apply additional oil to the parts listed in paragraph 13-83. Friction can be ascertained if
If
friction.
Oil
sluggish.
is
oj rifle grease.
if
applied
If the rifle is
action
is
the
exposed
may
the bolt
tions
it is
with a
is
fail to
open.
rifle
grease.
prescribed:
Apply
(1)
next day,
oil
(2)
ing rod.
tip the
3.
rifle
to
Wipe
dirt
off
and
exterior of
perspiration.
Wipe
remove dampness,
and cover
lightly with
Cammed
(a)
rifle
grease
surface in the
(b)
Under
(c)
Locking recesses
lip of
hump
of operat-
in the receiver.
Bolt camming lug on the face of the
(d)
hammer.
No
rifle
Assemble
(3)
rifle
to spread
grease.
/.
Keep a
oil
metal parts.
g. Remove carbon from gas cylinder lock
screw and piston head when necessary.
h. Generally it will not be necessary to re-
on
all
move any
AGE.
Grade
stowage).
times.
clean before
it
is
the packing
used.
FROM STORAGE.Clean
off
preservative
thoroughly removing
parts with a cloth.
all
After
preservative, dry
all
13-88
569
They
Section
XI
THE PISTOL
Requirements
ing
.._
p ar
13- 89
13-90
13-92
13-93
13-94
13-95
13-96
13- 91
and aiming
Position of the body
Sighting
Instruction in position
Timed
fire
Instruction in timed
Rapid
fire
fire
Instruction in rapid
p age
570
570
fire
Examination
Instruction steps, pistol course
570
570
571
571
571
572
572
572
572
572
573
573
574
574
574
574
574
575
575
575
13- 97
13-98
13- 99
13-100
13-101
13-102
13-103
13-104
13-105
13-106
13-107
13-108
13-109
13-110
methods prescribed
closely the
ACCUAccurate
The
(1)
pistol
The
to
At frequent
as coach.
intervals the
man
acts
members
exchange places so
and coach.
firer
Each
period of the instruction begins with an explanation and a demonstration of the work for
the period.
the
the instructors.
NOMENCLATURE.Only
13-91
struction in nomenclature as
men
enable the
No
given.
with
such in-
necessary to
be
need be devoted to
can be taught simultaneously
to follow instructions need
special period
stripping
field
structor,
is
when
cleaning.
The
in-
such parts as are necessary for a complete understanding of the work at hand. For details of
23-35.
nomenclature and functioning see
FM
hand.
(2)
The men
be instructed are divided into groups of convenient size and a group instructor appointed
The men of each group work
for each group.
together in pairs, one man going through the
this subject; it
REQUIREMENTS FOR
RATE PISTOL SHOOTING.a.
13-89
The preparatory
ing take
in order.
METHODS
TION.
The
570
methods
of
instruction
follow
13-92
that used in
pressure causes a tremor of the muscles and
Too light a prestires the firer unnecessarily.
'
571
13-93
INSTRUCTION
aimed
IN
shot.
GRASPING
Figure
34.
and
Figuhe
13-94
instructor
starts
by explaining the
13-95
firer faces
fire.
The feet
The weight is
The hips are
Figure
35.
Pistolcorrect
Note position
of
thumb.
correct
right
receiver.
37.
No
effort is
made
to
somewhat tightened
in order to sustain
even
Figure
36.
Revolvercorrect
thumb.
79528750
37
after
the
hammer
found to
assist in
quickly.
The
Note position of
waist or
left
may hang
falls.
getting
off
This
will
be
a second shot
572
tance.
The
back
is
applied straight
and
The
applied
is
pressure
mean
firer will
not
know
the exact
During the
fire.
is
is
pistol.
The
GER SQUEEZE.The
mMM>>
13-96
The
38.
this
INSTRUCTION IN POSITION.
firer's
body and
position.
illustrates
The men
method
thumb
ING.
a.
procedure
firing
slow
fire
the following
(1) When in position and the sights approximately aligned on the buU's-eye take a normal
breath.
(2) Hold this breath by closing the throat,
and without effort of the muscles of the diaphragm.
b.
but
In rapid
all
fire,
the breath
is
held as above
The
instructor's fore-
by
then
structor's
and are
positions are correct.
As
it
13-97
He
Figure
and demonstrates
palm
The
instructor
now
of
simulates
Care should be
the squeezing of the trigger.
used to see that the correct, firm grip is obtained
first, and that then after a definite pause the
trigger pressure
13-100
is
applied.
SECOND INSTRUCTION IN
instructor takes
hammer
clicks.
No
limit is
.-
jit
Perfect alignment
Top of
573
are provided.
is little
difficulty in hold-
Top of
tight
on
trigger
tight
Tcp of
on
jit
on the
A.
trigger.
The
firer
now
Top of
is
increasing pressure.
trig-
much
at
No
calls
the
made to keep
The firer
bull's-eye.
effort is
grasp, position,
on
and particularly
his
method
of
13-102
FOURTH INSTRUCTION
TRIGGER SQUEEZE.The
same aiming
object
Top of
on right
Figure
39.
Effect
of correct
pistol
of the sights,
is
exercise
IN
tar-
The
the
574
and con-
fire
When
move
off of
When
trigger is held.
13-103
the sights
recoil,
and the
is
flexing of the
firer releases
By
FIRE.
INSTRUCTION IN TIMED
Each man
is
As
fire.
in
timed
The
arm and
the pistol.
13-106
FIRE.
INSTRUCTION
The instruction
IN RAPID
instruction.
The
instructor
must
timed
fire.
The
instructor
now
gives a strong
jerk on the cord with the left hand. This recocks the pistol and disturbs the aim, in someas does the recoil. The
brings the sights on for the
now
is
Men who
quickly should, at first, be permitted to complete a trial with less than 5 shots.
13-105 RAPID FIRE. This is essentially
the same as timed fire. The method of firing is
the same. Men should not be advanced to the
13-107
in rapid or
timed
fire.
Side method.
575
magazine). When carried fully loaded a tendency for the safety lock to become disengaged
during withdrawal may be anticipated. This
tendency may be reduced by rotating the stock
of the pistol away from the leg during the
operation of withdrawal.
13-109
The examina-
EXAMINATION.
tion of the
is
the instructor.
Figure 41. Cocking the revolver
in rapid or
timed
Straight back
fire.
method.
In
men
The men
hammer
other persons
when removing
or replac-
For
details of
FM
23-35.
be
rigidly enforced.
The
following precautions
On taking up
loaded.
To do
it is
a pistol
examine
this, first
it
to see
if
open.
(4)
On
on the
The
The
this
simu-
correct
correct
method
method
of breathing.
of aiming
and
align-
How
(4)
The
tion
safety precautions.
13-110
a. First instruction.
The organiza-
COURSE.
are sufficient:
(1)
(1)
(2)
During
firer's
all
to
and
by
will be instructed
The
names
learn the
the pistol
rifle.
The
first
in-
The
how
and demonstrates
and the firing of slow
fire.
The instructor sees that all men have
cotton for their ears and use it. The men are
instructed to concentrate on the trigger squeeze
and to keep their sights in line. No attempt is
made to keep the shots in the center of the
target.
The first relay blackens the sights and
fires 10 shots. The coach stands on the left of
the firer and loads the magazine used by the
firer.
The coach
introduces occasional
dummies
into the
b.
Second
instruction.
The
instructor
and not
ex-
is
make
to
a
high score. The first relay is instructed to fire 10
shots slow fire at 25 yards. They are instructed
to concentrate on the trigger squeeze and not to
try for a good score. So long as they can call the
to
576
is
and
to concentrate on the
The coach
is
on the
left.
The
The instructor
explains
two
The
first
relay fires
strings with
first.
Section XII
MISCELLANEOUS WEAPONS
Par.
13-111
13-112
13-113
13-114
13-115
13-116
Scope
Sighting and aiming
Positions
Instructions in positions
Sight setting instruction
Effect of sight changes
13-111
SCOPE.
These
Page
577
577
577
577
577
577
instructions cover
methods
of:
(1)
The
on the stock
is
prescribed:
Prone position.
(1)
Stoppages.
(6)
The preparatory
is
the same
13-38)
rifle (par.
Sitting position.
(2)
13-114
(5)
by the hands
This position
the
Functioning.
pressure exerted
The
is
This
13-39).
INSTRUCTION IN POSITIONS.
and demonstrates each
instructor explains
position.
and the
position
The
firers
rifle.
13-112
a.
of
rifle.
rifle
rifle
same manner
(13-28).
as
Since the
automatic
gage,
it
is
will usually
13-113
The
rifle
The
sitting position
used
is
rifle
The
other
member
13-115
TION.
b.
sight
The
of his pair.
firer
trials
exchange places.
firers
settings.
make
several
by the
instruc-
each required to
by the
After several
13-116
Machine gun.
a.
effects of sight
rifle.
bullet
is
the
same
as for the
rifle;
'
Section XIII
Page
13-117
13-118
13-119
Arms
13-120
Courses and ammunition allowances
Individual training and match shooting. 13-121
13122
Interunit competitions
13-123
Local competitions
Intertype and interdistrict competitions. 13-124
13-125
Fleet competition
13-126
U. S. Navy competition
13-127
Competition rules
13-128
Fleet trophies
13-129
U. S. Navy trophies
United States Fleet trophies, place medals. 1 3- 1 30
Team
and
medals, distinguished
marksman
13-131
13-117
584
All
commanding
encouraged to conduct
rifle
and
officers are
regular small
arms
made during
the
match
will
be considered by
range
13-118.
ING.
a.
training,
stimulate
may combine
rifle-and-pistol
mand, unit
b.
of record
578
may
team
Team authorized in
weapon
class
the
in
all
unit
and
The ob-
vide for
or
will permit.
is
except
pistol competi-
ammunition allowances
is final,
COMPETITIONS AND
MATCHES.a.
of
578
578
579
579
580
580
580
580
580
581
581
583
583
583
100
or
less
(b)
(c)
Carbine
(a)
iber
100
to
500
500
to
000
1,000
1,500
to
500
2,500
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
S
1,
1,
Firing
to
Alter-
nate
.30 cal.
(1)
or
(d) Rifle .30 caliber.
(e) Revolver .38 cal-
0)
iber
(f) Pistol .45 caliber-
(1)
(1)
2
3
3
4
4
4
team
shall
consist of the
number
of
or alternates.
whom may
The
be
firing
members
gardless
The team
tivity
rank,
of
officer
or
enlisted
pistol, 4
579
The arms used in Fleet and U. S. Navy competitions must conform to current National Match
regulations.
b. Nothing in the above regulations shall be
construed as prohibiting Navy individuals and
teams from using any arm permitted by the
regulations governing other than Navy conducted competitions.
13-120 COURSES AND AMMUNITION
ALLOWANCES. a. The
be fired
courses to
Ammunition
allow-
ances (rounds)
Weapon
Course
class
Each match
Elimina-
per individual
tion and
training
firing
status.
by
Pistol, .22-caliber
Rifle, .22-caliber
Carbine, .30-caliber. .. .
Rifle, .30-caliber
Revolver, .38 caliber ...
K
C_.._
B
F
2,400
6,800
2,850
5,280
2,880
40
70
40
70
40
2,400
30
40
30
Do
Pistol, .45-caliber
Do
National match
The
b.
Fleet and U.
team matches
pistol
National
Match
S.
Navy
will
be
individual and
fired
over the
Course:
team membership.
13-119 ARMS.a. The arms utilized by
teams and individuals in Navy matches will
be standard Navy ordnance equipment.
It
is desirable
that arms used by individuals
and teams in match firing be especially
serviced to insure optimum performance.
To
this end the Bureau of Ordnance will make
available especially serviced
U.
S.
weapons
Time
Target
limit
50
Slow
25
Timed
20
25
Rapid
10
seconds
string of
10
10
10
5.
Total
30
The
Fleet and U. S.
rifle
team matches
.45-caliber
American.
Standard
American.
do
25 yards
per
c.
Rounds
50 yards Standard
5.
seconds
string of
per
and
will interfere
Ml, 4% pounds;
fire
shooters.
rifle
Type of
for Fleet,
The replacement
.30-caliber
Range
(yards)
Navy
will
individual
rifle
580
and match
Ammuni-
firing.
Navy
ammunibe made in
of
LOCAL COMPETITIONS.
a.
Commanding
rifle
permitted.
13-121
of
TRAINING
INDIVIDUAL
AND
tion of America.
Navy
shooters
and teams
number of personnel
interested in rifle and pistol match shooting or
where the numbers required cannot be made
jurisdiction will
be
graph 13-118 above, but where there are individuals who are interested and who can be
available for training and match shooting,
ammunition may be provided in proportion to
the amounts allowed for teams in paragraph
made
13-120.
b.
All
competitions
will
normally
include
fired,
b. Navy shooters and teams should be provided opportunities where possible to enter
various local and regional rifle and pistol
matches held under sponsorship of the National
team matches and individual matches employing the same classes of weapons utilized in the
team matches.
c. Members of teams shall be permitted to
Rifle Association
d.
Provisions should be
matches
made in
all
individual
who
are
13-122
INTERUNIT COMPETITIONS.
trains
teams as authorized
represent the
in
command.
when
match shooting
is
conducted.
Reports
Navy
and
command commandants,
when ships are
weapon
class
afloat
and /or
It
is
mander
commands.
and
district
13-125
commandants.
Navy
Com-
Navy
States
Com-
petitions.
sist of:
(1)
An
individual pistol
matic) match.
(2) An individual
(.45-caliber
auto-
(.30-caliber
(4)
A
A
unit, local
pistol (.45-caliber
rifle (.30-caliber
13-126
U. S.
duct an annual U.
S.
is
authorized to con-
and shore
Representation
and eligibility shaU be in accordance with current directives for U. S. Navy athletic competitions and for competition in the National
Trophy Rifle and Pistol Matches. The U. S.
Navy Rifle and Pistol Competition should
ious fleets
activities.
consist of:
(1) An individual pistol
matic) match.
An
individual
rifle
(.45-caliber
(.30-caliber
auto-
M-l)
match.
pistol
(.45-caliber
automatic)
match.
Navy
of
U.
S.
Navy
individual competi-
(4)
The Chief
Commandant.
Eligibles for
(a)
Officers
(6)
Distinguished Shots
petition year.
team
(c)
M-l) match.
placed in a
As the
U.
result of the
Navy Competition
S.
Navy champion
U.
S.
the
rifle
phies Matches.
13-127
all
competitions
are
permitted,
competitions.
b.
rifle (.30-caliber
who
strated
Naval Personnel
will select the individuals and teams to be invited to enter the U. S. Navy matches from the
pertinent records of the individuals and teams
nominated by Commanding Officers and recommended by appropriate Fleet Commander or
(3)
fleet
championship.
It
(2)
and
M-l)
match.
(3)
It is intended that the best rifle and pistol individual shooters and teams developed in inter-
District
rifle
581
In
all
competitions the
of the organization
commanding
officer
is
582
team members.
c. In all team competitions coaching is permitted. Any member of the team may act as
coach on the firing line. Coaching from behind
The coach
the firing line will not be permitted.
may be changed at the discretion of the team
captain but must be withdrawn from the line
while the change is being effected. Coaches and
members on the firing line will occupy their
normal positions and will not so dispose themselves as to shield the firer from the effects of the
wind, light, or weather. In addition to the team
coach, each pair that is firing may have not more
than one coach on the line with them.
In all rifle team competitions the competion each team fire slow fire in pairs, the
members of the pair firing alternately and the
man on the right firing first.
d.
tors
In
e.
fire
all pistol
singly or
/.
In
cials in
all
may
fire
any particular
team
firing at
target.
In
rifle
may
granted.
n.
and on the
On
the
be recorded on a score-
offi-
Additional time
o.
Competitors must
call
attention to any
The value
of
fired at the
made.
If
p. The officer ordering the match will designate the ammunition to be used in the match.
This designation should be made at least 10 days
prior to the date set for the match in order that
all teams may have an opportunity to sight in
with the ammunition designated.
q. The ammunition used in the match will be
served out to competitors on the firing line. Any
competitor having other ammunition in his
possession on the firing line will be disqualified,
and his score will not be counted.
competitions standard positions
r. In rifle
any
only
artificial
support.
h.
artificial
support.
In
all
(1
may be used.
Standing.
feet,
both
of
feet
(3)
right buttock
Right
resting
kifee
on ground with
on right heel.
directly
Left elbow extended over left knee. Sling permitted as described in paragraph 13-33.
Lower part of body rests on the
(4) Prone.
ground. Firer's head is toward the target, and
upper part of the body is supported by the el-
fire
583
or the fewest
number
of shots of lowest
value, etc.
(3)
Having
(4)
when
Having the
first
the slow
fire
Commanding
fire
or
if
slow
fire
range.
If still tied
then by:
classes of
of lowest
value, etc.
(3)
then by:
(2)
in all classes of
13-128
Match.
The name
The commanding
584
Fleet or U. S.
in
13-131
the
arm
DISTINGUISHED MARKSMAN
vidual pistol
titions.
a.
named
The Chief
of
30 or more
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
and Warrant
12
Bronze
Gold
Silver
4
4
10
10
10
11
12
J2
13
13
14
15
15
15
16
award
10
16
Navy
Medal
10
17
10
18
11
18
11
11
12
19
20
20
be awarded
medals according to their position on a consolidated list. In this way enlisted men compete
only against enlisted for prizes, but officers and
warrant officers compete against both themselves and enlisted men.
Persons designated
distinguished are not eligible to compete for
medals but will compete for place only in the
Officers
Officers will
Navy
member
of the
United
or
of a
the
pistol
United States
(b)
Navy
Team Medal
active or retired.
received
as
shooting
One
2.
may
leg
Navy
won
in a
3.
585
attained
by
or U. S.
Navy
place medal
won
may have
in
been
an annual Fleet
Individual Pistol
Match
subse-
(a)
match or a national
team match.
(b) Medal won while a member of the United
States Marine Corps for which the Marine
Corps has given credit as a leg toward disnational individual pistol
pistol
(c)
ing
pistol
Naval Operations.
Section
XIV
Report
of scores
Forms
13-132
13-133
13-134
13-135
13-136
13-137
13-138
Score board
Pit card
arms
arms
arms
arms
Small
Small
Small
Small
13-132
PORT.
sheet No.
sheet No. 2
sheet No. 3
sheet No. 4
ANNUAL
SMALL ARMS
Page
586
586
586
586
587
587
587
587
588
588
589
590
591
RE-
Request
for the
award and
issue of expert
medals.
b.
Comment on methods
of training
and any
medal
of each individual
in individual matches.
d. List name, unit or station of other competing teams, their aggregate scores and stand-
team matches.
The form reports
ing in
e.
shall
be forwarded as an
team
and place medals, comment upon the conduct
of the competition, report ammunition expended
and provide any item of interest in regard to
small arms training and team organization.
enclosure to a letter which shall request
13-134 PIT RECORD. In the record pracrough copy of the report of scores (SmallArms Sheet 2) will be kept in ink or indelible
pencil in the pits by the chief pit officer.
This
copy is known as the pit record and will be kept
by relays. Names of firers will not be entered
but identification will be by relay and target
number. Scores are then entered by the chief
tice a
to the
method prescribed
manner
collected
by the
similar
These
will
be
13-135
(Small-Arms Sheet 2)
will
be kept
by the
by name
The data
who
will
receipt
Small-Arms
of
The
Sheet
(report
of
show the
name of the ship or station, the date and the
nature of the qualification. If an enlisted man
scores).
fires
to qualify, this
fails
it
affects his
read:
U.
S. S.
may
be)
in his case.
13-136
will
line,
record
pit
control.
is
the pit record before announcement of qualifications and before preparation of the smooth
If the officer in
587
Signature
REPORT OF SCORES.Instruc-
or
Sheet 2) are printed on its back. Immediately after the close of each record practice, the
officer in charge of the firing line will prepare and
submit to each commanding officer concerned a
smooth copy typewritten or in ink (in quadrupliEach copy will
cate) of Small-Arms Sheet 2).
be certified, in the spaces provided, by both the
chief pit officer and the officer in charge of the
firing line.
This smooth copy is compiled from
the pit record and the firing line record (pars.
13-134 and 13-135). In case of disagreement
S.
S.
rifle
(pistol) practice:
Signature
Score Board
Target No.
Shot No.
Name and
Course
Slow
relay
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Total
S
200
Rapid
fire
Sit
Sit
200
200
500
200
200
300
4
5.
Qualification
705287
50-
-38
score board.
fire
Total
588
Pit Card
(
Shot No.
Target No.
Total
2
Note.
is
not furnished
10
11
12
14
13
15
Relay
fire
16
by the Department.
U. S. N., Pit
Figure
43.
Officer
1950)
Ship or station
19.
From:
Commanding
To:
officer.
The
Number
officers
command
Course
Number
Rifle
30, 19_
with qualifications
fired,
Course
firing (A)
June
qualified as (B)
Percent: (B)-h(A)
marksman_
Unqualified
Course
Rifle marksman
Rifle sharpshooterRifle expert--
_.
Unqualified
Carbine marksman
Carbine sharpshooter.
Carbine expert
Unqualified
Course
Pistol
marksman-
Unqualified
Course
Pistol marksman...
Pistol sharpshootei _
Pistol expert--
Unqualified
Course
Landing party or
NEGDF
Revolver marksman
Revolver sharpshooterRevolver expert
Unqualified
_
Submachine gun
Ground machine gun...
Automatic rifle
complement-
Authorized allowance
Copy
to:
CNO
officers
enlisted.
officers
enlisted.
(OP34)
. ,
Signature
Note.
In Courses G, H, and
I,
Commanding.
Arms Sheet
589
OPNAV-34-122 (Revised
1950)
Report of scores
(See instructions
on reverse
of this sheet)
Division or activity
Ship or station
Date
Place
Weapon
19.
Course
fired
fired
Scores
Target
Name
No.
Rank
or rate
Qualification
Total
1 certify
that the above record practice was conducted in accordance with regulations.
Name
.,
Rank
Number
U. S. Navy.
Chiej Pit Officer.
Name
This
is
sheet
U. S. Navy.
Rank
Officer in
Copy
to:
CNO
(OP34)
[Reverse of small arms sheet
2]
INSTRUCTIONS
This Report of Scores is to be kept both on the
by the officer in charge of the firing line and
in the pit by the chief pit officer.
2. In subcolumns, under "Scores," enter ranges fired
showing type of fire by abbreviations (Slow fire S. F.;
Rapid fire R. F.; Timed fire T. F.; Semiautomatic
S. A.; Automatic
Example: 500
A.) and distance.
yards slow fire S. F. 500; 300 yards rapid fire R. F.
1.
firing line
interlineations to the
line.
5.
Data
3.
for the
sources, viz:
From
officer in
This report
is
to be kept
by commanding
officers
300.
two
Use abbreviations as
shooter;
M, Marksman; U,
Unqualified.
If pit
record.
The Report
is designed to be kept in
Copies of the form will be furnished
on application to the Chief of Naval Operations.
9. One signed copy of Sheet 2 will accompany a
request for medals for qualifications when such request
is submitted separate from the annual report.
Address
to Chief of Naval Personnel (Pers. B41).
10. One copy of Sheet 2 for all officers and men
who qualified as experts during the year shall be submitted with the annual report.
8.
suitable binders.
of Scores
590
Arms
Small
Sheet 3
OPNAV 34-123
(1948)
Type
of competition:
Inter-Unit
Local
Inter-Type or District
U. S.-Navy
Fleet
(Indicate Type)
Date
Weapon
Location of range
Course
fired
fired
1.
and address)
Total score
Name
Rank
or rate
Rapid
Slow
Team
aggregate
.-
2.
Other teams
Team
gate
..
(2)
Aggre-
captain.
and standing:
Total score
Team (name
Standing in match
and address)
Slow-
Forwarded by
to
BuPers by
officer
to:
CNO
(OP34)
Date-
Rank
.USN
ordering competition
Name
Copy
Aggregate
USN
Name
Forwarded
Rapid
Rank
Arms
OPNAV-34
Sheet 4
(1948)
Report of Small
Type
591
of competition
Local
Inter-Unit
Inter-Type
Arms
Individual Match
Fleet
U. S.-Navy
(Indicate Type)
Date
Location of range
Weapon
fired
Course
fired
In competition ordered by
Place standing in match
Certified by:
Rank
Name
1)
Score taker
or
rate
(2)
Team
..
USN
Officer
officer
to:
CNO
(OP34)
Date
Bank
.USN
ordering competition.
Name
Copy
Aggregate score
captain
Name
Forwarded to BuPers by
Rank
Section
XV
Page
592
592
593
593
13-139
Navy
Par.
13-139
13-140
13-141
13-142
FT.
charge,
Standard
Materials
Stocked
Depots
in
Navy Supply
(For Carbine
10 inches diameter
26 inches diameter
46 inches diameter
(For Carbine
Remainder
(Repair
PLETE
MARKER, TARGET, MID RANGE, COMPLETE
PASTE, TARGET, DRY, LBS
PASTER, TARGET, BLACK, ENVELOPE OF
and 4
b.
Value
Value
Value
5.
Value
2.
4.
3.
feet
wide
Target)
Value
Value
Value
Value
20 inches diameter
37 inches diameter
53 inches diameter
Remainder
c.
of target 6 feet
by
6 feet
fire
5.
4.
3.
2.
in
rings as follows:
10,000
10,000.
SPINDLE,
Marksmanship)
Rifle
50
Fire)
Marksmanship)
50
Fire)
TARGER SPOTTER
TARGET, PISTOL, L
TARGET, PISTOL,
25
YARD, STANDARD
50
YARD, STANDARD
6'
rectangle
Value
Value
Value
Value
5.
4.
3.
2.
AMERICAN
TARGET, PISTOL,
AMERICAN
TARGET, RIFLE A
TARGET, RIFLE B
TARGET, RIFLE D
592
e.
Target, gallery
rifle,
official
50
feet,
used
a rectangle having
ten bull's-eye, thereon. The 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10
rings are in the black. The dimensions of the
for small-bore rifle firing:
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
0.150 inch
0.483 inch
0.817inch
1.150 inches
1.483 inches
1.817 inches
Target, gallery
/.
rifle,
SB-A-2
2.17 inches
3.87 inches
x 6" rectangle
4"
Target, gallery
rifle,
SB-D-2
7.
will use
6.
(slow
official
50
2.23 inches
3.07 inches
4.16 inches
5.56 inches
7.33 inches
Only
10, 9, 8,
(rapid
50
2.
feet,
B-2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
feet,
B-3
will
b.
The
suitable
pad.
Two
from the
13-142
skin.
INSTRUCTION SCHEDULES.
fire).
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
1.80 inches
3.06 inches
4.46 inches
6.14 inches
8.32 inches
Only 10 and 9
Value 5.
Value 4.
Value 3
Value 2
3.
in.
official
neces-
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
1.54 inches
is
4.
fire).
0.90 inch
This
the elbows.
i.
If this is
firing.
rapid
rifle,
5.
firing.
h.
worn.
instruction are
be wasted.
Elbow pads should be only of sufficient
thickness to prevent skinning or bruising the
elbows.
The firer should be able to feel the
ground through the pads and be able to utilize
(miniature
men under
8.
fire.
Value
Value
Value
Value
0.83 inch
a padded uniform prepared before the instrucDuring the preparation in positions is given.
9.
5.
(miniature
g.
10.
593
10.
9.
8.
7.
6.
(1)
Two
(2)
(3)
Instruction in both
matic pistol
is
M-l
rifle
and auto-
covered.
FIRST
Hours
DAY
Subj ect
}4
protect the
1^
hammer.
hand may be permitted
Men
to
men
should be instructed in the kinds of padding to be used and should be required to have
1
]/2
ing."
594
SECOND DAY
D|
Training
Film TF-7-652
and Use
Fire:
16 Rds. Kneeling
"Positions."
60 sees.
2J^
Position Exercises
Position Exercises.
of Sling.
Cleaning
M-l
41^
2
Yi
3%
1Y
\Y
Position Exercises.
Why
Fire
Training
iy2
1
1
2V2
Fire:
SF 200
yds.
"L" Course.
EIGHTH DAY
4^
Pistol
.45 Caliber
NINTH DAY
Fire:
and Snapping
yds.
FIFTH DAY
y2
SF 200
Used.
Fire:
Rifle.
Y
Y
by Shooters.
"Relief" Movie.
Training Film TF-7- 1094 "Trigger Squeeze."
Trigger Squeeze Exercises (snapping in).
FOURTH DAY
Yt,
Rifle
SEVENTH DAY
THIRD DAY
Y
Y
200 yds.
Exercise).
Yi
RF
Pistol
in.
Field Stripping.
SIXTH DAY
Fire:
TENTH DAY
Caliber Rifle.
Fire:
Fire:
SF 200
yds.
SF 300
yds.
SF 500
yds.
SF 200 yds.
SF 200 yds.
Target A, SF 200 yds.
35
sees.
RF
200 yds.
Record Practice
Course "B"
RF
200 yds.
RF
(2)
(1)
Chapter
(2)
U.
(3)
Automatic
13,
S. Rifle,
M1911 Al (FM
M-l (FM
Caliber
.45
23-5.)
M1911
Rifle
M-l
Rifle,
TF-7-652 Positions.
TF-7-1094 Trigger Squeeze.
TF-7- 1062 Rapid Fire.
and
23-35.)
Training aids:
(1)
595
Book.
(3)
<-
14
GLOSSARY
597
(-
Chapteb
14
GLOSSARY
14-1
cluded herein
is
and
and techniques covered
in previous chapters.
Action, shock.
by
Action, zone
of.
own momentum.
it is
is
to act,
and
for
which
responsible.
successive
Alinement.
A straight
line
on which several
men
or units
upon a
straight line.
Area, dispersion.
assumed to fall.
Area, rear. A general term designating the
area in the rear of a combat or forward area.
Area,
to a
An area
target.
weapon
area are
assigned to a unit or
The
organization
in
is
around
planned and
operation
tactical
is
performed.
Bridgehead.
The position occupied by advance troops for the purpose of protecting the
remainder of the command during their passage
of a river or defile.
Commander
oj the guard.
The
senior officer
performance
He
is
re-
and
If no
discipline,
Communications.
(a)
and routes of sending messages; such as telephone and telegraph, radio, or signal systems.
(b) The routes and transportation for moving
troops and supplies, especially in a theater of
operations.
Concealment.
tion
Approach march.
unit.
or formation
Base
ment
Connecting files.
"Files,
Corporal of the
officer
guard, officially known as the corporal of the
Natural or
(a)
enemy fire.
The alinement of
artificial
relief.
protection
or shelter from
(6)
units or individuals
Dead
space.
The
file.
maximum
more open
position
area.
600
and
tile-ground observation
Defile.
Any narrow
fire,
by a mask.
stricts the
movement
or its
advance
The breaking up
units or
the
fire
movement
supporting
mand from
(b)
The
and organizing
seizing
of a
of terrain in
See
"Area, dispersion."
firing-position
to
time.
for
supplies.
in
formation in which the subdivisions are placed one behind the other and
of depth.
The withdrawal
of personnel, animals, or
single
column
of
men
or elements,
Individual
infantrymen
moving in the spaces between marching units,
whose mission it is to keep in sight-contact with
each other and to maintain contact between the
Files,
connecting.
units.
.-
A predetermined
line
One
oj.-
fire to
Formation, wedge.-
tactical formation in
to
less
terior
Special guard.
close coordination
That
of a special nature.
Infiltrate.
in the
enemy
posi-
or through territory
fire
(IP).
various subdivisions of a
command
are required
marching
column.
Interdiction.
The
of the
fire
by supporting weapons.
of a third.
(a)
moving forward.
com-
Development.-
is
When
This covering
to the sides.
Eire
resistance
is
met by
organized re-
of in-
fire
601
ment
of inspection regulations,
of prisoners.
resistance, outpost."
trol,
enemy from
it
becomes necessary
up to
for the
roads.
fire.
Mass formation. The formation of a company or larger unit in which the squads in
column are abreast of one another.
Mob. An organized and purposeful gathering with leaders bent on unlawful actions.
Naval emergency ground defense force
down an advance.
deserts, rivers,
may
be
pits,
like.
they
artificial:
barbed-wire entanglements,
Obstacles
may
Officer
commanding
Oral,
"Line
of
or written
dictated,
unit,
Combat
and
letters
of instruction.
of.
of
at
at
a halt or in
main
annoyance by enemy ground
forces.
Any firearm.
machine gun, or an
rifle,
carbine, etc.,
a piece.
Point.
The patrol or reconnaissance detachment which forms the leading element of an
of the
rear guard.
Point of rest.
begins.
Specifically
listening.-
movements.
one or two
man
post
Any
combat.
See
by a superior to a subordinate
covering any phase of operations in the
Post,
Naval landing party. Naval personnel organized from a ship's complement for the conduct
Obstacles.
resistance.
of
Organic.
the
line
resist-
resistance.
orders issued
field.
Outpost
Orders,
line of
Any
for action.
conspicuous terrain
features at which units may be halted for conLine, phase.
offi-
ment
movement.-
Any
tactical
move-
or a retirement.
Route march.
Security.
unit to
itself
602
of
warn
of
enemy
Sergeant
officer
of
the
guard.-
The
senior
known
petty
as
the
Shock
action.-
Skirmishers, as.
in
Terrain
inclosed
compartment.
on at
least
two
An
sides
area
by
of
terrain
critical terrain
such
as
ridge
and
attack; sentinel.
of
features
flat
it
partment.
Time, double.- Cadence at the rate of 180
steps per minute, the length of the step being
36 inches.
Time, quick.- Cadence at the rate of 120
steps per minute, the length of the step being
30 inches.
Zone of action. See "Action, zone of."
U. S.
hi
nun
3000136848